Philosophy, Aesthetics and Cultural Theory Series Editor: Hugh J. Silverman, Stony Brook University, USA The Philosophy, Aesthetics and Cultural Theory series examines the encounter between contemporary Continental philosophy and aesthetic and cultural theory. Each book in the series explores an exciting new direction in philosophical aesthetics or cultural theory, identifying the most important and pressing issues in Continental philosophy today. Derrida, Literature and War, Sean Gaston Foucault’s Philosophy of Art, Joseph J. Tanke Philosophy and the Book, Daniel Selcer


Continuum International Publishing Group The Tower Building 80 Maiden Lane 11 York Road Suite 704 London SE1 7NX New York, NY 10038 © William Watkin 2010 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or any information storage or retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from the publishers. British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. ISBN: HB: 978-1-8470-6452-3 PB: 978-0-8264-4324-3 Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Watkin, William, 1970– The literary Agamben: adventures in logopoiesis / William Watkin. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references. ISBN-13: 978-1-84706-452-3 (hbk.) ISBN-10: 1-84706-452-3 (hbk.) ISBN-13: 978-0-8264-4324-3 (pbk.) ISBN-10: 0-8264-4324-9 (pbk.) 1. Agamben, Giorgio, 1942–Knowledge–Literature. 2. Literature–Philosophy. I. Title. B3611.A44W37 2010 2009030741 195–dc22

Typeset by Newgen Imaging Systems Pvt Ltd, Chennai, India Printed and bound in Great Britain by CPI Antony Rowe Ltd, Chippenham, Wiltshire

a Emilia e Luca “Long have we laboured in miracle realms” .

This page intentionally left blank .

The Idea of Prose Poetic Gestures The Tablet. Philosophical Gesturality Potentiality x xi 1 4 6 9 13 17 20 23 26 32 41 41 44 48 52 54 58 61 63 vii .CONTENTS Acknowledgements List of Abbreviations Exoteric Dossier: The Literary Agamben Projection: There is Language Infancy: Animals and Children Ineffability and Experience The Stanza The Sign Negating Negation Subjective Enunciation The Semiotic Poetic Dictation FIRST EPISODE: ON THE WAY TO LOGOPOIESIS Chapter 1 Logos. Thinking Thought Poetic Thinking Poetry and Philosophy Communicability. The Thing Itself The Idea of Language Communicability.

the Turn of Verse The Definition of Poetry Boustrophedonics Kle sis. Thinking through Making Poiesis Praxis Techne The Art Thing Finitude Morphe. The Messianic As Not ˉ Messianic Kairos Messianic Rhyme An Endless Falling Into Silence Tension: The One Line Chapter 6 Caesura. Thinking Tautology The Logo-Poiesis Tautology The Exemplary Tautology of Logopoiesis Infinite Poetry The Habits of the Muse Chapter 5 Enjambement. the Space of Thought The Caesura Apotropaics 117 119 122 124 129 135 135 139 144 149 153 155 162 166 166 174 viii . Modern Anti-Poiesis Chapter 3 Modernity. Shape Entelechy Arche. Productive Anti-poiesis Living As If or As Not Auratic Twilight Shock! Profaning Scission Taste and Terror How to Exit Art Modern Aesthetic Desubjectivization 69 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 87 88 92 94 97 99 103 107 SECOND EPISODE: ADVENTURES IN LOGOPOIESIS Chapter 4 Logopoiesis.Chapter 2 Poiesis.

the Turn of Thinking Notes Bibliography Index 180 186 189 194 203 218 229 ix .Ease: The Proximate Space Corn: In The Corner of The Room Rhythm Recursion.

University. The Man Without Content. Copyright © 1981. the writing of this book coincided with the birth of my daughter . I must also thank Brunel University for granting me a year-long sabbatical to complete this work.. Barbara Montanari. Excerpts from Giorgio Agamben. Obvious it is that sharing a house with an Italian is useful when writing a book on Agamben. 1984 by John Ashbery. Finally. the title of this book is his. x . whose careful stewardship of the book in its latter stages was much appreciated.ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Thanks are due to my editors Hugh Silverman. living with someone so much more intelligent than I. . miraculous year. but also for her many comments. I greatly appreciate the questions and remarks that followed which encouraged but also challenged me. Excerpts from Giorgio Agamben. and Sarah Campbell. Dearest Barbara. and aids to translation. more unexpected it was that sharing a home with a theoretical physicist would open up for me the very structural basis of poetry and thinking. that is truly living. So it is that the last but also always the first expression of gratitude as ever goes to my wife. and my son. not merely because of the incredible support she has given me over this past. intense. . on behalf of the author. Chapter Two was presented as a seminar at Brunel University in March 2009. granted by permission of Georges Borchardt. Permission to use “Warrant” granted by Charles Bernstein. 1982. 1983. Inc. Reprint of the final stanza from “Down By the Station Early in the Morning” from A WAVE by John Ashbery. and Potentialities: Collected Essays in Philosophy © 1999 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Jr. suggestions. Language and Death © 1991 by the Regents of the University of Minnesota.

trans. 2007). 2001). PA: Bucknell University Press. 1995). Alain Badiou. trans. Giorgio Agamben. Martin Heidegger. Giorgio Agamben. Liz Heron (London: Verso. trans. 3–24. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life (1995). Daniel Heller-Roazen (Stanford: Stanford University Press. trans. 1999). Idea of Prose (1985). no. trans. 1998). Infancy and History: On the Destruction of Experience (1978). Handbook of Inaesthetics (1998).” Diacritics 30. 1996). Daniel Heller-Roazen (Stanford: Stanford University Press.LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AP BT C CC EHP EP HI HS IH IP IPP Leland De La Durantaye. Joan Stambaugh (Albany: SUNY Press. In the Process of Poetry: The New York School and the Avant-Garde (Lewisburg. Keith Hoeller (New York: Humanity Books. The End of the Poem (1996). William Watkin. 2 (2000). “Agamben’s Potential. Elucidations of Hölderlin’s Poetry (1981). trans. xi . 2005). trans. Giorgio Agamben. trans. 2000). Giorgio Agamben. Michael Hardt (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. trans. Alain Badiou. Michael Sullivan and Sam Whitsitt (Albany: SUNY Press. Alberto Toscano (Cambridge: Polity Press. 1993). 1993). Alberto Toscano (Stanford: Stanford University Press. The Coming Community (1990). The Century (2005). Giorgio Agamben. Being and Time (1953).

PA Catherine Mills. 1982). Lessons on the Analytic of the Sublime (1991). M Jacques Derrida. Thought. O Giorgio Agamben. trans. 2004). On Mourning: Theories of Loss in Modern Literature (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Hertz (San Francisco: Harper Collins. MWE Giorgio Agamben. trans. Kevin Attell (Stanford: Stanford University Press. 2004). xii . trans. 1999). 1999). Language and Death: The Place of Negativity (1982).” Paragraph 31. Language. The Man Without Content (1970).. 1994). Multiple Arts. Philosophy. LD Giorgio Agamben. Poetry. The Philosophy of Agamben (Stocksfield: Acumen Press. 2000). no. Peter D. trans. 1991). trans. Manifesto for Philosophy (1989). 1971). The Open: Man and Animal (2002). MP Alain Badiou. Para Paragraph 25. Alan Bass (London: Harvester Wheatsheaf. N Giorgio Agamben. NC: Duke University Press. PLT Martin Heidegger. 2005). Silliman and Agamben. Margins of Philosophy (1972). ed. MA Jean-Luc Nancy. trans. Pinkus with Michael Hardt (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. 2006). 1971). OM William Watkin. Norman Madarasz (Albany: SUNY. 2008).LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS LAS Jean-François Lyotard. OWL Martin Heidegger. 2 (2002). MofP William Watkin. no. Albert Hofstadter (New York: Harper & Row. Nihilism: The Uncanniest of Guests (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Ninfe (Torino: Bollati Boringhieri. On the Way to Language (1959). Vincenzo Binetti and Cesare Casarino (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. Daniel Heller-Roazen (Stanford: Stanford University Press. Georgia Albert (Stanford: Stanford University Press. Simon Sparks (Stanford: Stanford University Press. Karen E. trans. Literature. trans. 3 (2008). Elizabeth Rottenberg (Stanford: Stanford University Press. 1999). Politics. MWC Giorgio Agamben. trans. 344–364. Shklovsky. LPN Shane Weller. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer (Durham. trans. 2008). 2008). “The Materialization of Prose: Poiesis versus Dianoia in the Work of Godzich & Kittay. Muses II. P Potentialities (1999). Means Without Ends (1996). PMD Andrew Norris ed.

2007). 1999). blogspot.. 2008). 1977). http://williamwatkin. 2005). Blanchot and Agamben (Albany: SUNY QCT Martin Heidegger. 2002). William Watkin’s Blog. trans. Republic. Patricia Dailey (Stanford: Stanford University Press. trans.LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS Prof Giorgio Agamben. Life (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. 1993). 2008).no. The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. SL Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli eds. trans. Remnants of Auschwitz: The Witness and the Archive (1999). WGA Justin Clemens. William Lovitt (London: Harper Perennial. Profanations (2005). and Alex Murray eds. TTR The Time That Remains: A Commentary on the Letter to the Romans (2000). Literature. The Question Concerning Technology. Stanzas: Word and Phantasm in Western Culture (1977). Jeff Fort (New York: Zone Books. trans. RP Thomas Carl Wall. TP John Ashbery. Martinez (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. Selected Poetry (Oxford: Oxford Paperbacks. trans. 2005). 1 (2008). Kevin Attell (Chicago: University of Chicago Press. WWB William Watkin. Three Poems (New York: Penguin. xiii . SE Giorgio Agamben. Ronald L. RA Giorgio Agamben. Robin Winterfield (Oxford: Oxford World Classics. ST Giorgio Agamben. 1993). trans. 2007). Nicholas Heron. R Plato. trans. Radical Passivity: Lévinas. State of Exception (2003). Sovereignty and Life (Stanford: Stanford University Press. SAQ The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. Daniel Heller-Roazen (New York: Zone Books. 2008). SP Alexander Pope.

This page intentionally left blank .

This extended study of the categories of the political and modernity continues apace. what Agamben calls the biopolitical. whose sacred life was the possession and legitimization of the sovereign ready to be forfeited at any point without fear of legal repercussion. through which he likens our advanced democracies to living in a camp. This state of exception. typically. The sovereign’s legitimacy extends from the power of the state to reduce our existence to bare life or life as mere survival. makes of us that most despised figure from Roman law. perhaps. the homo sacer and our current “state of exception. our bare life can be taken from us at any point without the state having to answer to the very apparatus of law from which is gains legitimated power through its right of occasional exception from legal norms. bare life.EXOTERIC DOSSIER: THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Italian philosopher Giorgio Agamben (b. 1942) first came to prominence in the field of political philosophy with the publication in 1995 of his explosive book Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. often unremittingly negative critique of our Western modernity in terms of the political and its relation to life. In the complex and. That exception has become the norm is the basis of Agamben’s savage attack on our biopolitical modernity. is overseen by sovereign power. 1 . the homo sacer. In this work Agamben presents his critique of our political modernity as a permanent state of exception/emergency. now stretched to six volumes or around a third of his total published output. In particular through the consideration of sovereignty.” he presents a convincing cartography of the political in our age that is. Living perpetually in this denuded zone of indistinction between biological existence as such (zoé) and our social life (bios). confrontational studies that make up the ongoing Homo Sacer project Agamben proposes a radical. Like the homo sacer.

ponders. instead opens the door to just such a possibility of tertiary ruination. destining. And there is another Agamben. unless under the auspices of dialectical resolution or archeunity. As is often the case with the dual structures of metaphysics the energy between two terms leaves little space for the imposition of a third. for example. and terrifying shadows. This is the Agamben we are most familiar with.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN the leading revolutionary political theory that we have. so desperate to negate the third Agamben. but no one can fully suppress the ability of the uncanny to undermine studiously erected structures of identity. he rediscovers pieces or elements of being. There is the one who lingers in the existential. the literary Agamben.3 Negri is far from alone in asserting that “Agamben” is a homonymic moniker referring to two thinkers of radical dissimilarity. Thus Negri is canny enough—well aware as he is that even though he dismisses the three books preceding Language and Death (1982) as a “literary apprenticeship” (SL. who. Away from the political/materialist Agamben there is another Agamben. attains the power of being (that is. one of Agamben’s great productive antagonists. These are the metaphysical and the political Agambens respectively.5 Thus Negri. through immersion in the work of philology and linguistic analysis. by manipulating and constructing them).1 Antonio Negri. one a philosopher of negative being and the other an etymo-philologer and habitué of material clues. the uncanny unwelcome guest at the intimate if troubled feast that rages still tête-à-tête between metaphysics and politics. 2 .4 This enforced subjective scission is strategic. sometimes so marked it is suggestive of the possibility that there are more Agambens out there writing philosophy than was first assumed. Numerous critics have noted a seemingly contradictory bifurcation in the Agamben methodology. rather infamously:2 It seems there are two Agambens. where he is perpetually forced into a confrontation with the idea of death. 111). and the one about whom I will have the least to say in the chapters that follow. the “literary” Agamben is not mere youthful promiscuousness but a serious and lifelong affair for his compatriot—to retain the propensity for plenitude to be found in dualistic metaphysics at the same time as he praises Agamben for finally putting an end to this tradition. Canny enough perhaps.

EXOTERIC DOSSIER: THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Speaking of Agamben’s oft-cited application of the voice as such emptied of content as a solution for post-metaphysical negativity he concedes: “this nihilistic self-dissolution of being frees the voice— but another voice. muted by the clamour of the bios. to the tones of the tern. it is now poiesis. adventurer in poiesis. Attend then.6 3 . absolved of the negativity of which it had been the bearer. if you will. 113–14). that the following pages wish to augment. Effectively. It is this voice. beyond the learnéd and almost overwhelming conversation between the two Agambens and his many critics. an absolute voice. intimidated by the sovereignty of metaphysical thought. and yet always persistent and quietly insistent. the literary Agamben. inasmuch as it endures as the only power of this dissolved universe” (SL.

This risk-bound declaration of intent occurs in the short piece that prefaces Infancy and History (1978) entitled “Experimentum Linguae. clearly. . what is the meaning of ‘I speak’?”2 This may seem like youthful exuberance and in the mouths of others at similarly early stages in their career might strike the seasoned observer as a touch hubristic. to make language appear before us such as it is. is able to predict the guiding topic of all one’s books.” Such an experience. written and unwritten?3 Now. after all. 30 years later one has to concede that the young thinker was either preternaturally prescient or. requires that one “venture into a perfectly empty dimension . in its full material yet voided exteriority. unbelievably obdurate for it is undoubtedly true that the questioning of the presence of language remains at the heart of Agamben’s political thinking. the centrality of literature to his work.4 To see language as it is. his metaphysics and. he suggests. cannot think its chirping. most pertinent to our study here. in which what is experienced is language itself. 5). however. Such a pure exteriority of an empty language which yet still speaks is both the basis of Agamben’s “metaphysics” and of my claim that the literary Agamben is an essential element of that mode of thinking. past and future. in the preface to his third book. in which one can encounter the pure exteriority of language” (IH. I have stubbornly pursued only one train of thought: what is the meaning of ‘there is language’ [vi è il linguaggio]. over the years.” In this thin sheaf of pages he explains that he is undertaking an experiment with language “in the true meaning of the words.)1 At the age of 36. .PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE (The cricket. a characteristically confident Giorgio Agamben declares: “In both my written and unwritten books. Who. to let language speak 4 .

.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE itself without being exhausted through its enunciation is the experiment Agamben conducts on thought as such in all his written works thus far. As for the unwritten. what does it mean to live as a human being. if there is a human voice. To understand the relation between thought and literature through their complex.5 It is the nexus wherein his great ontological question. The two interlocutions are.6 not posed until many years later. The first of these is extrapolated from an. 4). in effect. 5 . and yet related responses when confronted with the empty plane of language or the sheerness of its suddenly uprearing edifice is our simple mode of conceptual transport here in this now-written work. one will take his word for it that this is also the case. or better drama. In this incorporated and yet incorporeal work he asks: “Is there a human voice. 3). the possession of voice/language by the animal and the privation of voice in the human. what is the meaning of “I speak”? or at the very least this demand will eventually lead Agamben to consider the political and anthropological implications of this assertion for the Western definition of human being in works such as Homo Sacer and The Open (2002). La voce umana (the human voice). what is the relationship between voice and language in this regard. differential. unpublished fragment of another great work Agamben never wrote.?” (IH. where does this lead the classic philosophical definition of the human as zoon logon echon or “the living being which has ¯ ¯ language”? (IH. oversteps the threshold of his other great demand that primarily occupies the first two decades or so of his career. . and Agamben has indeed not yet done so. is this what we humans mean by language. a voice that is the voice of man as the chirp is the voice of the cricket . An adventure in the mind and in the word is how I would term such an experiment that can only commence through access to the singular nature of the relation between literature and linguistic exteriority that philosophy has traditionally termed poiesis. and if we do not find a human voice. This theme. The projection of the “problem” of empty linguistic exteriority from the experiments with language the youthful Agamben had been performing in the laboratory of his mind allows him to address with great speed in the pages which follow some of the major problems of philosophy. This unusual rumination leads to a series of related questions such as. up to this point. returns again and again in Agamben’s early work. bundled together in what might be termed his interim request. what does it mean to have language.

purely exterior landscape of language as such. and voice is therefore foundational.) Infancy does not describe our actual early childhood. the role of language in subjective enunciation. they do not actually speak although they do possess language. enunciation. (The difference between speech. and language’s materiality. and self-regarding entity? INFANCY: ANIMALS AND CHILDREN One of the earliest postings into the vast dossier of Agamben’s great experimentum primarily concerns what he calls human linguistic infancy or how we humans are expelled from language as such into linguistic and metaphysical scission. and our acquisition of a voice.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Consistent with Negri’s remark and the critical community’s claims of the two Agambens. but is an ontological term for a state of being indicating a compound of questions pertaining to how humans have language and how this relates to their 6 . Infancy as a concept originates in the observable phenomenon that humans learn to speak whereas animals do not in two significant ways. and semiotic materiality therefore form the five arms of the guiding star of the Agambenian ontological constellation that shines above the empty and literally unwelcoming. the dependence of metaphysical definitions of language on division and negation. echoing that of the animal. scission. tautological. Acquisition of voice.7 What kind of language. negation. my contention is that in order to take up a position in relation to the literary in Agamben one must come to terms with language. what order of communication. however. and second they are pre-possessed of their voice as soon as they come into being. of language: communicability or a language that communicates itself without communicating any specific thing. is this solipsistic. Agamben uses the term infancy in his early work to describe an interim state between our pure state of grace in language. or as-such-ness. language. First. The cold light cast by this stelliform compound reveals for us linguistic exteriority defined as the very existence. Aside from the obvious fact that literature is composed of language and constitutes a profound experience with language. what if anything does the literary have to contribute to the arrival at the sheer face of the outcrop that is language’s exteriority? The answer resides in Agamben’s complex investigation of language as such through ideas pertaining to the acquisition of human voice.

and chimpanzees. first. for that matter. thus far have not. they are already inside it.8 In one basic sense infancy captures the process wherein human animals learn. One can say the cricket chirps but not the human “. as we saw. . by implication. the human has no voice of its own.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE apparently not having a voice of their own such as one finds in the cricket. If humans. The historicity of the human being has its basis in this difference and discontinuity. or have speech foisted upon them. for infancy brings it discontinuity and the difference between language and discourse. acquire. 59) Infancy in this instance names the fact that human animals are the only ones to emerge from language into the ambiguity of the unidentifiable sound of the human voice. as indeed developmentally we seem to do. . in order to speak. or a cricket’s chirping one also names the animal’s language and. means they cannot be appropriated by “we who do” as a means of securing subjective self-definition:9 Animals are not in fact denied language. instead. This could be taken to mean how we come to language but this is not how Agamben views infancy. by preceding speech. In disputation with the Aristotelian inheritance Agamben does not accept that animals are without language which. Thus. for example. . by having an infancy. (IH. In this way the term infancy describes having language and privation of voice as fundamental conditions for human being establishing an important interplay between possession and privation that echoes throughout the whole of Agamben’s work. or at least he is uncomfortable with the uncritical ¯ ¯ acceptance of this formulation within philosophy. if language is truly man’s nature . as humans acquire 7 . regardless of our tireless encouragement. splits this single language and. are the only beings that are not born with a clearly identifiable voice then they must come to their voice or arrive at speech. has to constitute himself as the subject of language–he has to say I. . then man’s nature is split at its source. on the contrary. they are always and totally language . . language and speech are indivisible and when one speaks of an animal voice. . their being. a dog’s bark. Man. Unlike the metaphysical tradition Agamben is not at ease with the Aristotelian definition of human being as zoon logon echon.” Second. Animals do not enter language.10 In contrast to this. For the animal. of all animals.

first silencing language and then. Life. a return to a pre-divided idea of a pure language. it is not the fact that we have language that defines our humanity.12 Thus one could put together the three great questions of Agambenian ontology by exclaiming that what it means for human beings to live is the fact that they “have” language as a silenced potential embedded within the human voice. and silence. language-speech. Our entrance into this philosophical cul-de-sac is the fact that we humans have infancy. Fourth. and voice are therefore separate yet inseparable terms within Agamben’s thought. In reality these two nascent states are simply two elements of an overall infancy as an ongoing process of being. and as a critique of the basis of modern thinking on negation. and finally as negation. speech denies any experience of the nature of language as such comparable to the manner in which animals experience language. and this is a profoundly Heideggerian gesture. but the way in which we come to have it—not the zoon or the logon but the generally ignored echon ¯ ¯ that matters. that forms the bedrock of Agamben’s attack on metaphysics and modern ontology upon which all the various edifices of the numerous Agamben’s are placed. in a destinal and possibly liberationist historicization. Third. from this.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN their voice a clear division between speech and language in the human animal develops. is infancy. or lack of it. and infancy as that which we must recuperate. the follow-up text to Infancy and History. Yet it also involves us. It would seem. forming the basis of the meaning of our possession of voice. This is effectively the argument of Language and Death. voice itself. in seeking to regain language we create the possibility of becoming something like a post-human. a period wherein we acquire speech. that there are two infancies: infancy as that which we have lost. In losing language we become a human being and alive. speech over language. voice. language. the way we have language is first as bifurcation. Infancy submits us to history expelling us from language as such and propelling us into a bifurcated sense of language as phone and logos. The only way out of this metaphysical dead end. this division and our awareness of it define human being as self-consciously different from all other beings. then as subordination. 8 . eventually. as Agamben is at pains to show. Thus.11 It is only because we have infancy that we have a history and it is only because we have a history that we are human and possess the potential to access the full meaning of this by a recuperation of our infancy. Agamben argues.

In contrast to this tradition of negation Agamben involves himself in an experiment. For language to signify and thus become the human language we are all familiar with. “in which the limits of language are to be found not outside language. there must be reference to something that is not language that it signifies. the concept of infancy is then an attempt to think through these limits in a direction other than that of the vulgarly ineffable” (IH. 4). 4). which seems to direct us towards pure thinking without language. Ironically. actually comes to name language for this tradition. post-vocal divided language. as “not something ineffable but something superlatively sayable: the thing of language” (IH.” a place where thought can go and language cannot. a thing or a truth to be known. the unsaid and the ineffable. 9 . “far from indicating the limit of language. 4–6). Kant calls this the “transcendental experience” of pure thought. In Language and Death specifically Agamben identifies a metaphysical reliance on ineffable unsayability as modern thinking’s greatest weakness leading philosophy into a reification of the unsayable as the negative basis for being in language. It is a concept without a name and knowledge without an object. “If every thought can be classified according to the way in which it articulates the question of the limits of language.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE INEFFABILITY AND EXPERIENCE Infancy solves another problem for Agamben beyond that of the relation of the human to the animal via the faculty of speech as a negation of language. Erdmann knowledge independent of sensibility (see IH. the ineffable in philosophy. 54–65). Agamben goes on to read the experience of the ineffable in the work of Kant and German historian Carl Erdmann as an attempt to think a concept that can be known but which has no referent in the world. based on language. Accepting this to be the case the ineffable can be said to come to presence in that it only exists as pure thought or what language cannot say. and second. Thought has become embroiled in thinking language in terms not of what it can say but of what it cannot. 4). to identify the singularity of language as such. defining being and thinking along the way as first. after Benjamin. presuppositionally negative (see LD. instead “express its invincible power of presupposition. namely that of the ineffable. This is our old friend the experimentum linguae which Agamben renames here infancy. the unsayable being precisely what language must presuppose in order to signify” (IH. As Agamben says.

language that says nothing other than here I am. or a typical conversation in a British pub towards closing time. pre. but in naming it we find that the name never entirely renders the object. I am language. rather it is language that is content-less speech. It then indicates our ability to conceive of a pure thinking not in terms of what cannot be said but what can.or ir. only to find that the name for such an experience is the ineffable or un-named as such. but in terms of what it can say if it does not refer to that which is outside of itself. infancy names the problem of human experience. The subtitle of Infancy and History is On the Destruction of Experience and a significant portion of the book is a response to the philosophical belief that in modernity one does not go through an experience but merely observes events as spectacle from the outside (see IH. This great quest to move beyond modern philosophical ineffability isolates a third and final issue in relation to infancy. 6). . Rather than. 15–49). Language as the basis of thought should be considered not in terms of what it cannot say. as a thinker. but also testing. even if all one is saying is that one can say something. a morass it has proven impossible to escape from. a reification of the unspeakable. for if it is not named there can be no shortfall of plenitude. thus concluding that language always remains insufficient to name objects. 10 . 6)? This then is a second issue: Can one testify in thought to the significance of the fact that one speaks or that language exists without recourse to referential exteriority and difference? Can there be an experience of language as speaking but saying nothing in particular? This is not language as the ineffable. as the pure fact that one speaks. that language exists” (IH.referential language. in its pure self-reference” (IH. “But what can an experience of this kind be? How can there be an experience not of an object but of language itself . Important in this regard is the fact that the words “experiment” and “experience” share the same Latin root and consequently the meaning of experience for Agamben originates not only in the act of sustaining or going through something. . Infancy first names our coming away from being animal.13 This problem has afflicted language for a good deal of time naming a clear division in philosophy between knowledge and experience.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN in the direction of its referent. forcing the thinker to seek for a concept that cannot be named. in response to the problem that there is an object. Finally. but in an experience of language as such. experience me. Agamben instead simply introjects the problem. that which is outside of it (the referent). that we need language to name it.

8). To live as a human being means to live both from the outside of language as the being who knows but does not speak and from the inside as the being that speaks but does not know. and then imposing unworkable unities to heal this rift is a habitual failing of Western thought.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE Thus Agamben’s expressed project or experimentum linguae suggests that to understand the fact that there is language one must conduct an experiment on and undergo an experience with language. thinking. it is an impossibility of speaking from the basis of a language. It is what Agamben means by thinking and what he takes to be the truth of the very existence of the possessed faculty of language as such. Maintaining the false division. Infancy reveals the confluence of language. is to undergo a new form of experience as testing or thinking.14 For Agamben the experience of language. 8). defining human being as “neither Homo sapiens nor Homo loquens. it is an experience. and being human within the very faculty of language that says nothing specifically but merely enacts the experience of having language before one succumbs to the way in which our tradition has chosen to possess this faculty. To undergo an experience with language. he concedes. therefore. but Homo sapiens loquendi” (IH. self-conscious subjectivity. Infancy names this third possibility: to maintain experience as knowing and as undergoing. As he says: “In this sense what is experienced in the experimentum linguae is not merely an impossibility of saying: rather. Either our experiences are so unique that they are one-off events that can hold no meaning for “the human experience” at large. denying that the event in question actually pertains to how we live. In the modern age the division between the two meanings of experience is most profoundly felt. as Agamben sees it. primordial being for whom the division between phone and logos has not yet come about. cannot be undertaken exterior to language as he contends some philosophers have attempted. or we observe events from the outside as judgemental critics. Human language. evidenced by our endless pursuit of novel and new experiences. a form of thinking that does not look at language 11 . which he takes to be the experience of experience itself. namely as the imposition of scission as a means of creating human. via that infancy that dwells in the margin between language and discourse. between experience as knowledge and as going through. Yet nor can it be experienced entirely from the inside as in some imagined. of the very faculty or power of speech” (IH. is by definition bifurcated.

Agamben’s rests in large part within the silence as regards how we have language and the assumption that the human ontological relation to language depends on the voice to such a degree that the truth of human being. but which accepts the presence of language as such as exteriority as such. While infancy is observable in children it would be a mistake to suggest that infancy is a psychosomatic or neonatal stage of our development (see IH. 54–5). 24). our actual infancy is merely a useful developmental analogue for an ontological temporality of development that presupposes a pre-human. Infancy. while Agamben is critical of both Heidegger and Derrida. yet refusing to succumb to the various aporias that have traditionally arrested the progression of thought on this matter. therefore. therefore. In a way.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN from the outside. suggesting a developmental. said relation to language. is silenced. One issue here is that the very choice of the name infancy is as confusing as it is illustrative. what does language say. and an in-between and constantly emergent human being. If Heidegger’s critique of metaphysics resides in the tradition’s obfuscation of authentic Being. 12 . it opens up a zone that exists for thought and being between language as such and discourse. a human defined as life.15 his own philosophy is partly a colloquium of his two great predecessors: an attack on the metaphysical occlusion of being (in language) that was actuated historically by the prioritization of speech in the form of the voice. or occupy language and seek for exterior referents. accepting their division as a fact of our ontological Geschichte or deep history (see QCT. or psychosomatic empiricism behind our being with or having language. This is not to be conceived of as a return to a pre-human animal stage but is rather a moment between our emergence from the animal in our realization that we have no voice to speak of. 39–62). which we might call infant being. If anything. Infancy allows Agamben to name this alternative mode of thinking in relation to three key metaphysical problems for conventional thought: what is the human animal. provokes our attention back to the quasi-mythological “moment” before the acquisition of speech when human beings had a more direct line of sight to language in that they did not possess language but were rather possessed or captivated by language (see O. and what does it mean to experience something? Most specifically. and Derrida’s on its privileging of speech over writing. which is not only impossible to ascertain but also not what Agamben intends. zoological. and the imposition of a voice through the agency of speech.

PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE Nor should one suggest that Agamben is recounting an actual historical series: animal-infant-human. reconfigured as the term différance. If infancy is to resolve this difference then its hands are tied to some degree. for we are always in the world operating as already pre-divided beings. is an ancient problem relating to how language names truth. Certainly there are many forms of difference. the only remnant of the tradition that Heidegger leaves standing. endless deferral. and being as such. 13 . collapses the last great frontier of metaphysics. in other words. is nonspeech (see LD. to do with babies. Thus in-fancy. and knowing. although the term “before” needs careful reconsideration within what might be termed an ontological rather than historiographic or teleological temporality. Infancy has little. the ontic. infancy is to be found within the human at all stages as both remnant of the animal and potential for the post-human. 91). Rather.18 He thus designates for himself an immensely difficult task and he sets about it by returning to the scission inherent in language through the theory of signification. simply put. to live our division. It is our existence in language before the primary scission of language into phone and logos. In some way Agamben’s thought must enter into the scission of being and resolve the conflict therein without recourse to pre-human unity. THE STANZA In relation to Heidegger people often speak of the ontico-ontological difference between actual being-in-the-world. but the asymmetric difference between experience. Human being is this ontological caesura (see O. It cannot unify language and discourse into a single entity. We must stress this is not the intention of infancy. Nor can it choose language over discourse.17 This difference is not simply the difference between different technical senses of being in the work of one philosopher however. Agamben sometimes writes it like this. 13–16 & 21–2). capitalized Being. or better there are myriad differentiations to be made. To live as human means. Dasein. the ontological. This is perhaps best illustrated by the etymological root of the word wherein fans originates from fari or to speak. but is the reliance of metaphysics on difference as such.16 In a sense Derrida’s critical investigation of this difference. much as Agamben might wish. or the eradication of difference. and as such is an ontological state of speechlessness within language that precedes the potential human being’s emergence into actual humanity.

“when in fact it is the only thing truly worth interrogating” (ST. in its capacity. The 1977 volume Stanzas. For the troubadour poets the stanza was not just a structural designation but the “nucleus” of their poetry. Again in the preface—Agamben has a penchant for the exoteric as well as the esoteric statement—he considers the various significances of the term stanza for poets of the twelfth.and thirteenth-century troubadour tradition. dwelling-stability. and his considerations of poetic space and rhyme. but in response to this ancient quest for the missing womb of art in our culture Agamben states that access to the destination of this labour is “barred by the forgetfulness of a scission” so ingrained in our culture that it goes without saying. the 14 . which he regularly cites along with that of the stil novists as the origin of all modern poetics. although taking as its main area of concern the art object. The split is so fundamental to our cultural tradition that Plato could already declare it “an ancient enemy. In a way this is true although Agamben prefers to call it scission: The scission in question is that between poetry and philosophy. and open reception not only holds the words contained in the poem’s structural segmentation but also conveys the unique object of all the poetry of this period. for the entire tradition. caesura. The majority of the book proceeds to investigate the object of love ever since in the arts and has little to say about the stanza as such.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Agamben’s first major intervention on language concerns linguistic scission as the precondition for the later establishment of infancy. the troubadour concept of the stanza provides a model for discovering metaphysical truths within the very prosodic operations of the poem itself. In addition. a process Agamben emulates in his own work on the metaphysics of enjambement. but that has in modern times acquired a hegemonic character. between the poetic word and the word of thought. Students of Heidegger will immediately recognize this structure of imposed forgetting of the most important thing due to its assumed obviousness as Being. xvi). defined as a “capacious dwelling. namely the joi d’amor or unattainable joy of love. By conflating a formal technique with a meta-thematic concern the troubadour stanza takes on the quality in poetry of a “receptive ‘womb’” (ST. xvi). receptacle” (ST. brackets this fascinating topic in major statements on language and philosophy. xvi).” According to a conception that is only implicitly contained in the Platonic critique of poetry. The space of the stanza.

PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE scission of the word is construed to mean that poetry possesses its object without knowing it while philosophy knows its object without possessing it. Poetry’s tragedy is possession of the thing without knowledge of the thing. infant form of language. (ST. This is particularly because infancy resides between the poetic and philosophic word or. as if fallen from the sky. experience—some of which we have already considered. The poetic word. Both are victims of the cruel scission at the heart of human language and neither. as we saw earlier. prose.” We will take this word from now on to be the poetic word. Poetry does not know what it has. between language and discourse. therefore. xvii). stanza in Italian means room of course. Having said this. Agamben clearly does not hypostatize poetry as an ideal. by knowledge of what 15 . “And a word that has all seriousness and consciousness for itself but does not enjoy its object because it does not know how to represent it” (ST. very early on in his career. holds the key to language’s capacious inner chamber. and enjoys the object of knowledge by representing it in beautiful form. In contrast.19 Here he effectively substitutes poetry for a number of terms—language as such. Within our tradition. alone. and philosophy entirely outside on the opposing side. dissatisfied word is the immaterialized insensible word of Western philosophy. is now named as the closest we can get to an experience of language that speaks itself while not necessarily saying anything specific. therefore. the word is thus divided between a word that is unaware. the thing here being language as such whose forbears can be found in the troubadour quest for the joi d’amour represented by the stanza. poetry exists entirely in language on one side of the scission of the word. because it can only experience language as going through or sustaining. This grave. locates his philosophy within this scission between poetic joy and philosophical knowing in the capacious dwelling of the stanza as opened up and yet closed off. “In the West. while philosophy is able to test language it has no direct experience with language. xvi–xvii) These thoughts on the stanza in relation to unattainability and scission compose one of the first occasions that Agamben names the role of poetry within his overall experiment in language and is the open door for my own contention that the literary Agamben is essential to an understanding of Agamben’s work as a whole. a direct experience of language as such within which resides the meaning of human being. Agamben. for example.

The power of criticism emerges out of its collapsing and nihilization of the category of art. xvii). in modern aesthetics. the missing thing of poetry via scission. For Agamben. that which it cannot possess. and infancy are all manifestations of the tendency towards scission in Western thought imposed between two central modes of thinking language as such: philosophy and poetry. and we will investigate it in detail in the chapters to come. through its empty capaciousness. a nothingness that protects art’s most precious object. He does not. To appropriation without consciousness and to consciousness without enjoyment criticism opposes the enjoyment of what cannot be possessed and the possession of what cannot be enjoyed” (ST. so modern criticism reveals the emptiness of the modern category of art by its imposition of a division between the artist as maker and the critic as she who judges creation. and directs a large part of his energy to resolving what he sees as the false caesura at the founding of our philosophy and culture which effectively cuts the room in two. Yet he also begins a complex journey out of the abyss of philosophical nihilism onto the plain of a Benjaminian messianic positive philosophy to come through his approach to language. so it is an ambiguous strength to say the least. both revealing it and rendering it inoperative. xvii).20 We are presented with a model 16 . as Agamben calls it in relation to modern poetry and art. Agamben explains that criticism is marked by a formula “according to which it neither represents nor knows. here.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN cannot be possessed and/or possession of that which can never be known. The stanza of criticism. Further. criticism. he states most openly that the assumed problem of metaphysics is to be revealed there in that room. The stanza. contains nothing. Agamben is widely critical of the modern nihilistic tradition of valorizing negation. What he reveals for us in these early pages is the state of aesthetics in the modern age whether he likes it or not. one a modern quasi-philosophical discourse the other a historical prosodic-structural effect. but knows the representation. metaphysical scission represented in the thirteenthcentury European culture by the poetic stanza reaches its apotheosis and crisis point within the epoch of modernity in the rather different form of criticism: “Criticism is born at the moment when the scission reaches its extreme point” (ST. whether in philosophy or. but he is also something of a fatalistic thinker. Just as the ancient stanza manifests. While criticism differs in kind to the stanza.

Rather their generic subdivision courtesy first of Plato and then of Aristotle. which all amount to the same thing. on language. like being. Because we see that the room is empty we assume that first there is nothing in the room. almost. It exists as a containment space between opposing forces occupying the same zone of indifferent indistinction as infancy. but they are not genres at all. this is just the inheritance of negativity from the metaphysics of scission. knowing: logos. or that there is language. reveal its ubiquity across our culture. is. and being. meaningless pleasure: phone. The division between the two “words” is not so much imposed by Plato as reified. or at least everything in metaphysics since the Greeks. The stanza is nothing other than a pure. currently withheld from view. On one side of the stanza is the poetic word. On the other is the philosophical word. art. This word is pure. and finally indicate the role poetry has to play in any future comments on metaphysics. Agamben uses the figure of the stanza to bring this complex logic into relief. poetic and philosophic. This location contains nothing specifically and in our age we have made the error of assuming that. one must valorize negation as such. because of this indistinction. and a possible solution. THE SIGN Agamben himself imposes a dividing caesura of over a hundred pages before he finally attends to the issue of linguistic scission in Stanzas through a consideration of the sign.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE of generic languages. and third there never can be. Saussure’s development of the idea of the sign first divides the sign in a classic metaphysical gesture and then places the two components of the sign in an essential 17 . scission as stanza. if disgruntled.” namely the room as such and while to us this appears as an empty and. this is pure. is an attempt to veil the truth of the basis of all thought. language as scission. Yet there is something “in the room. in terms of the future. an error for which we suffer but which may also be a productive and generative errancy. because it is Being. or how we have language. What language is is portrayed in this impossibly contracted history of everything. leaving us with a dark legacy. as a philological consideration of the troubadours’ idea of the stanza. that is disguised. neutral medium. hopeless space. Language as such. Agamben’s great project. second that there never was.

In so doing it naturally foregrounds the imposition of false scission: “The symbolic. and its being present. and the two are separated by a bar. especially for Hegel. it has been widely ignored by classic metaphysical strategies. therefore. These strategies. 136). . not only does this scission produce the sign. in the sense that its manifestation is simultaneously a concealment. our conception of language as a mode of signification reliant on the sign is not actually language at all but the historical solution to this primary scission of presence from absence. a lack” (ST. he argues.” In other words.21 Agamben comes to this “original fracture of presence that is inseparable from the Western experience of being. Meaning is separated from. 136). as he says: “Only because presence is divided and unglued is something like ‘signifying’ possible. has been a source of metaphysical unease. before access to materiality or intercourse between the two values is literally banned or barred. For that matter. is also the diabolic that continually transgresses and exposes the truth of this knowledge” (ST. The symbol. is located below the meaning of the word. it also creates the discipline of thinking called philosophy: “only because there is at the origin not plenitude but deferral . . the act of recognition that reunites what is divided. 136). and the relation of latent to sensible 18 . familiar to us now. positive destiny. yet the effect is not actual reconciliation but a painful reminder of this most destructive caesura. the signifier.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN yet profoundly heterogeneous relation: S/s (with S representing meaning and s the material signifier). primarily because the symbol brings together S/s into a single unified entity. Justifying this claim. rest in establishing one half of the division as more true than the other. then placed above material noise. through a consideration of the aesthetics of the symbolic emblem. completing his narrative. In this way all signs can be said to be part-symbolic or. All three gestures are typical of the metaphysical scission represented by Plato’s banning of poetry from the republic. in the model of paradigm and copy. is there the need to philosophize” (ST. In this algorithm the phonic element of the word. and ejecting us for now from the spacious medium of Stanzas Agamben explains that while said scission is foundational and its “resolution” our only possible.” meaning that “all that comes to presence comes there as to the place of a deferral and an exclusion. Symbolic acts. temporarily or artificially impose a unity on the primacy of scission in metaphysics.

insignificant.22 19 . 137). it contains within its own boundaries a sensuous representation of both unity and scission in the form of the bar. Not only does it present a unity to mask the primary scission of language-thought. 156). Agamben believes one can overcome scission. Again here we can see the quasi-symbolic nature of the sign. Unlike Derrida.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE manifestation. but the barrier within the sign functions as metaphysic’s betrayer. the very thing the philosophy of language does not see. In a Lacanian gesture. it is the structuring of thought qua scission. Agamben is not an adherent to the science of signification. or Derridean différance without succumbing to said division. Aside from his regular use of the term semiotics. As Agamben presciently states: “In modern semiology. the bar (/) of the graphic S/s . Stanzas is by far Agamben’s most sustained engagement with psychoanalysis. itself supposedly a symbol of unity. “In the reflection on language. and ultimately indifferent mediality. however. although the scission between presence and absence comes very close to being archetypal for Agamben. it betrays through its symbol-status the division at the heart of metaphysical systems of unity.” Our idea of language as signification is false. in particular here “language. It exists in the form of a cancelled stanza more accurately represented as S [ / ] s than the Saussurian S/s. as Agamben believes contentiously that Derrida has (ST. Every semiology that fails to ask why the barrier that establishes the possibility of signifying should itself be resistant to signification. . the bar. but rather. as in Derrida. is the very thing that is the source of its inauthenticity and possible rehabilitation. This scission is not specifically a division between one thing and another. It is therefore metaphysical structural scission that Agamben consistently takes to task. which has always been par excellence the plane on which the experience of the original fracture is represented. with that omission. . 136). its own authentic intention” (ST. this interpretation is crystallized in the notion of the sign as the expressive unity of the signifier and signified” (ST. that is. The sign represents for him the ultimate in metaphysical amnesia and until we overcome signification we remain trapped in a failed project of thinking that imposes false unities to obscure the original scission at the heart of thought. within its graphicality in the figuration of the bar. the forgetting of the original fracture of presence is manifested precisely in what ought to betray it. falsifies. deferral. The bar is language as pure. If the sign is a source of displeasure for Agamben.

1–5 & 59–60). then.23 For Heidegger it is the impossibility of Dasein to ever actually occupy the space of its own being (LD. 4–5). there. an assumed quality of 20 . Deixis is a term used in linguistics to indicate the point of reference of a statement that relies absolutely on context. here. most surprising and technical part of this critique. that. or of something else.25 Up to this point the normative mode of literature was performed poetry and if someone other than the narrator spoke. These are most commonly personal pronouns. this. Language and Death. according to Godzich and Kittay. the jongleur or performer used a series of gestures known to his mime-literate audience to show that he was speaking as someone else. philosophy’s reliance on deixis or pronouns to manifest being and the concomitant dissatisfaction they draw from this procedure. For Hegel this is the inability of the sensuous sign to render in full the material realm (LD. most famously in Heidegger’s being-towards-death (LD. The first of these is a reliance on death as a means of defining being.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN NEGATING NEGATION Agamben’s first sustained engagement with the metaphysical tradition. This exophoric capability explains the rise of deixis as a literary device from the twelfth century onwards. or something was referred to over there. Reading Hegel and Heidegger he strives to demonstrate how nihilism dominates their thought in three ways. 13–14). Each of these three themes is of no small relevance to what we have already learnt of infancy. As we have already dealt with the issue of the ineffable through an analysis of unsayability we are left with the third. continues the development of the idea of infancy through a radical critique of the dependence of modern thought on negativity.24 Deixis as a form of indication can be described as exophoric in that it refers to extra-linguistic material. The dependency of our concept of being on finitude or death is usually taken alongside our having language as the basis of the fundamental difference between humans and animals. I. it. wherein the possibility of having an intra-textual technique for referring to assumed extra linguistic material or presences was developed. The third is the reliance of both thinkers on deixis when trying to express language’s necessary insufficiency in relation to knowledge. you. The second is the retention of ineffability within thought. With the slow but inexorable rise of prose this bringing in of the outside into the text. but other pronouns indicative of space and time are also deictic: now.

will come to hold a central importance in Agamben’s thought and its relation to poetry. Naturally.29 and cataphoric projective reference. exophoric context-dependent indication. Agamben is most interested in how both thinkers by definition place being in negation by utilizing deictic pronouns to indicate an absence at the heart of language. by definition disappoints. 4). In Language and Death Agamben foregrounds the importance of deixis for modern philosophy specifically in the use of the German words diese (this) in Hegel and da (there) in Heidegger (LD. and so on previously mentioned: “The gun.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE prose that differentiates it from the so-called “univocality” of the poem. noun.27 Deixis is also regularly utilized as a form of anaphora or internal reference that refers back to a subject. 19–26). the brevity and baldness of the pronominal will fail to convey the full complexity of a sensuous presence for Hegel. There-being or being-the-there as Agamben re-translates Dasein (LD. anaphoric recursive reference. Finally. It tells us where being is but says nothing of how or why it is. Hegel’s interest in the sensuous versus Heidegger’s in ontological topography.” The “it” in this sentence is both deictic and anaphoric.” Similarly. Venice. inaugural syntagm: “And justify the ways of God to man.” and so on. and in its anaphoric/cataphoric mode it is indeed nothing other than a convenience of abbreviation. Imagine Islamic art. both writers find that while language is essential to access truth the insufficiencies of the signifier mean that something in language always remains unsaid of the thing expressed: the world and our being in it.”28 All three elements of deixis. the very thing 21 . referring to the previously mentioned firearm (“firearm” in this sentence is anaphoric but not deictic). the complexity of either the world being occupies or how it occupies that world. and then replace each with the reductive “this. Working at opposite ends of the rather colourless deictic spectrum. or indeed anything of use about the where or the there.26 was facilitated by simple phrases such as “he said. it can also function cataphorically such as in the opening of Paradise Lost wherein the subject of the opening sentence is not known until the very end of the long. For both authors this referential shortfall is represented by the silent voice at the heart of being. They effectively use anaphoric/cataphoric deixis as shorthand for an already uttered or to be uttered authentic name of being. give it to me.” “that door. or the work of Lyn Hejinian. for Heidegger. “there” does little to convey.

through the idea of human infancy. the metaphysical capitalization of the Voice as a condition of being in withdrawal. They then. which one could describe as the problem that a word does not totally contain its meaning or referent. “This” may not capture Venice but nor will the prose of Ruskin. however diligently Proust attended to it. which results in the negation of philosophical negativity by the end of the final seminar (LD. both Hegel and Heidegger succumb to a primary scission in the word between signifier. classically. the human voice as lack. a work every bit as important to the collapsing of metaphysics as Being and Time or Of Grammatology. The tripartite critique of modern thought enacted in Language and Death. and signified. that the voice is defined by what it cannot say (the ineffable). This returns us to the philosophical tendency to view language in terms of exterior objectivity due to the split assumed within the sign between language and discourse. In effect there are numerous voices in Language and Death. To sum up in more familiar terms. relies in each instance on an assault on the voice. There is the voice of the animal (especially in death). 106). Agamben believes. While he blames the valorization of the voice for the dominance of negativity in metaphysics. with the voice being set up as the failure to speak or the failure to mean within thought’s reliance on 22 . although Agamben does not write it like this. is not to try and render experience through language but to render experience as language. Agamben’s relation to the voice is complex. and then perhaps the Voice under negation. Agamben systematically attacks the idea that human voice emerges from the animal. and the failure of speech to evince knowledge. the world or being. in reality a synecdochic anamorphism wherein one element of linguistic scission comes to stand in for language as a whole. If language as pure mediality has been artificially and with violence bifurcated in metaphysics into phone (voice) and logos (language as discourse). Voice. If one demands of language that it is a tool for reference one consigns language to inevitable failure as regards knowledge. Deixis is always used to indicate something exterior to language and so is shorthand for all the failings of language’s referential shortfall. valorize and exteriorize the signified only to discover a profound asymmetry in signification. he also seeks for solutions to negativity ostensibly through the voice.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN that enunciates being and yet leaves its truth unsaid. One might then ask the question why thinkers of such sophistication resort to deictic indicators at all. this or there. The only solution to this problem.

instead he uses this very dependence to present a combined theory of referential ontology that he calls desubjectivization. albeit under negation. The problem is that either language fails to convey the profound texturality and diversity of the sensuous. mistakenly. language is seen in modern philosophy as essential to thinking and yet source of thinking’s deficiency. means that we come to be human by 23 . therefore. synthesize his ideas on negation and scission in direct relation to language. Language brings to presence. Agamben calls this exasperation. not being as such but language as such. The possession of an articulated or bifurcated system of differential referentiality which we term. in part. enunciate its own self through language. specifically his theories of the subject of enunciation and the semiotic. the Voice.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE language. SUBJECTIVE ENUNCIATION It might appear from Agamben’s critique of metaphysics that deixis is. or having to. in part. “this” thing is always a privation of the plenitude of the actual thing. there-being. the second about the scission at the heart of metaphysics between language and discourse that will ultimately lead us to view what Agamben believes philosophy has occluded. one must pass through the negative abyssal gullet of the voice. Rather than attempt to remove the reliance of objective and ontological referentiality on deixis. Yet it is central to his methodology to look for a productive projection out from the very heart of the source of negation and this is precisely the case with deixis as regards his theory of subjective enunciation. this plangent insufficiency. To exit metaphysics. but brings to presence truth or being as privation. One can see therefore that Benveniste allows Agamben to.30 The first theory allows us to think again about subjectivity. for Hegel and Heidegger. Agamben is inspired in particular by the ontological turn in the work of French structural linguist Emile Benveniste. language. Benveniste defines the condition of the human subject by its being able to. or it struggles to sum up our whole world and our place within it. I will deal with each idea in turn. culpable for modern negative metaphysics and this is correct. then the voice is always both the villain and victim of philosophy. Benveniste’s theory of subjectivity is based on the idea of linguistic enunciation and specifically how this relies on deixis. As we saw.


our possession of self-consciousness and our ability to speak of this. Thus we can announce “I am” and in so doing we enunciate our subjectivity. Important in this regard is Benveniste’s conception that while the subject can enunciate its presence, speak its being, this act does not proceed from an already existent central being or subject. “I” in the phrase “I am” is a form of (de)subjectifying deixis. It appears to refer to an exterior presence, but, as Benveniste explains and indeed as my own work has investigated elsewhere (MofP, 347–9), deixis as a form of indicative reference does not refer to an actual exteriority but simply to the instance of reference as such. Accepting this to be the case, the “I” of “I am” only comes into existence in the act of enunciation via what Jacobson calls the power of pronominal shifting, or a movement from langue, the whole system and existence of language, to parole, a local instance of discourse. While in Saussure it is essential that langue and parole remain heterogeneous, deictic shifters present an opportunity to move from indication to signification, a journey that defines these two faculties, their complex interrelationship and, ultimately, undermines all our presuppositions about language and being. Agamben concludes from this: The sphere of utterance thus includes that which, in every speech act, refers exclusively to its taking place, to its instance, independently and prior to what is said and meant in it. Pronouns and the other indicators of the utterance, before they designate real objects, indicate precisely that language takes place. In this way, still prior to the word of meanings, they permit the reference to the very event of language . . . (LD, 25)31 Modern philosophy is already well aware of the ontological implications of the deictic phrase “I am.” It is, for example, central to one of Derrida’s most influential essays “Signature Event Context.” There we find that the subject’s capacity to enunciate itself reveals the subject’s ability to come into existence through the revelation of the division between presence and voice. That the subject can enunciate existence means they can step out of the experience of being, of being captivated like an animal,32 and self-consciously comment on said experience. This emergence from captivation to self-consciousness is the movement from language to speech in Agamben which is both the precondition for, and problem of, human being. The power of the


subject to enunciate itself is brought to the fore in Derrida’s work more piquantly by his work on the sister phrase to “I am,” “I am not.”33 Not only can the subject enunciate presence, therefore, in so doing they also precipitate their lasting absence. Enunciation marks the advent of being and, simultaneously, its finitude. For Derrida this enunciative advent of finite being ruins any transcendental sense of subjectivity in that the subject dies as self-presence at the very moment it enunciates its existence and thus comes to life;34 one way of reading Heidegger’s being-towards-death. However, for Agamben, as soon as the subject comes to presence it is desubjectified and this is, in fact, its subjectivity. Subjectivity is not negated by enunciation as Derrida seems to suggest but actually founded through this process of negation. This reformulation of the theory of the subject allows Agamben to state that “the transcendental subject is nothing other than the ‘enunciator’” (IH, 53). If one can say “I am” one has already entered into a productively alienating subjectivity in language (RP, 128–9). Yet if one cannot say “I am,” within metaphysics at least, one cannot exist as the human is emergent from the biological indeterminacy of the animal precisely because they have the dubious power of self-conscious enunciation. As a realist Agamben cannot deny the fact that subjectivity is founded on its negation, but as the declared enemy of metaphysical nihilism he is unable to simply accept this. If one could isolate the moment, ontologically speaking, before the subject speaks but after they acquire language, what Agamben calls infancy, then one could perhaps instigate an alternative mode of being that is based on language but not on the voice as negation. This is Agamben’s intention. Before we get to that, and we may never in our epoch, we must accept the fact that, for Agamben, the subject of enunciation, once spoken, is the result of a permanent desubjectivization. At the moment the subject says “I am,” subjectivity comes to presence as nothing other than an instance of empty, technical indication. As he says: Benveniste’s studies . . . show that it is in and through language that the individual is constituted as a subject. Subjectivity is nothing other than the speaker’s capacity to posit him or herself as an ego, and cannot in any way be defined through some wordless sense of being oneself, nor by deferral to some ineffable psychic experience of the ego, but only through a linguistic I transcending any possible experience. (IH, 52)


Mills’ interpretation of this is especially strong in the manner of how she first shows that “in taking the place of ‘I’ as speaking subject, the speaker must effectively alienate him/herself as a phenomenal or empirical individual” and her realization that “by entering into language as a mode of ‘communicative action,’ the speaker loses touch with the mute experience of language as such” (PA, 25). Thus enunciation denies the subject both its subjectivity and its infancy. However, because infancy is not a stage in a developmental teleology, no more is subjectivity or being human, none of these possibilities are lost for good when one says “I am.” In fact, they only come about because of enunciation, even if their happening takes place in an instant before, or due to, their negation. Agamben is treading a very treacherous and perhaps impossibly fine line here. Infancy is the precondition of subjectivity only in that it allows for desubjectivization through the act of losing or emerging out of infancy. It appears that Agamben’s childhood is potentially a troubled, but ultimately liberating time.

The powerful malleability of the deictic pronoun “I”is well known allowing for any number of ontological compressions, of selfpresence “I am,” self negation “I am not,” and self-alienation “I is another.” The last of these is a famous promulgation by Rimbaud often analysed by philosophers, but initially it is to English poetry and Keats’ missives on deictic desubjectivization that Agamben turns to in his own work in the field. In the dense, remarkable, and troubling book Remnants of Auschwitz (1999), Agamben finds himself reading Keats’ letter to Richard Woodhouse on 27 October 1818. As he does so he isolates four themes of poetic, deictic desubjectivization. These are not unfamiliar, so I will merely summarize them here: (1) the poetic I is not an I nor is it identical to itself, (2) the poet is therefore the most unpoetical of things, (3) the statement “I am a poet” is not a statement but a contradiction in terms, and (4) poetic experience is that of desubjectivization. The third of these, “I am a poet,” is contradictory because, as Keats argues, “if he has no self, and I am a Poet, where is the wonder that I should say I would write no more?”35 Here Keats encounters the universal condition of enunciative desubjectivization but, significantly, he poses it as a poetically contingent experience. The poet is, by definition, always other to


himself, an experience confirmed by Rimbaud, Eliot, and the anticonfessionalism of poetry from the so-called New York, Language, and Cambridge schools. As Agamben says with misleading lucidity: “In the Western literary tradition, the act of poetic creation, and indeed every act of speech, implies something like a desubjectivization (poets have named this desubjectivization the ‘Muse’)” (RA, 113). Agamben will also go on in his work to regularly refer to this as poetic dictation, but before we get to that let us concentrate on that almost offhand remark “and indeed every act of speech.” While fascinated by poetic desubjectivization one can perceive from his comments here that he is most interested in it as a form of general ontology. Indeed it is true that all acts of enunciation utilizing the pronoun “I” in the moment of indicating subjective presence negate its ever coming to presence as we saw in his analysis of Benveniste. All speech acts are in this way “poetic.” The experience of the subject coming to being by negating its own subjectivity is, according to Agamben and innumerable poets, a poetic experience, justifying once again my claim that any analysis of the philosophy of Agamben, so centrally located on the movement beyond negative metaphysics through a theory of language and desubjectivization, is meaningless without recourse to the literary Agamben. However determined this study may be to prove the importance of poiesis to Agambenian ontology it would be disingenuous to ignore the most obvious question that comes to mind at this stage: How can Agamben begin to argue that every act of speech is an instance of poetic desubjectivization via the universal category of deictic desubjectivization? Rather the opposite must be seen to be the case: poetic desubjectivization ought to be simply an example of general, ontological enunciative desubjectivization. To justify Agamben’s and Keats’ claim on behalf of poetry, namely that the essence of modern ontology resides therein, we must now return briefly to Benveniste’s other great ontological development, the idea of the semiotic. In his work on the semiotic Benveniste, on the surface, does little more than refine the terminology of Saussure. The well-known terms langue and parole become semiotic and semantic, while the arbitrary nature of the sign becomes the semiotic definition of the sign. This definition has a familiar ontological ring to it in that it consists of two preconditions. Benveniste’s appropriation of the sign develops the law of the semiotic as first, existing, and second, not being any other sign. The sign as semiotic is defined as that it is,


and then that which it is by virtue of comparison with all that it is not which, admittedly by negation, matches precisely Heidegger’s ontological pairing of that there is something and how it is. Here how a sign comes to presence in the world (langue) is by not being any other sign replacing being-in-the-world with not-being-anywhere-elsein-the-world and opening up a space for linguistic being which, by its being uninsurable and subject to general negation, matches precisely the space of the stanzaic sign: S [/] s. The semiotic, therefore, is another name for language as a whole, as material presence (phone) and code (logos), before it means anything and yet always already available to mean. Its basic preconditions are presence and difference under the sign of a negation. It matters not how it exists, in terms of meaning or reference, or in which way specifically it is not other signs. Rather, for the semiotic, all that counts is that it can be identified as present and placed in a situation of quasi-singularity by one confirming it is what it is by its not being any other sign. This is structurally, at least, exactly the same as modern ontology. Being is proven by its existence and by its mode of being in the world but not being other beings. While Benveniste maintains his predecessor’s conviction that the semiotic and the semantic cannot meet one can see from his revisions that the semantic is seemingly dependent on a semiotic, quasi-presuppositional precondition. Discourse needs language as semiotic, material, yet neutral, presence to come into being. That said language only occurs to allow discourse to happen specifically as a mode of emergent human being through the process of desubjectivization which Agamben identifies as poetic. Further, it is only through discourse that language as such under negation courtesy of the voice of discourse becomes unconcealed for modern ontology. Language is the precondition for a discursive negation which precedes it. While the relation between poetry and desubjectivization becomes ever clearer, we still cannot be at peace with the assertion that modern ontological alienation is the result of contingent poetic alienation. To assist us in this regard we must return to Agamben’s consideration of poetic desubjectivization in Remnants of Auschwitz, which leads him into a wider philological consideration of “a fully desubjectivized experience in the act of speech” within the Western religious traditions, bringing poetic and ontological desubjectivization into more intimate proximity. Such a foray allows Agamben to make direct links between that other famous missive of modern poetic

The modern term for this experience or event of language as such. Glossolalia and xenoglossia are. in effect. is the phonetic transcription of languages the Greeks did not understand. while xenoglossia gives us an experience of the second condition. 115).36 Due to its Greek provenance. “it” in narrative. devoid of meaning. It is. Thus glossolalia confirms the first condition of the semiotic. is glossolalia and it has risen to prominence in investigations of the outer limits of poetic experience and experimentation. the process of pushing discourse to its limit or the retention of a remnant of pre-discursive “pure” language. If we now combine the theory of the semiotic with that of enunciative deixis we can see that enunciation also partakes of the two sides of the semiotic. opposite and revelatory experiences of the nature of language as such. Demeny (“for I is another”). “it” in poetry. and another more ancient missive. in some ways. and which is aggressively attacked by the work of Badiou. before and as precondition for discourse.39 As Agamben explains: “The experience of glossolalia merely radicalizes a desubjectifying experience implicit in the simplest act of speech” (RA.37 Additionally. Deixis and types of indicative linguistic technique such as anaphora work differently to all other forms of signification. and Lacoue-Labarthe. as we know. Rimbaud’s letter to P. it hints at all post-Adorno poetics of responsibility that can be located in the work of Derrida. In glossolalia we encounter the pure materiality of language away from any possible meaning. 114). In that they are entirely context dependent—“it” in conversation. In xenoglossia we do not understand an act of speech but we assume it has communicative and referential meaning for the barbarians which speak it within their context. signs that we know are meaningful in a context but whose specific meaning we cannot glean. which still has aesthetic and political repercussions for us today. glossolalia has associations with the term barbarism on which our preciously held concept of civilization hangs.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE desubjectivization.38 Bar-bar. Nancy. thus establishing a tradition of civilization based on xenoglossia as a form of glossolalia. Agamben. Paul’s first letter to the Corinthians where he speaks of “lalein glosse ” or speaking in tongues (wherein ¯ ¯ the speaker speaks with no understanding of what they say) (RA. “it” in philosophical discourse all have very different potential usages—indicative forms operate at the semantic level of discursive meaning. Yet at the same time such terms 29 . it simply and materially is.

poetic desubjectivization. once stripped of all extralinguistic meaning and constituted as a subject of enunciation. / Loving not. but infancy also allows us a possible route back to language. However. is so rich that it needs must be quoted in its entirety. that he has gained access to being always already anticipated by a glossolalic 30 . Glossolalia. 116). in Heidegger. the historical “fall” of being is both the loss of being and its potential recuperation. Indicative forms of this order are not pure noise but nor are they meaningful. rather. and stone the twenty-first.” (The becoming impersonal is a central moment in Agamben’s theory of the roots of poetry in desubjectifying dictation from the mouth of the muse. the psychosomatic individual must fully abolish himself and desubjectify himself as a real individual to become the subject of enunciation. xenoglossia. Therefore deixis stages not a fixed meaning in language but language as such as medium for meaning’s transmission.”41 The conclusion of the updating of Infancy and History. deictic desubjectivization. loving not. Agamben begins by expressing the contradiction at the heart of enunciation: “the passage from language to discourse appears as a paradoxical act that simultaneously implies both subjectification and desubjectivization” (RA. just choosing so. hating not. for example “I” out of context means nothing and is basically glossolalic. In another it is pure contextual differentiation in that it is potentially referential but is always awaiting a context to come to mean.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN are devoid of specific meaning. they instead refer neutrally to the event of speech and language or what might be termed its passive taking place. hating not. which is what the later sections of Remnants of Auschwitz constitute. and the semiotic are all examples of a possible experience of pure language or a language which speaks before voice and says nothing other than it exists as pure exterior presence. so for Agamben infancy operates in the same god-like way echoing almost the sentiments of Browning’s Caliban as regards his sovereign dominion over crabs: “Let twenty pass.40 In one sense deixis is meaningless and empty reference. Just as.) “But. He then proceeds to bulldozer and flatten both sides of this impasse with a Calibanesque heavy-handedness: “On the one hand. the subject discovers that he has gained access not so much to a possibility of speaking as to an impossibility of speaking—or. to break this task down I will progress through the page-long summary step by step. just choosing so. This language as such is ruined by our having infancy and the concomitant desubjectivization of differential scission.

The sound of language as such. he concedes that it makes no more sense to say “this I-other speaks”: For. the subject becomes. wailing. the final facet of his conclusion makes the radical step away from alterity and the philosophy of responsibility. feedback. which is the event of language as such. in seeming to access discourse (meaning) through the xenophora of deixis. such as deixis. while as Agamben explains the subject of enunciation is composed entirely of discourse. 116).” for what I hope now are clear reasons in that I is always other. and potentially devastating conclusion. independent of every meaning.43 Explaining that “I speak” is as meaningless as “I am a poet. for example. profound. Lévinas and Derrida. Those well-versed in contemporary philosophy may recognize this speck of alterity at the heart of self-presence from. Here. an isle full of noises. which locates his work alongside Badiou as the only potential. This leads Agamben to a three-part. He cannot speak. subjectification and desubjectivization coincide at every point.42 However. Here she tunes in to white noise. This rather terrifying observation is crucial in our adventures under the leadership of the literary Agamben. “him that speaketh a barbarian” (cited in RA. 114). if not removed. In appropriating the “formal instruments” of discourse. this I-other stands in an impossibility of speaking—he has nothing to say. Setebos to the subject’s Caliban. and sweet airs that give delight and hurt not. insofar as it is solely sustained in a pure event of language. sounds. post-alterity. instead finds not meaning but the very absence of meaning. the subject.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE potentiality over which he has neither control nor mastery” (RA. 116). instead the subject finds himself “expropriated of all referential reality. letting himself be defined solely through the pure and empty relation to the event of discourse” (RA. once he is inside of discourse he becomes expropriated. as Paul terms it. and both the flesh and blood individual 31 . rather he is spoken in the glossolalic language of barbarians. In the absolute present of the event of discourse. This being the case. In enunciating the I. blurred or suspended as the subject uses deixis to access discourse only to find in place of discourse pure noise. and thus affirmative philosophy of our age. and Agamben is well aware of the tradition he is potentially entering here. This is the one and only moment that the radical difference between semiotic and semantic linguistic modes that Agamben locates at the root of Western metaphysics is.

in fact it radically calls into question the idea of language as a notation of intellection.44 Repeating a quote from Dante’s Vita nuova. Love. . takes note. Agamben notes that while on the surface this tercet conforms to the scholastic definition of language as “notation and sign of a passion of the soul” (ST. This can also be expressed by saying that the one who speaks is not the individual. is not a modality of intellection but the combinatory theory of language as such in the European tradition as an unattainable yet present generative space for intellection represented by the prosodic 32 . 117) This experience of the powerful depersonalization of being spoken by language is a profoundly literary one. I won’t speak of the complex theory of shame Agamben mounts here as this has been done very well elsewhere. 124). Agamben proffers the touchstone to my whole study. poetry. Agamben prefers the term poetic dictation. or what he often refers to simply as poetic dictation when. namely the relationship between discursive prose and poetry: logo-poiesis. often called inspiration or the muse. but language . that poets need to be willing to “open to prose” the reasons for their poetry or face shame (his version of the troubadour razo de trobar or narrating of the inspiration for the composition of the work). rather than speaking of the poeticization of thought. he instead commits himself to thoughts about poetry. POETIC DICTATION At the end of this remarkable passage of Remnants of Auschwitz Agamben then brings us back to our main project here. and in the manner that he dictates within I go signifying” (cited in ST. 127). .THE LITERARY AGAMBEN and the subject of enunciation are perfectly silent. which also finds great utility in The End of the Poem (1996). when he mentions that it is not surprising “in the face of this intimate extraneousness implicit in the act of speech” that poets feel a sense of responsibility and shame. (RA. This relationship is marked by the experience of becoming impersonal that Agamben terms the poetic experience of ontological desubjectivization. “Dante instead characterized poetic expression precisely as the dictation of an inspiring love” (ST. an early theorization of poetic dictation can be found in the pages of Stanzas circulating about a tercet from Dante’s Purgatorio that goes as follows: “I am one who. 127). as we know. when Love inspires me. Staying with Dante.

therefore.” where Agamben considers enigmatically what he calls decisive experience. even when they keep silent. which doesn’t pretend. in fact. matter or wildwood. . . (IP. The main body of the book commences with the essay “The idea of Matter. Where language stops is not where the unsayable occurs.46 in the essay “The Idea of the Unique” Agamben then goes on to consider in greater depth a conception of speechlessness in the face of language that is not simply unsayability. 48) It can be deduced from this that within our tradition there are two types of language-experience/usage in accordance with the 33 . are prisoners of representation.45 Poetry. like grammatical language. . Contrariwise there is another experience in which man remains absolutely without words in the face of language. The language for which we have no words. (IP. what one might term a truly defining subjective event for which subjects habitually lack words. this woody substance of language. Those who have not reached. . to be there before being . which the ancients called silva (wildwood). is not a form of notation of thinking yet it is a form of notation and it does have a direct relation to thinking through its direct experience of language. 37) Having proposed a potentiality for a silent experience of materiality as such which is not unsayable but simply inexpressive and nonrepresentable presence.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE conception of the stanza. . Agamben reveals that the experience of language is always doubled: There is. . the experience of language that forever presupposes words . [is] the language of poetry. but rather where the matter of words begins. we now battle alongside the poet as she attempts to find a voice for her experience of the poetic word. The theme of poetic dictation stays with Agamben coming to dominate the early pages of Idea of Prose (1985) through a series of considerations of the challenge of the poet’s intimate experience of their ability to speak of language as such. as in a dream. Agamben says of this experience of an event that it is neither experience nor event in actual fact but matter nothing more than the point at which we touch the limits of language . Glossing on Celan’s assertion as to the uniqueness of poetic language. Knowing already that philosophy has fallen into the trap of misconstruing language’s neutral inexpressiveness as ineffability.

calls this state of speechlessness before a language that precedes words infancy. and if one has words to speak of language one no longer has language before one of which to speak. and reflects that such a state knows nothing of destiny. no means of cutting a path through the wildwood of matter to an encounter of the forest as something composed of wood. as Celan argues. The poet is the infant who piously receives this promise and who. Only the poet. as we have repeatedly seen. 49). But at that point. . Poetry is always in the experience. Discursive grammatical prose does not concern itself with the semiotic and has. as Agamben responds. it would seem. Agamben’s great innovation here is to turn a dead end into a new clearing for thought: This vain promise of a meaning in language is its destiny. something to say of it” (IP. and so lacks access to the language needed to express the nature of the matter of language as such. uniqueness is the destiny of language. faced with the infancy of the world. . decides for truth. Such a destiny is. to have forever . Faced with the impossibility of seeing either wood or tree. (IP. of course. vows to be able to encounter it. . through avowing its emptiness.” so Celan writes . a false eschatology for in speaking of the uniqueness of language one proves its impossibility. Elle s’expose. so alone. . irrespective of the form it takes. “Destiny is concerned only with the language that.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN traditional roles of philosophy and poetry respectively. and decides to remember that emptiness and fill it. can experience the tree in terms of what it is made of. which is to say. Having asserted this. it precedes words as vehicles for meaning and to whom can it occur if we are not yet speakers? Agamben. of what order is such a destiny in that. its grammar and its tradition. Agamben realizes immediately the aporia at the heart of any conception of a unique language accorded to poetic dictation. If. He explains “the unique language is not one language” in that it is always already split between words without language (philosophy) and being wordless in front of language (poetry). language stands before him. therefore. 49) The easiest summation of this is that the poet would like to testify to their experience of pure language as such but they cannot because 34 . Philosophy already has the words to convey the experience and thus can never undergo the experience. so abandoned to itself that it can no longer in any way impose: “la poésie ne s’impose plus.

between the inability to remember in the perfect. and a power of only thinking. testing the experience through thoughtful prose. Reading Delfini and Campana Agamben summarizes dictation as the space or locale. Dictation therefore names a midway point or tension between being as the intimacy of undergoing an experience of language. retains an element from late Latin culture wherein the term refers to writing a literary work. cannot be narrated after the fact. and the memory that arises precisely out of the impossibility of this love. finds significant examples in the modern tradition in works such as Coleridge’s famous narrative of the composition of “Kubla Khan. Dictation. The combination of ideas of pure linguistic matter and language as subsequent philosophical discourse combine in “The Idea of Dictation.” A useful translator’s footnote in the English tradition explains that the Italian for dictation. a sense also to be found in the German word Dichtung that Heidegger often prefers in reference to poetry. but only occurs in the instance of its exposition. while the razo of a poem (and a razo can often be internal to the poem such as one finds in works such as Wordsworth’s “Daffodils” and “The Solitary Reaper. poetry is always divided.” or works such as Frank O’Hara’s “Why I Am Not a Painter”)47 is presented as the ontico-experiential basis of a work of poiesis describing. it is always written after the fact and so is obviously dictated by the already existent presence of the poem.” and is analyzed here in relation to twentieth-century Italian poet Delfini. channelling the muse. and the distanciation of a proceeding recollection of the experience.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE their experience of pure language cannot translate beyond that experience. 52). stanza. between the experience of dictation as inspiration courtesy of the muse. say. amorous attachment to the present. As Agamben notes more than once elsewhere. The essay begins with the tradition of the razo or ability to recount after the fact how the poet came to compose/dictate their work. and this intimate divergence is its dictation” (IP. therefore. This tradition still holds for Dante. This mediality of poetic dictation explains why “the lyric—which uniquely keeps to such dictation—is necessarily 35 . means both an authoritative declaration intended for preserving transcription and a mode of poiesis. . dettato. and that of the subsequent declamation of the experience in discursive prose: “Between the impossibility of thinking . the events that led to the dictation of a poem. . Such a poetic experience of language cannot impose itself in prose.

suggesting that while it makes sense that life is the product of language it is predominantly the case these days that the obverse is taken to be true. for example the Gospel of John. and once one is abandoned by the muse the only tale to tell is of said abandonment. said experience cannot be recounted. it is perhaps not surprising that Agamben more than once asks as to the direct relation between poetry and life going so far as to argue that: “The poet is he who. withdraws from both the lived experience of the psychosomatic individual and the biological unsayability of the species” (EP. correctly spoken discourse. 93). 52). the stanza. . produces life.” (IP. poetic dictation exposes for view the speechlessness of a direct experience of language that is itself not the result of the ineffability of that experience per se. inventive art was given the title argumentum because it was supposed that invention gave one access to the very place of speech as such. the source from which all arguments originate. What I hope becomes clear by virtue of this positioning of the lyric at a moment of linguistic twilight is that like infancy. Life. but a discovery through the belatedness of the razo or recounting of experience that yes. 76). While one is in the moment of inspiration one lacks the space to speak. . it is always transfixed on the verge of a day that has always already set .THE LITERARY AGAMBEN empty. or a waking dream? Fled is that music:—do I wake or sleep? This problem is reformulated in the essay “The Dictation of Poetry” in terms of the relationship between poetry and life. poetry is central to the work of Agamben. in the word. Was it a vision. which the poet produces in the poem. As I have been arguing. Agamben supports his claim that language precedes life with citations from the theological tradition of the West.48 In “The Dictation of Poetry” the relation of poetry to life is expressed in the more familiar and relevant question for us here: “What does it mean for a living being to speak?” (EP. This ancient rhetoric of topics however became watered down over centuries so that the place of speech 36 . before honing in on the specificity of the relation between poetry and the poet’s life in the development of the razo de trobar. That said. and love. Agamben notes that in ancient rhetoric ratio or ars invendiendi (inventive art/argument) was juxtaposed with ratio iudicandi or truthful. but in this failure to recollect one is exposed to the dictatorial truth of poetry: recount and recall what cannot be said or remembered. and as his main theme is of course the political determinations of the category life.

Modern versions of the razo can be found in the work of Freud as much as in Joyce for example.PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE as arche-source simply became conventional arguments used as mnemonic techniques in oral cultures. 80). so to speak. . from the poetic experience of language as such. but also that of philosophy. the razo is a zone of indifference. 79). and finally the novel. How can life emerge from language in such a way that it is neither the specificity of a life (biography) or the unsayable nature of biological life. an experience of the event of language as love. That psychology and narrative have taken over the razo simply deflects attention from the fact that poetry presents for us the central ontological problematic of our age. 79). in other words.49 Agamben notes that over centuries this has given birth to the art of biography. not only dramatizes the problematic of the emergence of human life out of language. The brilliance of the troubadours is that they return the idea of topos back to its fundamental fount: “the troubadours want not to recall arguments consigned to a topos but instead to experience the very event of language as original topos” (EP. caught as it is between the wordless experience of language as such and the language-less process of language about language. ratio iudicandi. Rather. as the tight unity of what is lived and what is poeticized—now becomes a giving of reasons for experience” (EP. ratio iveniendi. which lies at the foundation of poetry and which constitutes what the poet calls its dictation (dictamen). for again over time the meaning of the razo was diluted in the same manner as was observed in topics so that “What for the troubadours was an experience of the razo—that is. More interesting than the slippery nature of topics/razo perhaps is the relation between lived experience and the experience of language which typifies dictation. Clearly there is something about the original place of language. The impersonality of dictation becoming the personal element of biography. or the experience of inspiration becoming the tale of 37 . and indeed our whole tradition.” (LD. which we share in common with all life? How. This allows Agamben to now explain once and for all the role of the razo in poetry: “The razo. that defies definition. can there be an experience of language as the basis of thinking being that retains language as a thing that can be said but which itself is not reduced to merely saying something? Poetic dictation. is therefore neither a biographical nor a linguistic event. then fable. between lived experience and what is poeticized . what the troubadours called the stanza of love. .

indifferent. which is the basis of human being as both divided and potentially redeemed. in-fancy. ontological. This is why the fact that there is language.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN inspiration. 38 . poeticized. cannot be addressed unless one listens with care to the dictates of the many pages that comprise the work of the literary Agamben. is precisely the zone of indistinction between language and life that Agamben repeatedly seeks to reveal as the very place of a speechless language as such: dictated.


This page intentionally left blank .

. . the location of poetic thinking would ordinarily be seen to take place in the mind of an author.CHAPTER 1 LOGOS. “Father dust who rises 41 . the author is present in the text only as a gesture that makes expression possible precisely by establishing a central emptiness within this expression. we can say that . empty. From the Latin gerere it is a type of bearing or carrying. a meaningless action. THINKING THOUGHT POETIC THINKING Going against the grain of the Platonic tradition and accepting as a given that poetry thinks. not a person as such who has the capacity for thought. Instead he retains a vestigial role for creative agency in defining the perished author as a gesture: “If we call ‘gesture’ what remains unexpressed in each expressive act.”2 Naturally. Accepting Foucault’s dictum that the author as creating subject is dead and replaced by the author-function. The gesture in question is. Agamben wonders where precisely the thought of the poem occurs. Foraging for the place of poetic thinking Agamben reads a poem by the famous author-function César Vallejo. a place-holder for a subjective category convenience. in a recent essay “The Author as Gesture” included in the collection Profanations (2005). after all. Gesture is rather an unconscious occupancy of the hands in conversation.1 a functionality that attenuates the presence of creative agency to a mere support for discursive distributions of power along lines of ownership rights and so on. Yet if the author is merely a functional facilitation or a supporting inexpressive gesture then it makes little sense to suggest that the thoughts of a poem or indeed any work of literature take place in the “mind” of said gesture. Agamben is however unable to concede that there is no author as such in the text.

Here Agamben realizes that the reader. The only outstanding thinking subject involved in poetry. the author-function does not think but is a collaborating facilitator of social forces. “Does this mean that the place of thought and feeling is in the poem itself . .4 Instead. touching the text into being through an act of empty. are infinitely withdrawn from it. Agamben is forced to conclude. If the poem “thinks” or presents thoughts and this thinking is not to be located in the mind of an actual. its actual taking place as a mode of thinking-feeling. in effect. creative. “will occupy the empty place in the poem left by the author. must be the reader who. 71). contrary to one’s assumptions. then can they ever even be said to be the thoughts of the poet? It would seem not. . in effect. . a similarly evacuated subjectivity. “in the gesture through which the author and reader put themselves into play in the text and. 98 fn. in taking up the poem to read. Nietzschean. . if the thoughts of a poem are not in the mind of the author-function as they cannot be. suggesting rather that they most probably only came to be known to the author as he was writing. therefore. at this point. then thought occurs at the 42 . speculating as to the exact location of the thoughts and sentiments contained in the work. Author-functions play tag with the text. Influenced no doubt by his own views on dictation he refutes the possibility that they simply blew in to the poet who then wrote them down. Aside from it being almost impossible to stipulate the exact moment that a poet “thought” what they wrote. thinking subject. can be located neither in the poem nor the author/reader-function.3 The place of the poem. 12). willing agency. gestural agency whose sole function is to come to presence as the “creator”’ of a poem through the marked presence of their absenting themselves from the work as subjective.” (Prof. poetic thinking must be. as Foucault would have it. 71).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN from Spain” (Prof. The author is only the witness or guarantor of his own absence in the work in which he is put into play . The reader becomes. at the same time. a reader-function.?” (Prof. This being the case the author-function does not facilitate ownership or authority. nor can a poem as object be said to think either. or indeed even later as he was rereading his work. Agamben adroitly comes to realize that this is equally impossible for thoughts imply by definition a thinking subject. he will repeat the same inexpressive gesture the author used to testify to his absence in the work” (Prof. but desubjectivized ontology. 71). in occupying the space vacated by the author becomes.

Each time thought thinks some thing therefore. They are examples of ontological deixis.5 Aristotle illustrates this rather abstract point with reference to the 43 . If thought were simply the neutral potential to think something then. 72). available medium “to think” something. The result is that the author and reader exist within the work as available subjects to facilitate thought not as actual present and thinking beings but gestures of being. The author can only come to being as the supporting gesture of the text. At this impossible point thought is reduced to being a presuppositional representation of the thing. which for Agamben is a form of language. 250–1). anything. In contrast. paternal. Aristotle contends. Yet if thought instead comes to actuality and thinks something. this time the more familiar discipline of philosophical thought or thinking as such. Such a thought is obviously meaningless. They point to the presence of beings but they do not possess actual being. touch upon each other. bring each other into presence then immediately withdraw. thought and its expression. From being the presupposition of a thing’s truth the thing becomes the presuppositional necessity of thinking. It thinks a pure potentiality (to think and not to think)” (P. Does thought actually exist as such as a general. between potentiality and actuality. thought no longer thinks some thing in its advent of singularity but is effectively what must be thought about some already presupposed thing. then paradoxically it ceases to be thought as such but a category subordinate to the thing. and thus thinking being. but nothing specific? Aristotle believes so and proves this by defining thought as the thinking of thinking which “is a kind of mean between thinking nothing and thinking something. Thought that thinks itself neither thinks of an object nor thinks nothing. thought would effectively think nothing as such. Through this Cimmerian light one is able to discern the topos of a poetic thinking.LOGOS. but the text “has no other light than the opaque one that radiates from the testimony of his [the author’s] absence” (Prof. the work becomes the place of thought without one personifying the poem in some absurd way by declaring that it is an autonomous. or On Contingency” Agamben is again attempting to think the place of thought through a consideration of literature. THINKING THOUGHT moment that subject and object. Reading Aristotle’s Metaphysics Agamben presents the aporia of what thought actually thinks in terms of issues of potentiality and actuality. potential. In an earlier piece “Bartleby.

The poem and the philosopheme share powerful affiliation at this exact point in terms of their both coming to being at the moment of a productive negation. Both seem to founder on an aporia between potentiality and actuality. and its presence as a coming to be a thing to be thought. as we saw. while to think of thought as a thing in the world and thus actualize it is to subordinate the process of thinking to an actual object and demote thinking to a form of representation or writing. or at least Aristotle passes this belief on to Western metaphysics. . The author in a text is a potential to be while the realization of her thoughts in the text seems to be an actualization. That we flatly refused to admit representational poetry. of what potential is a poem the actualization of ? By definition potential must be the actualization of the potential to be and yet not be the author–reader of a thought expressed in the poem body. the author as individual does not exist as such in a text. seemingly accusing them of false mimesis and warning of their power to convince the citizenry that their creations are better than reality itself: “the issue of poetry is the main consideration . which convinces me that the way we were trying to found our community was along absolutely the right lines . Yet to think thought as potentiality leaves thought with nothing to think.6 Let us dwell momentarily on a common. POETRY AND PHILOSOPHY Yet one would be wrong if one then declared some kind of lasting amity between poetry and philosophy. producing an ontological caress. Thus to think thought is to think both the absence of thought as a thing to be thought. In his treatise on how to establish the ideal totalitarian state Plato immortally excludes poets from the republic. They touch on being and. The same is true for the philosopher. coyly withdraw.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN figure of a blank tablet upon which thought can be written but on which it has not yet been written. hand-in-hand. yet generally ignored problem shared by poetic and philosophical thinking. . which at the same time negates thinking as such. surprising. If the philosopher’s vocation is to think then naturally to think what thought is would be their highest calling. a bolstering figuration that shares a clear equivalency to Agamben’s idea of gesture as an empty facilitation of thinking. . . Yet if.”7 Thus began proceedings for what Agamben translates as the “divorce” between poetry and prose 44 .

52). Love is not only the term for the very event and advent of the poetic word it also comes to stand for the unattainable. . “And if love is presented in the 45 . but has also introduced a disastrous aporia into Western metaphysics based around the presupposed difference between poetry and thinking which. he wonders. or even poetry’s role in thinking was. Aristotle was more than happy to begin the discipline of aesthetics or philosophical categorical thinking about the arts spawning a long and illustrious tradition. 66). Not that philosophy then neglected poetry. The stated intention of the Provençal poets’ razo de trobar was “to experience the topos of all topoi. Agamben soon uncovers a dark truth at the heart of troubadour poetics. until Hegel. Plato. love. Agamben suspects as much when he presents just such a possibility at the foundation of modern poetics in the razo de trobar. this abyss weighs heavy upon our philosopher’s mind. Agamben returns to the division imposed by Plato many times in his own work whenever he speaks of the abyss between language and thought or poetry and philosophy. 68) as we have already seen. But on the whole poetry as a form of thinking. the very taking place of language as originary argument” (LD. came to remove from poetry thinking as a form of authentic modality. Although Troubadour love constitutes a promising avenue of inquiry. the place from which all places emerge. in particular. is there is another experience of language that does not depend on a foundation of unspeakability? “If philosophy is presented from the beginning as a ‘confrontation’ with (enantiosis) and a divergence from (diaphora. primarily excluded from the philosophical canon.LOGOS. They named the experience of the very advent of the poetic word. even radical disjuncture. Poetry is a form of expression. THINKING THOUGHT (MWC. 66). of mimesis. for example. an attempt to experience the very taking place of the poetic word in the form of the joy of love seems a long way from nihilism. Defining philosophy as “the unspeakable experience of the Voice” (LD. of material pleasure. inevitably. So much so that today it seems strange perhaps to even argue a role for poetry as a mode of thinking.. that not only typifies our culture’s response to the arts. but for most it is not a form of thought. In Language and Death. then what is the extreme experience of language within the poetic tradition?” (LD. Perhaps it is in poetry that we find a concept of language that is not that of negation but rather a “reflection on the taking place of language” (LD. that is. . Republic 607b–c) poetry . 66).

the subject of The Man Without Content (1970). his philosophy of indifference. modern metaphysics and Provençal poetics are. Agamben admits. Thus while poetry comes very close to an originary experience of language as such. The two empty resonators. as such. 74) There is encased in this citation the basic structure that explains Agamben’s repeated return to poetry as he tries to establish a post-nihilistic philosophy of negated scission. as an ancient tradition of thought would have it. Neither is able. alone. he is forced to conclude: Even poetry seems here to experience the originary event of its own word as nothing. but both rest originally in a common negative experience of the taking place of language. Perhaps. come together within the modern experience of metaphysics as negation detailed in Language and Death. seemingly divergent yet. Both poetry and philosophy seek an indifferent experience of language as such before the moment of its division into language and voice. and thus. nothingness. unattainable. unspeakability. These issues come to full appearance for both disciplines during the period of 46 . only from this common negative experience is it possible to understand the meaning of that scission in the status of language that we are accustomed to call poetry and philosophy. (LD.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Provençal lyric as a desperate adventure whose object is far away. so much so that Agamben is willing to hand over ontology to the “poetic” experience of desubjectivization. 69). while separating them. seems necessarily to be marked by negativity” (LD. also holds them together and seems to point beyond their fracture. resorting always to negative constructions of language as unattainability. and yet accessible only in this distance. These two traditions and experiences of the word as negativity. I showed this in the previous chapter by drawing parallels between algorithms for the sign S/s. in as much as the roots of European poetics lie precisely in the empty loveless stanzas of the troubadour lyric they mark the origin of an experience of poetic negativity which echoes that of modern metaphysics. and modern art and aesthetics as nihilism. to understand that which. that is because the experience of the taking place of language is at stake here. and this experience. rather. to attain such an experience. The poetic and philosophical experiences of language are thus not separated by an abyss. and so on. philosophy and poetry. and the stanza S [/] s.

In “Kommerell. politics. gesture. while in “Tradition of the Immemorial” he speaks of Hölderlin’s quest for an undivided being leading to his call for the abolishment of the “philosophy of the letter” in favour of a poetics of dictation. and philosophy in a characteristically ambitious denouement (P.) The abyss between poetry and philosophy occupies the last of Agamben’s thoughts in Language and Death (LD. Tracing this articulation back to ancient Greek sources. 108) and forms the conclusion of two major essays in the collection Potentialities (1999). 85). Ending books on a call for the healing of the fracture between poetry and philosophy then becomes something of a habitual gesture. the idea of a tension that is both the articulation of a difference and a unity” (ST. 157). problematic experience rather than an embarrassed repression” (IH. . but rather the result of a mutual origin in thinking as such that.8 Agamben is moved to wonder in this regard: Are we capable today of no longer being philosophers of the letter . without thereby becoming either philosophers of the voice or mere enthusiasts? Are we capable of reckoning with the poetic 47 . yet the roots of their failure to find language go back several centuries at least. he names this possibility harmonia or “the idea of a laceration that is also a suture. has been obscured by the Platonic tradition that Agamben habitually calls the “abyss” between poetry and philosophy. THINKING THOUGHT modernity. . for example. 157).LOGOS. In Infancy and History. or On Gesture” he brings together poetry. Stanzas concludes with an attempt to relocate a post-nihilistic idea of presence located in the very fold or articulation between signified and signifier. essentially. He cites Heraclitus in describing this harmonia as “invisible” harmony before exhorting that “the last Western philosopher recognized a hint of this harmony in a painting by Cézanne in the possible rediscovered community of thought and poetry” (ST. (He is referring here to Heidegger. 163). He is not calling for a synthesis of poetry and philosophy here but a clear understanding of the actual conditions of their difference as opposed to those imposed upon them by Platonic exception. however. That poetry and philosophy share such commonalities is not a coincidence. in the “Project for a Review” he ends the volume by calling for a radicalization of the ancient science of philology which would. poeticize philology so that the site of the division between poetry and philosophy “becomes a conscious. Again and again he returns to this theme.

COMMUNICABILITY. as a nonpresupposed principle. in the “last” essay of The End of the Poem. The destination of many major works by Agamben is the revocation of the divorce between poetry and philosophy instigated formally by Plato in Republic. Plato devised an apotropaic pedagogical methodology. rather. that poetry should really only be philosophised” (EP. its resolution resting with neither party nor an idealized unity of the two but between them somehow. citing the famous Wittgenstein declaration that philosophy should really only be poeticized. 115) I believe our point is well made. paraphrasing Wittgenstein. has always existed in the midst of the two fundamental experiences of language in our culture: language as sustaining (poetry) and as testing (philosophy). The answer to the problem of Western metaphysics can only be approached by the rehabilitation of poetry as a form of thinking but its solution does not simply emerge from poetry. on the contrary. it resides somewhere in the division between poetry and philosophy. . and surrounding the two contesting ideas of thinking within our tradition. Agamben believes. These two experiences form the basis of Agamben’s idea of the origin of all literature in dictation. 115).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN presentation of the vocation that.9 This usually takes the form of a summons to poeticize philosophy and expose philosophic prose to the semiotic presence of the poetic word. one could say. that it is threatened by an excess of tension and thought. Or. Agamben argues: “As for poetry. therefore.” Agamben recounts a story told by Plato in one of his letters of how. Poetry. but they also come together in Agamben’s idea of the communicability of language as such as the place between. Conceding this point. pestered endlessly by the Sicilian tyrant Dionysius to once more attend his court. emerges where no voice calls us? Only then would tradition cease to be the remission and betrayal of an unsayable transmission . within. THE THING ITSELF In the opening essay of Potentialities entitled “The Thing Itself. while Agamben seeks for a true experience of language in poetry he is regularly disappointed. provides an opening up of the pathway towards a future for philosophy but alone it is not the destination of this track. One presents to the apparently eager student the whole thing of 48 . Rather. . (P. However. in the fold or invisible harmony that.

and knowledge. definition (logos). additional recondite element as the tradition has it. “that by which the object is known.10 In accordance with the logic of apotropaicism it is precisely the thing’s unknowability and nonrepresentability in language that defines not simply the thing’s obscurity. If the student is sincere he or she will embrace this difficulty. name (onama). Rather said thing is to be brought to light “in the very medium of its knowability. Agamben then performs one of his classic gestures by rediscovering through his remarkable and controversial philological method that translations of Plato have perhaps misrepresented his thoughts on this most essential thing. Agamben reconstitutes the thing as such as the ground or support of knowability. its own knowability and truth” (P. however. If this thing is not a thing in the world nor is it. The powerfully obscure nature of the thing dissuades the thinker but in so doing also attracts them to the very basis of philosophy’s being. the most difficult of all problems: the very thing of thought as such. Agamben’s translation finds that the four bases of being which define the Platonic theory of ideas. The thing itself. 28) will realize the dolour of “the thing” and task their tutor no more. but the basis of knowledge on this very obscurity. 31). Knowledge presupposes something as already existing about which it has knowledge whose veracity it can vouchsafe through the idea truth as agreement. 33). therefore. in the pure light of its self-manifestation and announcement to consciousness” (P. Much of this comes down to the problem of presupposition. the obscure nature of the presupposition of a thing. This thing then is not a fifth. the thing is “nevertheless possible only in language and by virtue of language: precisely the thing of language” (P. there but never to be made available to presence. all are dependent on the thing as such.LOGOS. Plato concedes. a thing in the world or a thing than can be represented by language and thus known in this way. image (eidolon). 32). is the apotropaic heart of philosophy.” but. an arche thing impossible to retrieve. while language cannot say the thing as such. but the very precondition of being: “no longer simply the being in its obscurity. Having presented this reading of Plato. as an object presupposed by language and the epistemological process. This thing is not a thing in any ordinary sense of the term. Modern science is the archetypal epistemology in 49 . Rather than the thing as such being an unsayable and inaccessible part of being. THINKING THOUGHT thought and all difficulties attendant on that. Yet. otherwise those merely “tanned” by philosophy (P.

” (P. and negation at the heart of epistemology. .” Communication and communicability. One of the earliest and most important essays on Agamben’s work. Düttmann states: “Communicability always communicates itself. If the thing is not a thing in the world. reveals that: “Language sup-poses and hides what it brings to light. . would not name the thing being communicated and so said thing would not be produced into presence and communicability never invoked and revealed. . What is the very thing of thought itself ? this tradition seems to ask. although not the same thing at all. we always presuppose and forget . Agamben strongly refutes this history of the thing. in the very act in which it brings it to light” (P. Such thinking. Düttmann’s introduction to Idea of Prose. unsayability. is the communicability of the very language that cannot express the thing but. nor is it “horribly or beautifully unreachable in its obscurity” (P. declaring that the thing itself is not “something ineffable that must remain unsaid and hence sheltered” (P. more typical of modern ontology. 35). the thing could not come to presence. which. inscribing a myth of absence. cannot however be thought separately. nor even an arche thing forever lost to which thought aspires. privation. it is nothing but communication itself. 34). 35). spends some considerable effort defining communicability through its source in Benjamin and establishing it as the heart of Agamben’s thought. without which. . what is the thing? “It is the very sayability. Yet communicability cannot be collapsed into communication in that in itself it cannot be communicated: “if communicability let itself be communicated. an act of communication. in using language as a means of accessing that about which one speaks. While language and knowledge presuppose the thing itself as already existing as a thing about which they can speak and have knowledge. the very open-ness at issue in language. it is what we are always disclosing in speaking. in language. Communicability divided from communication.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN this regard operating as the very opposite structure to that of an apotropaic thinking that is. nor a presupposition or hypothesis.11 their presupposition of the thing itself will always make said thing inaccessible. therefore. why that which cannot be thought. 33). The result is that the sayability of the thing said and the knowability of the thing known are both lost to presuppositional thinking. what we are always saying and communicating . it would take the form 50 . I would argue. The thing itself of thought.

”12 Hence communicability is defined here as that which supports and facilitates communication but which itself is never communicated through an act of communication. and we as critics of literature can and must learn from him in these areas. 51 .” poetry is fundamentally important to thinking but not necessarily fundamentally important in itself. THINKING THOUGHT of a thing. and technical. however far the thing as such is from Agamben’s ideas on enjambement or poetic rhythm. and communication. For example. and the logic of the thing as not an object of presupposition but the very basis of objectivity and subjectivity is directly inherited from “the last philosopher. Agamben’s analysis of the thing as such should therefore act as a warning. but at the same time allows us access to a profound realization. Language is the very thing that allows thought to occur and it is thought that Agamben pursues. Like Heidegger. is not precisely a comment on language. would erase itself immediately. one can see here that the communicability of language. a structure we recognize from our considerations of thinking as such. which is also essential to Agamben’s ideas on poetry.LOGOS. merely that the means of encountering it are not provided by communication of something specific. historiographic. This does not mean communicability is unsayable or invisible. While he has a great deal to say of poetry that is philological. In addition. Returning to “The Thing Itself. one presumes. and his interest in language is piqued only as a way of revealing the very basis of thinking and being as such. Agamben’s interest in poetry and the literary in general is only as a means of bringing him closer to language. reducing itself to the simple communication of something. Language cannot say the thing as such because the thing as such is the very sayability of language and knowability of knowledge (it cannot communicate communicability but it can pro-duce it. a chattering mime of poets along the way. lead it forward into the light). Plato’s development of the thing itself as a concept is in response to the entreaties of the tyrant of Ortygia where Plato first travelled with the idea of setting up his republic and expelling.” one ought to note that the explicit history of this term in Plato is of no small water to our own study. The means by which this occurs is apotropaic in a historical sense in that the thing’s unsayability in philosophical language gives birth to the tradition of negativity. It would not be possible to produce an Agambenian linguistics from it for example.

but more than that something that totally exceeds the process of human reason: this can only mean the following: the content of revelation is not a truth that can be expressed in the form of linguistic propositions about a being . Agamben explains that the beginning word. Agamben calls this the movement of language’s “self-revelation.” he considers the influence of the concept of revelation on the Western metaphysical ideas of linguistic unsayability. “There is. humans see the world through language but do not see language. the very fact that language (and therefore knowledge) exists.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN THE IDEA OF LANGUAGE In the second essay Agamben has written under the title “The Idea of Language. 41). This is elsewhere reformulated as there being no name for the name. The meaning of revelation is that humans can reveal beings through language but cannot reveal language itself . meaning it also does not say some thing in the world. as a statement on the ontology of language as such. Like the quasi-theology of the “big bang” theory of our universe. but is instead a truth that concerns language itself. must contain within it not merely content that human ingenuity has not yet conceived of. en arkhe e ho ¯ ¯n logos (“In the beginning was the word”). . . Glossing on John. The absolute presupposition is itself non-presuppositional. a knowable thing that we did not previously know.14 is a strategy on Agamben’s part to suggest that modern metaphysics is similarly dominated by the impossible 52 . Revelation. allowing Agamben to define that foundational theological declaration on language. it is noted. . can presuppose nothing.” or a heuristic tautegorical structure that says its essence through the act of saying but saying nothing as such. nothing precedes the “big word” of God. (P. This diversion through the tautegorical revelation. Instead it says the thing as such of language. or what Lyotard defines as thinking-feeling of something happening as the very happening in question. .” Agamben says making a point he often returns to. “no word for the word” (P.13 This word/name therefore cannot say something about something as there is no something that precedes it. 40) This transparency of language within our tradition has come to be the very quality of god’s invisibility. the first word of god.

The problem here is mapped out very succinctly. Returning to Plato. Thus. “this is an Idea. 46). as immediate mediation “constitutes the sole possibility of reaching a principle freed of every presupposition” (P. 47). and naturally enough he comes to call this the Idea of language. Such language is not presupposed. then there would truly be no possible experience of the limits of language. which for human beings mediates all things and all knowledge. THINKING THOUGHT logic of revelation. Agamben believes that the Idea of Greek thought is one possible way of escaping the philosophical double bind of language’s polysemantic homonymy and its anonymous finitude. mediation itself ” (P. yet it provides no direct means of letting language speak itself.LOGOS. as ever the quarry in Agamben’s sights here. “Can there be discourse that. is itself immediate. Yet the Derridean idea of language as subject to the logic of the trace. does not.” but nor is an Idea some thing in the world outside: “it is a vision of language itself. forcing it always to speak of something pertaining to the epochal closure of the metaphysical project. Thus the conception of language as immediate mediation defines its communicability and reveals a possible way out of the nihilism of modern thought. The Greek sense of the Idea is not a word so cannot be named meta-linguistically. Agamben sees the modern presupposition of language as profoundly aporetic in that it posits language as the presupposition to thought. Nothing immediate can be reached by speaking beings—nothing. “If every human word presupposed another word. says language itself and exposes its limits?” (P. On the other hand. 53 . without being a metalanguage or sinking into the unsayable. 47). Or what Plato calls the thing itself. that is. while locating one irrevocably within language and its endless deferrals and referrals (it must be remembered that the trace defers forward by simultaneously referring back to historical contextual usages that presage its deferrals to come). a perfect language purged of all homonymy and composed solely of univocal signs would be a language absolutely without Ideas” (P. allow one to think language as such. A metalinguistic approach to language is able to think language in its finitude as a thing of some order but it must lift itself from out of language as semiotic medium to do so. he wonders. for example. does not have a presence that can be named but nor is the Idea a nameless nothingness. if the presuppositional power of language knew no limits. Agamben believes. Language. The Idea. As Agamben says. however. 46–7). except language itself.

or moment in history when all division is. or thought that does not find presuppositional commonalities but eliminates all presupposition leaving merely the great single object of true thinking. alone it tells us little. Similarly. to solve the problem of philosophy itself rather than use philosophy to solve problems. Even Agamben’s own. like a number of thinkers since Heidegger. as yet. for a second at least. Silent on the problems it has solved and silent as it comprehends the problems that remain. self-avowed project is negated here in true philosophical thought. made over much of linguistic communicability. the text Idea of Prose does not contain the source material of this intriguing construction that is to be found elsewhere in the third of our trinity of essays on communicability as such contained in Potentialities: “Language and History. “Was philosophy not perhaps the discourse that wanted to free itself of all presuppositions. which is understood by all humans 54 . Confusingly. even the most universal presupposition. He wishes. does not understand what to say. in isolation poetry’s reserved role as the closest experience we can have of immediate mediation via dictation is not Agamben’s main point. suspended. This object is the thing itself of thought defined by Agamben not by what it can know presuppositionally but what it cannot. which is expressed in the formula ‘that there is language’? Is philosophy not concerned precisely with comprehending the incomprehensible?” (P. not in song but in a pure language?16 He says. Such a mode of thinking is not lost in the mire of unspeakability as one might assume and is silent on the subject about which it must speak only because it. he reminds us that the original task of thought was not to discern the presuppositional bases for thinking problems but the elimination of presuppositions. One name for this voluble silence in Agamben’s work is the Idea of Prose.15 Such a moment ought to be celebrated should it not.” As the text opens we encounter Walter Benjamin speaking in notes for “Theses on the Philosophy of History” of the messianic world to come which he famously defines as one of integral actuality. 45).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN COMMUNICABILITY. via the mediation of Agamben’s text: “Its language is the idea of prose itself. perhaps. True philosophy in this way ought to be doubly silent. THE IDEA OF PROSE While an essential element of Agamben’s thought critics have. In the pursuit of thought nothing is sacred. For example.

“The status of this Adamic language is therefore of speech that does not communicate anything other than itself and in which spiritual essence and linguistic essence thus coincide.LOGOS. In the Idea of Prose we would not return.17 What would such prose consist of ? Primarily names. naming. however. but in the integration of all languages into one pure language that is not written or spoken but simply celebrated. To put it succinctly. language. he writes. integrated. humanity will resolve the issue of the Babelian profusion of languages. nor can it refer to other names within language. naming the world. At this moment what is 55 .” a language not tied down to communication but existing rather as pure communicability. discourse. not by taking up one single language and rejecting all others. prose would name nothing other than the fact that it can name: nominal potentiality. At the moment that history is redeemed from division into integral actuality. as there would be no exteriority for such endless deferral. instead it is perfectly transparent to itself ” (P. or communicability. THINKING THOUGHT just as the language of birds is understood by those born on Sunday” (cited in P. Benjamin. Language as communicability is the moment of integral actuality when the thing as such of thought touches the medium of thinking. to an impure process of attempted communication or trying to render transparent once more the opacity of signs. discourse presupposes names then a name cannot be anything that would ever need discourse again. Discursive language is widely seen as a necessary evil to redeem the fall of language over time from a pure system of transparent signification. as our tradition often has it. 48). This Benjamin famously calls “freed prose. Such a language does not have a content and does not communicate objects through meanings. as confusion can of course lead again to a diversity of names for such things. accepts the scission at the heart of human language between pure signification. simply to a universal system of nouns but to a totally transparent system of pure coincidence between sound and sense. I believe we now have an answer that we can retrieve from the mysticism of Benjamin’s wonderful prose. Such a name cannot refer to things in the world. How can this be? Agamben himself poses this question. and actual presence of language as such. If. and communication. 52). Thus the Idea of Prose is a system of pure and transparent naming that names one thing: the universal. like many thinkers.

It has to be this way. or material remnant. philosophy. 60). A thought that precedes language simply reiterates the aporias of philosophy’s reliance on.” He finds precedents for this conception in Plato’s Idea of the thing as such that an uncited Aristotelian fragment describes as “a kind of mean between prose and poetry. Is his prose therefore close to the Idea of Prose? At the resolution of the essay Agamben returns to the citation that commenced the discussion and its proffering of the “Idea of Prose. Which is why. At this point it would cease to be a sustaining experience of language as transmission and would instead be a specific transmissible meaning. That said. ironically. He is not a poet. In so doing it discovers this possibility through the very medium that momentarily facilitates this question. so to speak.”19 However. or to leave no excessive. transmit it. seems to be promoted by an observation by Valéry that states “the essence of prose is to perish” (cited in P. answering the very pertinent question why he did not describe an Idea of Poetry. is to be totally comprehended. Agamben opts for poetry. the poet says. but to say this it would have to cease transmitting immediately and choose a side. and difference. A language that precedes thought places language in a position of presupposition immediately negating its true essence and making it a philosophical concept. that is. language as semiotic mediality. by actually trying to think it. unity. The very meaning of language is its transmission of meaning as such. But this is exactly what they cannot do without abolishing themselves” (P. languages would have to cease to mean it. is the thing of such of thought. Agamben is a philosopher and purveyor of philosophical prose. semiotic.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN revealed is that the medium that allows one to produce or perceive the thing as such. given the weak choice of poetry or philosophy in the interim while we await the arrival of the Idea of Prose. He does not take dictation. Thought thinks how it is possible for thought to think away from presuppositionality. 54). This vision of prose’s total invisibility in the face of semantic transmission is part of a tradition that I have analysed elsewhere and has come to form the very frontier of the future of 56 . Language too requires immediate mediation as Agamben explains: “to say what they mean. Benjamin’s choice of the confusing term prose. language. yet disregard for.18 choosing to stay within language rather than distance himself from the source of all thought. The destiny of perfect or pure prose.

It does not unify because it exists pre-divisively in a completely other order of thinking that has no conception of scission and opposition. can no longer be pursued through philosophical prose. now simply speaks. resting solely on its own never having been. speech restored to the Idea is immediately dispersed. in the collapse of philosophy into a linguistic presupposition of unsayability which ironically allows us to finally think of a silent language that speaks itself. The Idea of language is language that no longer presupposes any other language. Nancy. (P. This indifference is not the result of unity or dialectic synthesis. insofar as it now says and understands only itself. sustains the life of language. But remnants of it can be perceived first in the very communicability of language as such or as pure medium. surely. 57 . which knows neither past nor repetition. having eliminated all of its presuppositions and names and no longer having anything to say.LOGOS. it would seem. a poetry of materialized prose. Agamben is reaching here. It is what is continually said and what continually takes place in every language not as an unsayable presupposition but as what. 60) A language of perfect transparency would accept no division and therefore can be described as totally indifferent. Only poetry. THINKING THOUGHT poetry itself. As Agamben says of such prose: Insofar as it has reached perfect transparency to itself. and finally in poetry and its complex presentation and experience of the materiality of language as such through dictation. in never having been. are no longer in opposition but in a state of integral actuality. it is “pure history”—history without grammar or transmission.20 Accepting that there are certain presuppositional and aporetic elements to this view. Yet a pellucid language would not be reducible to dialectic either as the two elements. and thus Agamben. like Badiou. Derrida. the Idea of Prose. and Heidegger. naming and signifying. for a messianic and impossible dream? Perhaps. can pro-duce perfect prose. Confusingly. if we are ever to arrive at that point. but essentially. is forced to turn to poetry. I will here concede however that at the very least it is the dream and beyond that also the Idea of Prose that its materiality should always finish in total immaterialization. it is the language that.

as that which resides between the two sides of Aristotle’s famous distinction between action (praxis) and production (poiesis). via the neo-Platonist Varro’s reading of Aristotle.” while owing much to Aristotle. and presents means which. He first raises the issue in an essay called “Notes on Gesture” inserted into the appendices of Infancy and History. One solution to this problem resides in Agamben’s theory of the gesture with which we already have some familiarity from what is. gesture breaks the false alternative between ends and means . combining Greek scholarship 58 . 154–5). 155). .THE LITERARY AGAMBEN POETIC GESTURES Although Agamben consistently affirms a common history and destiny for poetry and philosophy. as such. . and we will need to wait before we can fully comprehend this final leap of his imagination. but of a kind of mediation that is pure and devoid of any end” (IH. in fact. or simply the radical nature of Agamben’s claim. inbuilt scepticism. this rapidly leads him to the conclusion that it is gesture as pure medium that allows us finally to understand the Kantian definition of beauty as “finality without purpose” or “without end” which is. He comes to define gesture. does it turn a res into a res gesta” (IH. the basis of Agamben’s presentation of form-of-life as a new mode of thinking in Means Without Ends (1996). are removed from the sphere of mediation without thereby becoming ends” (IH. that potential for the gesture to interrupt it in its very being-means and only thus does it display it. This is vintage Agamben. the making visible of a means as such” (IH. perhaps due to the Platonic inheritance. however tense this dual occupancy may be. Agamben’s third foray into the theory of gesture. third kind of action: “if doing is a means in sight of an end and praxis is an end without a means. Astonishingly. 155).23 This definition of a means without determinate ends. “in a means. presents a new. 155). He feels confident at this stage to then immediately make the jump of almost two millennia from the Roman scholar Varro to the French poet Mallarmé and his concept of the milieu pur: “a sphere not of an end in itself. it remains difficult for us perhaps to see how poetry and philosophy could even begin to be said to share a common ground.24 is what Agamben calls gesture: “Gesture is the display of mediation.21 This early work begins in characteristic fashion with the philosopher bemoaning the loss of gestures in modern life.22 He admits that Varro’s analysis of gesture as neither production nor enactment but “undertaking and supporting.

26 It transpires that philosophy speaks of silence to fill in its memory lapse as regards its true subject for speech. however. which originates from the fact that pure mediality cannot be presented in the form of a proposition it being the unspoken base of all propositions. In itself it has nothing to say. 156). 77). he reads Kommerell’s own comments on linguistic gesturality. presents Agamben with a double negation typified by the use of the term gag. A presence in language more originary than conceptual expression. provides the potential for a silence to once more speak. The German defines gesture as closely tied but not reducible to. Agamben describes philosophy’s gag as being akin to that of what he calls the gesturality of cinema. it is “the stratum of language that is not exhausted in communication and that captures language. namely that gesture is another name for the communicability of language as pure medium: “gesture is the communication of a potential to be communicated. Thus the muteness of philosophy. much reviled in Language and Death for example. in its solitary moments” (P. language as such. in gesture. but in the aforementioned “Kommerell. 59 . or On Gesture” he brings philosophy closer to an art form more central to our study. The insertion of speech into silence. poetry. Lamentably the gag silences but it also inserts language into a hiatus which.LOGOS. Gesture’s muteness. therefore. so to speak. is also a betrayal of its importance. Defining the great twentiethcentury German critic as a “gestic” critic. THINKING THOUGHT forays into the European avant-garde and radical re-readings of the foundations of modern philosophy all within a few sentences. the linguistic. therefore. a positive silence. here becomes a positive gagging or “an exposition of the human being’s being-in-language: pure gesturality” (IH. These comments mark a fairly recognizable presaging of Agamben’s early thoughts on gesture here brought into the sphere of poiesis. because what it shows is the being-in-language of human beings as a pure potential for mediation” (IH.25 Agamben calls such positive silence a “gag” playing on the double meaning of a hindrance to speech and an ad lib inserted into a speech by an actor unsure of her lines. while yet another example of the mute voice within our tradition is. 156). The essay ends by explaining a relation the reader may already have discerned. Undeniably this silence muzzles the truth of human being but it is a mere interruption of amnesia whose very presence reveals the thing it promoted us to forget: language as pure medium. while a distraction from the truth of language. This nothing to say.

requires that we leave Kommerell in Germany and travel 60 . and a common if divergent response to their being “gagged” by language’s tendency towards muteness within our culture. and poetry the mimetic. noise. Thus for those possessed of the most words. compares gestural loneliness as akin to that found in lyric poetry. It speaks not of the pre. then. Like philosophy. the gestural is one of the means by which poetry and philosophy come together in Agamben’s work. the muteness inherent in humankind’s very capacity for language. it would seem. then what is at issue in gesture is not so much a prelinguistic content as. 78). Quite the opposite. Agamben calls this the tablet and our second encounter with it. language as pure. If this is the case. its unspeakability as pure medium that Hegel identified in the inadequacy of the deictic diese. the actor’s improvisation to make up for an impossibility of speaking” (P. He defines language as primarily conceptual and mimetic. Gesture is one name Agamben gives for the very mediality of language’s communicability. Kommerell proposes a decidedly odd equation of diminishing returns in this regard. 78). before assuring us that prose is essentially the conceptual component of language. Kommerell defines speech as originary gesture leading Agamben to conclude: “If this is true .THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Kommerell. there must always be something in the poem not exhausted by a reading of it in terms of meaning. Aside from the common history and destiny shared by poetry and philosophy. already heightened for them by their semiotic rather than semantic use of language. poets. to better illustrate his point. Having said that there is one aspect of the philosophical tradition that echoes the pure mediality of gesturality in poiesis. . He says the more we have language the greater the weight of the unsayable. the other side of language. it tends ever to the conceptual. . Not that philosophy as such is gestural. the weight of language’s gestic muteness. according to Kommerell poetry is subject to the gestic gag or as Agamben says: “something put in someone’s mouth to keep him from speaking and. Each word. graphicality. becomes almost unbearable. A proposition that allows one to draw the conclusion that in-fancy is also gestural. inexpressive materiality. bears a quantum of gestic mass. remember we have already considered Aristotle’s blank tablet. therefore. so to speak. its speechless dwelling in language” (P.but sublinguistic support of the semiotic as such in language. This remaining mimetic element is its gesturality or what we can also call the semiotic.

This site of a place reminded him of nothing so much as the threshing floors of Damascus. After three hundred days and three hundred nights of consideration. The entire. “Wasn’t what he was searching for exactly like the threshing floor. the pure potentiality of representation itself: the writing tablet! . (IP. but something like the perfectly empty space in which only image. THINKING THOUGHT back in time many hundreds of years to the court of Koshrau I of Persia where a respected and aged philosopher once set himself the task of finally resolving the remaining problems of philosophy . “not an image. breath. where the winnowing fans of thought and language separated the grain and chaff of everything?” (IP. PHILOSOPHICAL GESTURALITY In the sixth century AD. Agamben too finds the instigation of what he had been looking for since the inauguration of his great experimentum linguae. not a place or thing. the ageing philosopher Damascius decided to devote his last years to an impossible work entitled Aporias and Solutions Concerning First Principles. . not the origin of first principles but the place where language can be thought without reducing it to mere discourse and named without tying it down to a fixed. an image occurred to him that would guide him towards the completion of this impossible task. he was in despair “because how can thought pose the question of the beginning of thought . . taking his hand from the writing tablet for a moment. . the Syrian city where he was born many years before. THE TABLET. 32). . in exile. 34) 61 . in a flash the old philosopher realized the truth of thought: The uttermost limit thought can reach is not a being. but rather.27 From this charming story of ancient times. . Then. itself unthinkable and unspeakable. one night. but the site of a place” (IP. with many interruptions. . or word might eventually take place . 33). it was not even a space. its own absolute potentiality. 33). Describing Damascius setting about writing down the idea of the threshing floor. no matter how free of any quality.LOGOS. . . how can one comprehend the incomprehensible” (IP. he narrates how. lengthy volume that the hand of the scribe had crammed with characters was nothing other than the attempt to represent the perfectly bare writing tablet on which nothing had yet been written. particular referent.

what.28 Düttmann is somewhat dissatisfied with the translation of medio as “middle term” by Sullivan and Whitsitt. Medio in this way would mean to be both in the midst of something.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Courtesy of this epiphany Damascius understood that his work would be finished only at the moment he ceased writing and accordingly he broke the tablet in two. means he is unable to reconcile the conflict between writing that does not think (poetry) and thinking that cannot be written (philosophy). per lui. One can see why the rather bland and non-suggestive “middle term” then is not to his or indeed my own liking. a version of a kind of gestural or poeticized thinking. the precondition of all thought on the materiality of a non-expressive language. as Düttmann correctly asserts. not giving way to the extremes. This allegorical provocation is the threshold of Agamben’s first attempt to bring together the millennial project of poetry and philosophy and heal their painful divorce in Idea of Prose. Agamben has no such intentions towards a narrative of sour disavowal told by some future thinker fifteen hundred years hence and so alights with relish upon Benjamin’s Idea of Prose as a way out of perennial philosophical failure. rather medio must signify being in the midst of a milieu and being a milieu of the midst. 5). The term does not. “non era. ma il loro medio” (“was for him neither poetry nor prose. namely mean. refer to an already presupposed medium waiting to be occupied. therefore. with its double sense of midst and milieu or “what takes place in the middle. Being a thinker not a poet he thus has no option but to break the tablet of material language and abandon his philosophical ambitions. in the midst of poetry and philosophy. but their middle term”). né poesia né prosa. no doubt with great bitterness (although the text of this great work was in fact written). here represented by the medium of an as yet un-inscribed set of thoughts. remains surrounded by the milieu that characterizes such an intermediary state” (IP. preferring the German translation “mitte” or midst. Düttmann’s analysis of the translation of the key phrase from “The Idea of Prose” is important here. Mean here retains the sense of middleness and of sharing a common ground but 62 . and the medium created by the bringing together of these two terms. The tablet is. As Damascius discerned. The closing words of the essay speak again of the enigmatic statement of Aristotle that Plato’s “idea del linguaggio” (“idea of language”). That said Düttmann’s version seems to miss the most obvious translation of the term medio.

or the mean of communicability between poetry and prose. midst and milieu do not quite capture what is the essential experience of the Idea of Prose.” in The Coming Community (1990). This portentous rhetorical portal opens up a debate on the meaning of “whatever” in terms of identity and being. 1). middleness (Wall’s aforementioned radical passivity). but their mean.”29 The tablet. tension. While Agamben is talking about being and ethics here we can now clearly see that he is also discoursing on the traditionally assumed qualities of poetry (ineffability) and philosophy (intelligibility). Excited by this formulation he goes on to name this the quodlibet or whatever character of being in relation to that complex philosophical term potential originating in the work of Aristotle and finding radical reinvention in Heidegger under the terms of possibility. or On Contingency” for Potentialities.” It is a story Agamben has. therefore. while a consideration of ethics and community.31 with Agamben explaining he does not mean an indifferent being in relation to a common property. it is time to tell another story. 1). Singularity is thus freed from the false dilemma that obliges knowledge to choose between the ineffability of the individual and the intelligibility of the universal” (CC. is also a delineation of potentiality in terms of ontology as the opening essay “Whatever” reveals. For that matter he is also speaking of language. this time the tale of different form of tablet named “Bartleby the Scrivener. Average is a most common meaning for medio in Italian. namely balance. aptly. but indifferent being in that it is “such as it is. I believe that without the concomitant implication of averaging out. specifically its ability to communicate nothing but its potential to communicate: whatever name. told twice over first as part of a co-authored book with Deleuze translated as “Bartleby. suspension: “dialectic at a standstill.32 63 . being French or being Muslim.” POTENTIALITY To draw together the diverse strands of Agamben’s theory of the medio.30 and again in the lapidarianally entitled “Bartleby. is an example of a potential medium for thinking the thing of thought as such dependent on precisely this (re)translation of Aristotle’s definition of said thing as pure mediality: “neither poetry nor prose. stillness. THINKING THOUGHT importantly it adds a third sense: the average of two terms.LOGOS. It commences with prophesy: “The coming being is whatever being” (CC. This second volume.

all potentiality is based on a choice not to do. we say of the architect that he or she has the potential to build. non-invention. for the sake of argument let us say the poet’s potential to make a poem. is developed from the debate over what it means to have a faculty to do something and yet not be doing it. Akhmatova is a poet at the moment of her not-yet-having-written and. Thus when Agamben goes on to define the artist. Agamben concludes. 179). in-creation. and communicability all come together here in a sustained consideration of potential as the desubjectivizing presence of absence in being. or whatever being. 64 . Thus. Being is defined in its singularity by precisely this ontological condition of neutrality and passivity. simple privation. the presence of an absence .33 He notes that in Aristotle potentiality. the simultaneous existence of not being within the very identity of one’s being. The poet here. but rather the existence of non-Being.” but the chance that potential will remain solely potential—potential inaction. the poet the potential to not-write poems” (P. To have a faculty to write a poem. . means that you can write a poem but not that you are writing one or even that you ever will.” the actual and surprising definition of poetic being is the possession of a faculty and not using it.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Agamben has said a number of times that the Western metaphysical tradition was part founded on the now generally ignored opposition between potentiality and actuality in Aristotle’s work. 179). at every moment that the poet is not writing a poem they are in a state of potential privation: they could write but they choose not to. of the poet that he or she has the potential to write poems. “What is essential is that potentiality is not simply non-Being. “Thus the architect is potential insofar as he has the potential to not-build. It ought now to be becoming increasingly clear how Agamben’s early ideas pertaining to authorial gesturality. not the assumed movement from potentiality to actuality which we might call “creation” or “invention. as indeed all makers are. The presence of an absence for Agamben is the true definition of potentiality.” (P. so that potentiality is not simply actuality to be but also the refusal to actuate one’s potential. Agamben uses here the example of Akhmatova’s avowal that she had the faculty to express the horror of the Russian purges before she had written a word. “‘in this sense. . Indeed. tabularity. which comes to define being as the presence of the not to be. is defined in terms of being through negation or desubjectivization. in an odd way she is less of a poet when she is fulfilling her potential and writing poems.

Returning to Bartleby. THINKING THOUGHT Akhmatova is a poet because she can write poems but she only has this faculty because she can also not write poems. Being. 65 . being in its potentiality. must retain a remnant in each of its two manifestations. not yet being. Here gesture and tablet find a common medium in what I envisage as a tensile pairing that forms the communicability of language or the thing itself of thought. so to speak. and actuality. Once potential passes over into actualization however. the simultaneous coming to being and desubjectivization of identity that Agamben describes as the essence of the author-function. 35). Gesture is the touch and withdrawal of being. it is capable of its own impotence” (CC. Before being comes to be it already possess the remnant of a true being in that such a being is not full actualization but the retention of not-being even in the act of full coming to being. the potential not to be a poet as the very actualization of the poetic subjective state. having been. Stating that any pianist can play or not play. it is equally certain that it is not capable of only this or that specific act. .”34 Agamben calls this supreme power using the figure of Glenn Gould to better illustrate the power of whatever being. with his potential to not-play” (CC. a blankness that is never entirely blank and that. “I would prefer not to. Gould’s power is that “he plays. retains the element of blankness. he celebrates Gould’s artistic power through a consideration of his potential to not not-play. for those who are familiar with this remarkably prescient work by Melville. . Such a being is located in the mean or medial position between potentiality. he is able to consider his potential being beyond simply occupying this named position.LOGOS. The tablet is the medium of this touch or what is touched. it should now be clear that the reluctant scribe is the manifestation of potentiality embedded in his apparently self-destructive and nihilistic riposte to any request for action. the being that is properly whatever is able to not-be. As such he is an exemplar of Aristotelian thought as potential and his controversial and apparently unhinged performance choices are recognizable examples of masterful. therefore. even when written upon. Clearly Gould is a thinker in his playing potential for rather than simply being a pianist. there must be retained a part of potential being that is never fully realized. 36). nor is it simply incapable . Noting that true power comes from the capability for power and impotence. or to turn his potential into actuality. modern “poetic” thinking. “For if it is true that whatever being always has a potential character.

although Agamben notes that the correct term should be rasum tabulae or the layer of wax covering the tablet which the stylus engraves. Agamben glosses again on Aristotle’s definition of thought. Being as pure absence remains nonbeing. but from an impotence that turns back on itself and in this way comes to itself as pure act . but being as presence becomes unthinkable. as Agamben states midway through “Bartleby. But thought. 37). Aristotle compares it to a writing tablet on which nothing is written” (CC. 37). this time more centrally to its relation to potentiality: “If thought were in fact only the potentiality to think this or that intelligibility . written. philosophy is a firm assertion of potentiality. simply put. is pure potentiality. or On Contingency”: “In its deepest intention. neither an object nor its negation. “but that layer of wax. as possible or material intellect. And Bartleby. “a scribe who does not simply cease writing but ‘prefers not to’” (CC. Not thought but the potential to think.35 Just as Gould can think his own potentiality by playing with its negation. 37).” (CC. 37). so thought can think itself as a pure medium. not writing but the white sheet is what philosophy 66 . This waxen screen allows thought to turn back on itself and think itself as the thought of thought. This complex yet necessary logic not only dictates the potentiality of thought and willed creation but their interrelation through writing: “In the potentiality that thinks itself. we can now reveal that it is the famous tabula rasa. in other words. thought is no longer thought as such. as such. but is not yet and may never be. that rasum tabulae that is nothing but its own passivity” (CC. . but not in actuality think it for as soon as it is thought. . action and passion coincide and the writing tablet writes by itself or. not thought considered as an object. . Thought is neither presence. The perfect act of writing comes not from a power to write. writes its own passivity. Thought must have something to think. therefore. it is also the potentiality to not think. the construction of an experience of the possible as such. is the archetype of pure potentiality as the passive writing medium upon which thought could. . rather. Or. stepping away from to play or not to play in favour of a position of playing to play and playing not to play. but is the presence of absence within presence that both affirms and negates being. and. in its essence. Having met with this tablet once before.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Reading De Anima. it would always already have passed through to the act and it would remain necessarily inferior to its own object. nor some negative theological absence.

is thought itself ” (P. and the works never created: Mallarmé’s Livre. as is the writing of pure inspiration. Going on to describe the essence of the poetic as the tension between the demands of ego and genius. On the Road. As I Lay Dying. they have become someone they are not. Agamben’s whole philosophical system of thinking as such could be reduced to the thoughtless doodling of ontology upon a blank sheet with an inkless pen. a certain dim light shining from the left. 10). commences writing. Without being facetious. what do they see? Dressed in second-clothes. Or is it to be unearthed in his description of the capricious diffidence found at the desk of every writer of genius? “If in order to write you need—he needs!—a certain yellow paper. Or better a dot. These works did not come into being because they were not possessed of genius. as we saw. the drop of darkness with which the pen writes. 244). a series of dots. This white sheet is yet another version of the tablet of philosophy and the empty inscriptions imprinted upon it the gesturality that is at the basis of poetry’s experience of language as such. Agamben’s La voce umana. to flee from him” (Prof. as the poet sets pen to paper. the personal and impersonal (Prof. They are the art of pure character. Then there are the great works that were written purely through genius: “Kubla Khan. a certain special pen. . then opts not to . with what resides in us but does not belong to us. . DeChirico. but as they write they murder the muse and assume her garb. 14). it is useless to tell yourself that just any pen will do. however. Looking in the mirror of their art. Writer’s block is a phenomenon best explained by the ontology of potentiality. Poets are called by the muse to write. changes her mind. Duchamp.: “The ink.36 Potentiality in the writer is precisely this tension between genius and character. The experience of the poet can be defined in precisely these terms as poetic dictation direct from the muse or the greatest experience of potential impotentiality. 17). 67 . withdraws the pen. 249).” The Magnetic Fields. THINKING THOUGHT refuses at all costs to forget” (P. Each person’s character is engendered by the way he attempts to turn away from Genius. changes her mind. The author attempted to merely will them into existence.LOGOS. yet each act of writing. that any paper and any light will suffice” (Prof. There are the great books that were never written. not to write and to write. depersonalizes and desubjectivizes the writer. Agamben concludes: “To some extent we all come to terms with Genius. The impersonal is negated in the personal act of writing something specific. the late Rimbaud.

Some do not write and could never do so. A blank tablet acting as mere reproach to the woman of genius. What does he contemplate? Gestures: for the first time truly his own. There are those who can write and do so with facility and alacrity. devoid of every charm . all one’s written and unwritten works as Agamben phrases it. . 18). inspired flow are two sides of an imbalance of writerly potentiality. . Does one fulfil one’s potential in the work? Never. Their destiny is otherwise. when genius has abandoned them? “It is the late and final stage when the old artist lays down his pen—and contemplates. They are happy with their lot and it would never occur to them not to write. the brush as it is lifted from the canvas not when it is applied. . only now does the very long unlearning of the self begin . or not to not write. Their brilliance does not reside in what they write or what they excise or refute. The pen that grazes the page. for Agamben. fulfil. the powerful unfulfilment of true potential being. the great writers of genius. . Then there are the few.” (Prof. that determine one’s subjective desubjectivity as a writer of potential. Gesturality signs the long and chequered history of one’s being with language. and so on. and that is the only way. or to write as not writing. but in their ongoing and self-conscious game with writing: to write. too much character in one and overabundance of genius in the other. Here the author seemingly had little or nothing to do with writing. And what of when a writer simply ceases to write. The gesture alone is meaningless and sad. Writer’s block and pure.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Kenneth Koch’s When the Sun Tries to Go On. or not to write. 68 .

but the bringing into existence something that was not there before which could be an object. At the same time creation does not simply indicate the god-like making of a new object in the world.”2 Within the period of aesthetic modernity extending from Romanticism to our contemporary moment it has been common to interpret this dictum in such a way that poiesis could be taken to mean simply the willed making of something: creation. poiesis is “any cause” that results in creation. THINKING THROUGH MAKING POIESIS The Greek word poiesis1 is the origin of our term poetry explaining why. for the modern philosophical tradition. Yet if we pay careful attention to Plato’s words here. but its wider meaning is in fact creation. This view of creativity finds its culmination in Nietzsche’s concept of the Will to Power as Art or maker as creative genius.CHAPTER 2 POIESIS. say. Finally. the process of actually making is rather less glamorous than that. dark-browed genius does not necessarily have to work in the intermittent flashes of lightning accompanied by Wagnerian thunder and a rattling gurney to simply “bring something into presence.” Bringing something into presence could just as easily 69 . of filmic presentations of creation such as the various versions of Frankenstein. Plato famously says in the Symposium: “any cause that brings into existence something that was not there before is poiesis. Such a view confirms the ontotheological and masculine activity of god-like invention as creation ex nihilo that has dominated modern ideas of the artist-creator. but is not limited to it. This includes willed creative agency therefore. but could just as easily be a truth or observation. A sweating. poetry has come to be the archetype of all the arts.

toil. Beauty may be a part of poiesis but it is not necessarily the purpose of poiesis. Heidegger is careful to stipulate that the silversmith who makes the chalice is not the final and efficient cause of the chalice. purpose. Presence need not be awful. and utility. The temple. making the chalice is really an afterthought following on from deep consideration on the part of the maker as to how material.” a process he defines as “producing that brings forth—e. Note the emphasis on the object’s availability for use here. It may be timorous. the temple. Relying on the ancient Aristotelian four causes theory of philosophy—matter. respecting the Greek provenance. form. unveiling values such as equipmentality.” (QCT. 21). 35). the relationship between gods. 9). or accompanying. form. 70 . These four causes share the responsibility for “the silver chalice’s lying ready before us as a sacrificial vessel” (QCT. at least not in the way in which they make the chalice. . Van Gogh’s peasant shoes “let us know what shoes are in truth” (PLT. The chalice makes one think of certain things in relation to ceremony and sacrifice. that he presents as poiesis. Rather. and efficient cause (QCT 6–7)—he considers poiesis in terms of that which brings all these elements together into his chosen art object example: a silver chalice. soil. form. the erecting of a statue in the temple precinct . The same would be true of the statue. but the causality that combines all the other elements together into the coming to presence of a truth is not someone deciding to make something but someone. It is what the chalice can produce for us as sacrificial vessel and all that entails. each of them must be made of matter that is formed to an end by a causality. thinking deeply about the “that” and the “how” of material. .. reliability. For Heidegger. and their causality in such a way as they will bring to presence a truth or being that was not available for view before. purpose. guiding. poiesis makes something manifest to appearance that was not manifest before. rather than the beauty of the chalice. and the people through a precinct where earth and sky are gathered and composed together into a world where the gods seem to dwell among us.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN mean coaxing.g. The statue makes one think of the materialization of a god within a temple. and purpose will all fit together causally. through making. The chalice is to hand or possesses Heideggerian equipmentality. and so on. Heidegger specifically defines the bringing-forth of poiesis as that which “lets what presences come forth into unconcealment.

by making something new and wonderful in the world. therefore yet today we often speak of creative production as practice and artists as practitioners. that of work. voluntary. lacks the subjective agency of an artist as a maker. an experience of the production of something absent into presence and from concealment into the light. As Agamben explains: “The essential character of poiesis was not its aspect as a practical and voluntary process but its being a mode of truth as unveiling” (MWC. what one might call modern “Romantic poiesis. in contrast. poiesis. inaccurate order. Over vast tracts of time within our culture creation has emerged from the original Greek sense of pro-duction as passive experience of something coming to presence (to pro-duce literally means to lead forward) to a definition resulting in a god-like act of will on the part of man to make something or bring about something in the world that was not there before. One of the reasons for this confusion between poiesis and praxis in the modern age relates to a third category. It is an easy mistake to make.3 Work. Poiesis of this second. praxis. That said the difference between the two terms could not be clearer.” is god-like fiat and lacks the sense of passivity and modesty inherent in the term’s original definition. for the Greeks. to confuse poiesis with praxis. which is the Greek sense of experiencing truth as unveiling or a-letheia (un-forgetting. 68). was directly tied into the biological processes of the human as animal and. in that both seem to fulfil Plato’s stipulation that creation is bringing something new into existence. to praxis which meant to do something or to act in accordance with one’s will (MWC. for the Greeks. wilful action. If praxis meant doing something through one’s will to do that thing. a person able to bend their will to create themselves into being as The Artist. THINKING THROUGH MAKING PRAXIS According to Agamben poiesis was opposed. This slip of the tongue unfortunately confines creation to the very process. 69). a doer. poiesis was.POIESIS. due to the reliance on that culture on the sustaining activities of slaves. that for many thinkers constitutes the opposite of what creation actually is. essentially guide or facilitator of truth. We ought not to feel excessive culpability or remorse in this regard. Poiesis as pro-duction. Poiesis has in the modern age been mistaken therefore for praxis. was a concept at one remove from their 71 . un-concealment). Poiesis does not share with praxis the element of practical.

is completely opposed to the Greek sense of poiesis and is perhaps best summarized in the shift from the subjective statement “this happened to me. than between praxis as will and poiesis as almost passive experience. Greek and modern poiesis are both similarly ontological in basis in that both bring something into being and also operate as an act pertaining to one’s own being. it is much easier to find common ground between praxis and work understood as the basic production of all material life. (MWC. The predominance of will over creation taken as a value of will. At the same time a significant shift occurred typified by the modern period wherein “will” comes to overtake the unveiling of truth as the essence of artistic creation: The central experience of poiesis. For example. . 69). praxis. this means that the emphasis shifts away from what the Greeks considered the essence of the work—the fact that in it something passed from nonbeing into being. thus opening the space of truth (ά-λήθεια) and building a world for man’s dwelling on earth—and to the operari of the artist . biological existence” in contrast to the way in which poiesis “constructs the space where man finds his certitude and where he ensures the freedom and duration of his action” (MWC. Nietzsche’s definition of Will to Power as Art. “the point of arrival of Western aesthetics is a metaphysics of the will. the shift away from truth to genius facilitated the elevation of work. of the process through which the object has been produced . eventually. pro-duction into presence. Marx. is replaced by the question of the “how. 70) As Agamben goes on to show through brief readings of Locke. although the Greeks did not indulge habitually in work. As this theme develops through materialism and then through philosophy. .” that is. Heidegger.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN lives. most notably in the work of Nietzsche. that is. the original productive state of the work of art is all but forgotten except by certain poets and. the lowest of the three categories for the Greeks to. the highest. Instead. eventually. . Over the centuries the clear differentiation between poiesis. For we “moderns” it would seem that making is something a subject does to 72 . Smith. of life understood as energy and creative impulse” (MWC.” to simply “I made this. and work has been lost. 72).”4 However different they are. . That said. and the materialists. they were able to realize that work was “bare.

willed making into being is. 1 flags up this problematic synonymity between poiesis and technics citing Aristotle as claiming: “Every art [tekhne] is concerned with bringing something into being. For the Greeks making is something that can happen to being or the subject to produce an authentic experience of truth. willed creation ex nihilo.” becomes. the second passive recipient. is bringing-forth [Her-vor-bringen]” (QCT. This retranslation in effect negates the possibility that creation as poiesis can be Nietzschean. These stipulations allow Heidegger to re-translate Plato’s definition of poiesis so that “any cause that brings into existence something that was not there before is poiesis. Art works were not enjoyed aesthetically. The first is active participant. meant that. “Every occasion for whatever passes over and goes forward into presencing from that which is not presencing is poiesis. THINKING THROUGH MAKING being.”6 73 . 59). which is precisely the point. as Heidegger suspects. and this confirms the artist’s being as god-like maker. Modern making defines being as making something. Art was not a sector of cultural activity” (QCT.POIESIS. 34).” during the halcyon days of Greek culture in its ascendancy the task granted to poiesis. making the artist a technites (PLT. the Being of beings. poiesis does not make anything new. the bringing to presence of the gods. and looks for technical and theoretical means of producing a thing which belongs to the category of possibility and the cause of which lies in the producer not in what is produced. Most especially poiesis does not make what we would term “art.5 TECHNE Staying with the Greeks a little longer one can see that the Nietzschean interpretation of poiesis as active. For them. Bernard Stiegler in his influential study of Technics and Time Vol. “The arts were not derived from the artistic. it makes a new being. Greek making defines being as the experience of making. it merely lifts the curtain to reveal what is behind.” As Heidegger exudes in the closing sections of his influential essay “The Question Concerning Technology. This astounding declaration is partly founded on an earlier observation by Heidegger in “The Origin of the Work of Art” that there is a good deal of evidence that the Greeks would not have used the term art in the context of making but would prefer techne or skill. 10). or as Heidegger interprets the Greek sense of truth as aletheia. a premature seizing of the seat of the gods by presumptuous man.

The Greeks conceive of techne. As Heidegger states: “to create is to cause something to emerge as a thing that has been brought forth. although alone making cannot simply will truth. while it does not always make art. is this not a definition of art but of philosophy? For poiesis to make any sense as creative act. “the making of making as such” as Jean-Luc Nancy translates poiesis in its modern manifestation as poetry as the archetype of all arts. the unveiling of truth. poiesis as production of presence. if fleeting. I believe we must accept two things at this stage. Second. Finally 74 . praxis as simply doing. First. is not simply craft or skill. in terms of letting appear” (PLT. a form of artistic production. there is no poiesis without making something. All of this hinges on a double sense of what it means to produce an art work with work referring both to the thing made and the process of its production. appearance. within what is present.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN If there was no term for art as we conceive of it. 60). and the Greeks used instead the word skill. In this way poiesis is not making in the form of simple techne or skilful productivity—although the terms are necessarily linked and for Heidegger as for Stiegler ostensibly synonymous (chair makers for Heidegger have easily as much techne as Damien Hirst or Booker prize winning novelists)—but the activity of bringing to presence something that was not in a state of presence before: the truth of Being as such. can one trace any actual. Techne. 159). our modern sense of creation is a muddle of these three Greek ideas. but for the Greeks a specific type of knowing through creative making or as he says: “to make something appear. techne. Poiesis is the experience of the production or facilitation of the coming into the light of a truth. makes art make being come to full. in this way or that way. and techne as skilled knowing through doing. direct relation between poiesis and art as such? Heidegger believes so in that for him pure poiesis. we must come to terms with the making element of the term as well as the truth revealing or presencing element. that for the Greeks the three terms were all elements of a process of what they called bringing something into presence or aletheia. The work’s becoming a work is a way in which truth becomes and happens” (PLT. producing. instead of art. Yet surely. Therefore while one cannot assume that poiesis is definable as simply making something. Heidegger is helpful in this regard by asserting that there can be no poiesis without techne. as this or that. Praxis is the physical activity and will necessary to bring this about. therefore. he explains.

the religious world. but again a gathering of ancient ideas of sacrifice. etc. or that poiesis will result in art. if only briefly and partially. the gods. therefore. or gathers a continuum around itself made up of all the elements of its truthpresencing.POIESIS. after Heidegger makes this simple distinction: if an act of making produces being or truth by bringing it into the light. is not poietic as such but resultant from poiesis. The art thing as one must now call it rather than the more common art object seems to negate one of the primary aesthetic aims 75 . Knowing through skilled making prepares for the possibility of presencing in that it is a process of coming to know things about the world through skilful and directed making. then it can be termed poietic and as such art. transmissible traditions. the work of art. One might. It makes a small world effectively. but certainly for a work of art to happen there needs to be work as process and work as thing. ceremony. and so poiesis and techne must function together for praxis in general to become artistic practice. indeed they are not they are a mere image. If not then such a process is merely making something and is artisanal. from a thing. THINKING THROUGH MAKING techne is an intermediary state dependent on real skill in pursuit of the truth.7 Yet this bringing forth of truth cannot occur without making something so that the idea of the work of art must be taken simultaneously as an activity and an object or better thing. Even the chalice is not on object as such. the art object in this context. instrumental. but they are a thing: a point of gathering of truths about what it means to be on this earth and work this earth using equipment. or mechanical production. and so on.8 Heidegger is careful to state that art is not simply a delimited made object in the world. There is no guarantee that techne will result in poiesis or the flashing bloom of truth. What is poietic about the shoes and the chalice is how they allow objects to become things through the process of making something. rather its thingly status depends on the truths it makes manifest for human beings on earth: sacrifice. Here Heidegger attentively distinguishes an object or something with clear limits that the subject can observe and indeed make. A thing is something in the world that composes and gathers together truths in the world. THE ART THING Taking all of this to be the case. Thus Van Gogh’s shoes are not an object. equipmentality.

which is the bringing to presence of truth through making. Certainly. Similar gradations of abstraction are observable in the art of Picasso. Conceptual art is as thingly as Westminster Abbey.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN of modern art: that the object made comes to stand in the world in a delimited and self-sufficient manner akin to that of rocks and flowers. the poietic art thing is not art for art’s sake but art for the sake of truth and world composition. . each showing increasing levels of abstraction from the first. . 13). composition. Both forms of thinking can often think the same things. In “Back” four bronze reliefs of a back are displayed side by side. Such knowing provides an opening up. simplification. techne is itself “something poietic. even Turner. from poiesis. One of the most transparent examples of the interdependence of poiesis and techne is the move over time towards abstraction in a work such as “Back” by Matisse. compression.” a form of “knowing in the widest sense . Its object-status is to some degree irrelevant. what Heidegger calls “Denken. 89–96). Agamben notes how modern art has thought about being and subjectivity. Mondrian. For critics this would be truth-revealing enough but it must be conceded that for thinkers of poiesis such as Heidegger and Agamben these quasi-truths would only be granted full truth status if they move the artist and observer towards greater truths such as the Being of beings for Heidegger or artistic desubjectivization for Agamben. Pollock. If poiesis is dependent on techne. realistic. 3). Nancy speaks of poetry as the very moment of meta-making or thinking about making through making (MA. As an opening up it is a revealing” (QCT. That said the art thing must subsist in matter. abstraction. to be entirely at home in something. In each instance the artist’s technical virtuosity does not simply allow them to make beautiful things but provides an opportunity for profound artistic truths pertaining to dimensionality. effectively negating subjectivity and defining so-called desubjectivization as the modern experience of the poeticization of being. Other philosophical themes are regularly addressed 76 . to understand and be expert in it. stuff. colour. representation. We are now at the point where we can differentiate thinking. representational bronze. Poiesis must be hands-on. Kandinsky.” which is the bringing to presence of truth. and so on. to be revealed as if for the first time through their ongoing skill and thoughtful experimentation. Alain Badiou speaks in a similar vein of poetry’s ability to negate the category of the object (MP. and the sensuous realm.

Issues such as part and whole. It seems obvious. are all thought by poietic activity. not through pedestrian description or disciplined argumentation but through a form of thinking that occurs courtesy of the activity of making. ostensibly. and complexity of the term poiesis the artist can now be described as a “maker-thinker. the human. If we are to believe the philosophers. this used to be. 10). that a flower is complete but its completion is not of the order of its physical borders. traditional Greek culture such as that imagined by Hölderlin. death. according to Heidegger.POIESIS. Rather than dwell here on the much-vaunted Wildean uselessness of modern art. and decaying thing. and Agamben. His chosen example of poiesis in nature is “the bursting of a blossom into bloom. infinity. causality. makes a thing in the world in a way which provides a powerful point of difference between thinking as such and poietic thinking. One could judge their completion against communally held values pertaining to what perfect and thus finished work was.” Due to the provenance. 77 . and balanced made things. growing. subtlety. The maker-thinker. law. not least because a flower is a living. which cannot be considered in terms of art even if. mobile. a means by which to differentiate beauty made by human hands and the beauty of flowers and so on. in part. in itself ” (QCT. nature. I want to concentrate instead on the more complicated issue of its finitude. propriety. Kant’s famous definition of the art work as that which has finitude without purpose is. and Being as such. being in the world. flowers are in possession of poiesis.9 or what I will go on to name “logopoiesis. the case with works of art as well. poised. after all. THINKING THROUGH MAKING by the arts.” FINITUDE A central element of the activity of poiesis is the complex issue of finitude or formal completion. contested status. singularity. happiness. Such a procedure of thinking through making defines “poetic thinking” as Heidegger and Badiou have termed it. A non-purposive finitude allows for the work of art to partake of the perfection of a completion that is not directed towards any ends other than finitude as such and the pleasure we habitually and inexplicably gain from perceiving perfectly finished. finitude. The finitude of a work of art in a totally transmissible. Thus a flower’s finitude is not its actual perfection but the perfection of flowers as such. Heidegger. intuitive even.

material innovations in the performativity. Taking all this into consideration one has to conclude we live in an age of very Greek art. Here is the first stanza of a poem by Charles Bernstein entitled “Warrant”: I warrant that this poem is entirely my own work and that the underlying ideas concepts. it does not. virtuality. we value art for not conforming to any such model if it did indeed exist which. but in the endless process of the coming into presence of the being of art in a manner entirely separate from the simple activity of making something lovely. not how it conforms to the model but how it is an original work that confounds modelling as a cultural process of imposed convention and cliché. There is no communally held view as to what a Work of Art in general should be. or material (even temporal) limits of a work of art.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN was not to be found around the borders of the work but the means by which the work matched the transmissible model of what art. value. and conceptuality of art works mean it is now often impossible to determine the actual. critical sensibility. for our ability to retain the term art at all is surely testimony to the means by which we consider art not as located within a carefully crafted. or marginalia that surround the art object may indeed now constitute the art object. We are also more than ever attuned to the material problems of delineating the work of art in that the parerga. Further. It was an act of mapping a perfect gestalt. and make-up of the poem have not been taken from any other source or any other poem but rather originate with this poem. It would be true to say that the modern art work lacks finitude in almost direct proportion to its attainment of ever new levels of non-purposiveness. In our epoch the value of a work of art is precisely the opposite. and would unquestionably always remain.10 78 . with delicious paradox. For Agamben such a view is meaningless to modern. and truth was. The frame may become the work or its faming in the museum its poiesis. had always been. Finally. objective. unique object. frames.

If modern and future art criticism and creation is based on a process of aesthetic judgement on nonpurposive non-objectal. no actual delimited poem body here. and as the poetry on view is. Thus he declares: “Poiesis. . poetry. MORPHE. aesthetically. but returns back to the Greek and applies his own philological skills in trying to resolve the complex problem of the exact relation of poiesis to human doing essential to his later formulations of potentiality as having the ability to do something.” then we need poiesis if only to keep hold of art.POIESIS. and that which finds its principle through 79 . Agamben is able to admit that even nature could come under the term poiesis if it were not for a careful stipulation of Aristotle between a natural act of creation that “contains in itself its own άρχή [arche]. the principle and origin of its entry into presence” (MWC. if this is a work of art where does its artistic being emanate from? I would argue first that the poem is art and second that its art status comes from its poiesis. does not designate here an art among others. and ontologically warranted absence. There is. 60). either also called “Warrant” or perhaps nameless. law. As there is no poem object as such to view. and ontology. The deixis of “this poem” immediately reveals pure indication. aesthetic convention. the process of a coming into being of an idea about art as object within the market place. That said he does not simply accede to Heidegger’s reading of the term. 59). of that productive action of which artistic doing is only a privileged example . SHAPE Agamben sides initially with Heidegger in calling for a return to and development of the original Greek sense of poiesis as production into presence. therefore. beyond the deictic “this” as an indication of the presence of a poem in its legally. but is the very name of man’s doing. THINKING THROUGH MAKING This is one of several examples of self-annihilating meta-poiesis in the work of the greatest conceptual poet writing today. But what is the status of the ancient Greek term poiesis in a contemporary modern art environment? This is a question that Agamben in his work on poiesis has tried to answer. .” the one we are actually reading. that is. in fact.” (MWC. lineated legal prose and not “poetic” at all in any sense of profound techne. in that the poem being described and warranted does not exist except as something indicated within another “poem. illimited art things such as “Warrant.


human productive activity instead. This second category enters into presence by virtue of techne or skill, especially at shaping, forming before our eyes the crux of the difference between nature and poiesis, and finally dispatching the idea to be found in Heidegger that nature is also poietic. Nature contains within itself the principle by which it enters into presence, what Kant terms purposiveness, while poiesis has the character of a hylomorphic and Aristotelian “installation into shape” (MWC, 60) by which Agamben explains it must take on a shape or form in order to make the transition from nonbeing into being—for example Bernstein’s ideas about the enframing of art by capital taking the shape of a poem. Poiesis then produces a shape or form but poiesis is not the creation of an object. If an art object is presented then this object is the result of poiesis. All art is, in this light, post-poietic waste product. The interrelationship between shape and poiesis production into presence is problematic for a theory of modern creation. The Greek word for shape, morphe, was associated with idea and image, as well as appearance, all essential components of the presencing or bringing forward of poiesis. What does it mean that coming to presence takes a shape in poiesis? For a Greek audience au fait with the concept of Ideal Forms perhaps such a question might never be raised. It is simply too obvious. The Form of nature which is outside of space and time comes to human perception, it appears, in particular instances of form all of which are representations, examples or manifestations of Form as such, but none of which constitute Form as such. Form, therefore, while appearing in many forms, is irreducible to its forms. Hence the question of shape/form, morphe, was easily resolved by reference back, up or out to a set of Ideal Forms for comparison. Yet within the epoch of modernity shape is not something one can have any confidence in as an unquestionable presence. Within English, for example, the many varied definitions of the term shape might lead one to conclude the term “shape” is itself rather baggy, a tad shapeless. It can mean creation and/or form, outline, the created universe as such, imaginary or ghostly forms, an indistinct person or form, the outward appearance of something, to mould, and to frame. There is as much definition in the term relating to framing and indistinctness as to moulding and forming, perhaps indicating a slow dissolution of Greek ideas of Ideal form over time resulting in a


notable indistinctness surrounding the activity of formation. Spiralling out from this word are multiple possibilities that all indicate the problematic of taking on a Greek definition of poiesis without the concomitant intellectual architecture of a theory of Ideal Forms. If one believes in Forms then it is clear how poiesis can be said to produce presence through making without actually creating or making anything new in the world. The form one’s thing takes gives revelatory access to the Ideal Form which is at the root of the Being of all beings and this determines its shape. Yet without a sustained and secure theory of Form as the foundation or lit projection of formed shape as frame any modern theory of poiesis stutters to a degree however essential it is. How can production be the conferring of form onto a presence if the very conception of form undermines itself and thus provides nothing but a leaky container for the already slippery and dissolute matter of one’s making? If poiesis is making as such dependent on an idea of shape as truthful agreement with an already existent Ideal form, what is making for us today in a postFormal world?

The question casts us back to and indeed brings together two key issues in Agamben’s philosophy: poetry and potentiality. Summarizing Aristotle, Agamben delineates how every act of pro-duction into presence, natural or man-made, has the character of what is usually translated as actual reality defined in contrast to potentiality. Agamben then explains that actual reality is a rather poor translation in that Aristotle also employs the term entelechy in relation to actuality. While entelechy is usually reserved for the very process wherein potentiality comes to actuality, Agamben philologically opens up the definition of entelechy as follows: “That which enters into presence and remains in presence, gathering itself, in an end-directed way, into a shape in which it finds its fullness, its completeness; that which, then, έν τέλι έχι, possesses itself in its own end, has the character of ενέργεια . . . means being-at-work, since the work, έργον, is precisely entelechy . . .” (MWC, 64–5). In contrast to entelechyactuality, Aristotle defines potential as that which, not (yet) being at work, doesn’t “possess itself in its own shape as its own end” but is merely available (MWC, 65). If this is the case, work as a result of poiesis cannot be simply potential because “it is precisely production


into and station in a shape that possesses itself in its own end” (MWC, 65). Entelechy is the final element that allows us to recuperate poiesis as a term for creation. Poiesis is a work but, according to the passages just cited, it is also the result of work. Even so, apart from modern art it cannot actually be “at work.” Poiesis as creation is made up therefore of three elements. The first is potential, the availability-for of a material and a skill that, however, without techne, cannot come into actuality. The second is actuality, which is potentiality realized in the form of being-at-work. We must define this as not being continually at work, in process, never coming to an end, but that actuality is being at and in the form and station of a work. Thus work in which there is no being is not a real work and is represented by Agamben by the industrial object. In that all objects result from potential and end up in actuality, the third term in play here, entelechy, is that which differentiates making from creation-making. Agamben’s extended definition of entelechy is complex and remains without full development in his own work, presumably because the terms are all already in play in Aristotle, but it seems essential to fully understand poiesis that we spend some time explaining these issues. As becomes increasingly apparent, poiesis is the direct product of entelechy or that which negotiates between potential and actuality. Indeed poiesis is definable as the messianic formula: potential— (entelechy)—actuality.11 Entelechy determines something that both enters into and remains in presence. Thus entelechy must emanate from nonpresence and remain in a state of presence. The Heideggerian term “gathering” is instructive in this regard in that it suggests the nature of nonpresence as disseminated or dispersed and the coming to presence of poiesis as not so much the revelation of a form hiding in a substance but the attraction of things towards and composition around a substance. The way, for example, a jug attracts issues of containment, shoes in Van Gogh concepts of equipmentality, or a statue in the precinct of a Greek temple makes manifest an ideal of the gods. All this leads up to the crucial element of entelechy as that which allows a work to find absolute finitude. Being-at-work therefore means the total coincidence of being and form, the total realization of eidos that is, as Agamben says, both full and complete. Complete indeed because the moulded shape is replete with being. The shape of the work of art, then, is all important, as the only differentiation


between potentiality and actuality is that potentiality does not possess a shape. Entelechy is the process of shape-making and shapefilling forcing upon us an unusual sense of creation. Making or poiesis consists of marshalling the energy of presence as potential work into presence-at-work or actuality. This is not the making of anything as such. Rather poiesis makes an outline or contour for being. One must presume that until entelechy is complete, and Agamben gives no definite time for this as clearly entelechy does not take a period of time but takes one from the atemporal zone of Forms to the temporality of work via his own conception of messianic temporality, this contour is not yet shaped. Until the impossible point of completion it remains shape in potential, an elasticity of an already closed but not yet finished line. As being makes its way into this lasso of work it comes to simultaneously fill and make the shape. When being touches every point internal to the line then the work is complete, full, and finished. Here we see a shift away from the definition of the work of art as the total coincidence of form and theme as is often stated, to that of an elastic and tensile coincidence of form and shape. Agamben names this “content” allowing him to define the modern artist, after Musil, as the man without content or creator away from form; shaper of shape as such; instigator of a pocket or gap within the tensile balloon of the work. Like Ulrich, such an artist is brimming over with abilities, but has no actual quality or content as he cannot apply his qualities to any one task and convert his potential into actual, subjective value and identity.12 His potential remains shapeless in other words, lacking in entelechy.

Speaking of the period of aesthetic modernity Agamben notes that during our epoch the conception of the shaping of a unitary set of objects which do not come from nature but which possess finitude through agreement between shape and form has been split by the rise of modern technology and capitalism. With the infamous division of labour came also the division of making, leading to a differentiation or scission between things “that enter into presence according to the statute of aesthetics and those that arise purely by way of τέχυη [techne]” (MWC, 60–1). This downgrading of techne to mere making without poiesis promotes Agamben to reconsider poiesis in terms of


the modern doctrine of art being that which is original or authentic. He purports that within modern aesthetics any made thing that does not contain its own arche or origin within itself has been called original, the term meaning not so much unique but of proximity to an origin. During the modern period therefore: “The work of art is original because it maintains a particular relationship to its origin, to its formal άρχή, in the sense that it not only derives from the latter and conforms to it, but also remains in a relationship of permanent proximity to it” (MWC, 61). What this means in real terms is that poiesis refutes reproducibility through its claim to an originality that “maintains with its formal principle such a relation of proximity as excludes the possibility that its entry into presence may be in some way reproducible, almost as though the shape pro-duced itself into presence in the unrepeatable act of aesthetic creation” (MWC, 61). In other words, an original art work is pro-duced into the light from a proximate and preceding source. As soon as one reproduces the art work, one places it an extra remove from the source and indeed cancels out poiesis as pro-duction, for now it is re-pro-duction. And, for Agamben at least, that is not good at all. Agamben concludes that reproducibility is the essence of techne and originality the essence of the modern work of art. Yet, on the other hand, outside of Greek culture what does this modern quest for the origin actually consist of ? Agamben defines the arche as “the image, which governs and determines the entry into presence” (MWC, 61). In contrast, objects made simply according to techne do not have proximity to this image but rather the image preexists as an already pre-pro-duced mould with which the product must conform. Again, this issue depends on the presumption of an eidos or arche-image. In a transmissible culture, this eidos is the already existent content of any work of art that will be reproduced. In the Greek epoch of transmission, originality therefore is simply inconceivable in relation to creation. One does not create something new as in something novel but rather one creates a new body for an already existent idea which allows one to see this idea as if for the first time. Surprisingly, according to Agamben in the modern world, there is also no new work of art because there is no work or object that can be made that conforms both to the idea and the form of poiesis. Thus Agamben argues that originality totally destroyed the idea of the artist wherein “everything that in some way constituted the common space in which the personalities of different artists met

These hybrid forms of poiesis are not simply two movements in modern art. While in the past traditional values and lack of originality determined greatness as being proximate to the source of poiesis. THINKING THROUGH MAKING in a living unity” (MWC. yet at the same time it is a comment on its rampant reproducibility. What need is there of a warrant if the work were not in danger of unwarranted reproducibility away from and damaging of the archepresence of the poem as such? The final brilliant twist being that 85 . and that which is irreproducible cannot be reproduced.POIESIS. 63–4) Modern art. Thus the artist brings to being the very end of the lasting concept of the artist as subject and this. The object cannot attain presence and remains enveloped in shadow. On the one hand “Warrant” deals directly with the archepresence of the poem. they are. is poiesis in suspension. 62). the only two movements available at present for modern acts of creation. suspended in a kind of disquieting limbo between being and nonbeing. With the ready-made an industrial object is alienated from its context and thus raised up into the sphere of art. It is pure eidos for its form and shape are irrelevant. Pop art is all form with no proximity to the concept. Ideas held in common. is modern art’s first and most lasting poiesis: artistic desubjectivization or creative self-alienation. therefore. the ready-made and pop art. in a sense. The brilliance of Bernstein’s poem now becomes even more apparent in that he is able to demonstrate both situations in one single work. became during our age simply the commonplace. (MWC. Agamben demonstrates the paradox of modern originality brilliantly with reference to what he sees as the two most significant modern artistic investigations of the very presence of the art object. now the artist is defined as the person who makes things that don’t fit the mould but which break with moulding. testifying as it does to its singular originality. leaving poiesis as such as a place-holder of negation somewhere in between the two options: In both cases—except for the instant of the alienation effect—the passage from the one to the other status is impossible: that which is reproducible cannot become original. for Agamben. The curtain is grasped but never raised. With pop art the situation is reversed in that an art object is made utilizing techne then reproduced using industrial processes.

in some fashion. modernity has turned poiesis into a problem and thus made it visible for us after many centuries of easeful. If it comes to find a shape it must allow that form to succumb to the techne of modern reproducibility carrying it permanently away from its originary presence. within the dark defiles of modern art itself. As Agamben says in reference to his chosen examples. in contrast to the poet. modern art works such as these “constitute the most alienated (and thus most extreme) form of poiesis. Like most of his peers. categorical amnesia. He is forced to take on the act of making as the transition from nonbeing into being and all that entails. which is perhaps why shape bears close proximity to indistinctness. Agamben’s conception of creation depends on the Greek concept of poiesis. and eidos. its becoming something. Modern art is either poiesis without techne or techne without poiesis. Furthermore. in splitting poiesis. is problematized because it is bifurcated. industrial form (urinals. The very shape of a work of modern art is permanently split. Perhaps Agamben should have consulted with Bernstein for. wheels. While this is a lamentable state of affairs for a full. including the subjective nonbeing of the artist. 86 . the form in which privation itself comes into presence” (MWC. The answer to this question must lodge. its taking shape. and so on). 64). 64). If it remains proximate to arche-presence it can take on no physical form and instead has to parasitically occupy an already existent. at the very least. as ever.” and thus there can be no reproduction of the work precisely because the warrant controlling this process is the work itself. Leading him. he is writing in an age where the shape of the work. arche-mimesis. unlike Plato and Aristotle. the question shifts from the Greek inheritance of creation as the coming to presence of a being to the issue of being and nonbeing within coming to being. he seems locked here into a set of almost impossible aporias.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN arche-presence is undermined by there being no poem other than that indicated by the empty deixis of “this poem. In modern aesthetic theory since Kant. philosophical understanding of poiesis. to an epochal apostrophe: “how is it possible to attain a new poiesis in an original way?” (MWC. meaning he accedes to the Greek world of Ideal Forms.

He calls this epoch. he has a name for the coming together of the two elements of ontological time in a moment of crisis that is first. that is its destiny. This duality of temporality as regards being is the basis of what one might call ontological temporality. and then. Being. is currently withheld from view in the modern age of instrumental technology because. the very epoch of the epoch. The Homo Sacer project and the metaphysical considerations of works such as Language and Death construct critical theories of political and philosophical modernity that are proving impossible to ignore. and indeed one of Agamben’s aims is the bringing of modernity 87 . change. modernity. like his great forebear. and “out of time” in that it sounds the death knell of the metaphysical project and dispatches being into hiding for an indefinite period of time. a time that is both out of time in that it is beyond everyday linear time. he argues. He too sees the temporality of human being as both immemorial ecstasy and contingent historicity and. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS Since Heidegger questions pertaining to being are traditionally posed through two temporalities. nihilistic. Heidegger argues. potentially productive. Agamben is one of the most aggressive and suggestive critics of modernism that we have or ever will encounter. at some juncture. historically. This was not always the case and our dire situation will. The coming to presence of being in aletheia or manifestation of truth as unveiling and bringing to light typical of poiesis is a type of sempiternal event. being is also profoundly historical in a deep destinal way he calls Geschichte.1 Under pressure from such attacks modernity can barely be said to remain intact. Yet.CHAPTER 3 MODERNITY. Agamben’s work on time is indebted to but not uncritical of this model of ontological time.

and dictation. while modernity is a temporal epoch it demands a reconsideration of temporality in terms of ontological epochality that must replace a simple linear representation of modern time as moving towards the eschaton of completion. 23). and ending. il tempo che resta. 5–6). Agamben will not. some might call it fatalism.” When called by ¯ ¯. But more relevant to debates on modernity is the way in which the call to 88 .3 and his complex revision of historiography. 62–3). disallow him the simple act of finishing with the modern. the messianic the subject is called out of its current position and then required to occupy the process of its desubjectivization as its new subjective existence.2 Yet Agamben’s realism. takes the form of a messianic contracted time of remnants (TTR. temporality. This ¯sis call to vocation he defines as the “revocation of every vocation” (TTR. indeed cannot abandon the dark and divided epochality of our modern age of aesthetic modernity. or the condition of the hos me “as not. This time that remains. along with his mid-career investigations of the gesturality and the pure mediality of thought as potential.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN to a form of non-eschatological resolution. That modernity allows us access to time as a remnant that will radically undermine the eschatological and chronological categories of modern time is both the tragedy of the modern and its lasting hope. the issue of modern time is so central to Agamben’s work from his very earliest pronouncements to his most recent. In this way. for example deixis. Rather. For this reason. Agamben will never allow a movement from temporal modernity to ontological or subjective modernity. LIVING AS IF OR AS NOT In the early pages of The Time That Remains (2000) Agamben considers the Pauline call to a Messianic vocation through a philological reconsideration of the term kle (call or vocation). which is a common representation of time within modernity (TTR. subjective modernization is the realization of the radical change in the conception of time followed by the occupation of that site of transmutation as the only time left to us on this earth. Rather. The messianic kle emulates many elements of ¯sis Agamben’s earlier work on language. desubjectivization. his is a project that reoccupies the nihilised spaces of modernity through a productive negation of modern categories with the aim of moving beyond the modern by dividing it from itself internally.

while messianic kle would seem to occupy a temporality of ending. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS negation is not conceived by Agamben as just another form of modern nihilism but something potentially productive. the archetypal example of living as if. This alerts Agamben’s interest. which considers fiction. aesthetics.” typical of modern thought about aesthetics.” All the same Agamben presents a full analysis of the twentieth-century tradition of thinking the “as if. and the arts in the most unexpected places. So when Agamben posits the “as not” as a positive alternative to what he calls the “as if. one can begin to see how messianic time can be of great utility to ideas about modern art. Finally. If “as not” is a negation of being that presages a positive coming of being to presence “after” negation (the messianic time that remains).” ending with Gaultier’s work Bovarysm.5 This has no small importance for while Agamben regularly resorts to telling stories as an alternative philosophical method he rarely speaks of the fictive and narrative as such. This may seem less that auspicious terrain to seek out ideas pertaining either to literature or modernity but it is typical of Agamben’s work that one encounters comments about poetics. not least because he finds it hard to accept that Adorno advocates an aestheticization of thought after he famously designates aesthetic beauty as “a spell over spells. therefore.6 This then is a rare mention 89 . 35–40). has not been seen to be the case by the critical heritage. Rather. however. The phrases “as not” and “as if ” both play games with the idea of negation and creation. 61–78). rather than aspiring towards actual redemption. but rather the now familiar suspension of actualization that exemplifies potentiality at its most powerful and creative. the time that ¯sis remains within temporal contraction. as an ontological condition. a number of thinkers of modernity have come to see “as if ” as the great failing of thought in the modern era expressly as regards its role in aestheticization (TTR. to live “as if ” sounds initially like a creative potentiality for being. as Agamben shows.4 This. The call does not negate subjectivity but calls subjectivity into presence through desubjectivity. Agamben details a history of the philosophy of “as if ” which need not concern us except that it originates in a critique by Taubes of Adorno’s Aesthetic Theory which Taubes believes advocates thinking through the despair of the modern age only as if it could be redeemed. this is patently not the case as Agamben is at pains to demonstrate (TTR.MODERNITY. The “as not” is not negation as such.

but we will come to see it as the specifically epochal manifestation of desubjectivization in general. This ontological condition does not stand up to the test of modern ontological thinking perhaps. What is the Will to Power as Art except turning as-if-ness into creative. Gaultier defines the essence of human being as believing one is different to whom one is. so to speak. Yet. 37).” Yet it is significant. ontology is reduced to pretending-to-be as a form of double ontological negation. but pretends to be something. and Gaultier himself suggests that Nietzsche’s attempt to overcome nihilism was little more than an attempt to live the “as if ” of absent being through wilful and creative appropriation. This maudlin yet typically modern stance leads Agamben to conclude: “The fact of having missed the moment of its realization is what obliges philosophy to indefinitely contemplate the appearance of redemption. Agamben is strongly critical of this stance rejecting immediately Adorno’s negative dialectics as typifying a defeatist “impotential” that is unable to find power in weakness that he feels the Pauline messianic tradition of potential excels in. That is why aesthetic beauty cannot be anything more than a spell over spells” (TTR. he must now really live in a world without God” (TTR.” in this instance “as not” rather than “as if. Agamben’s consideration of “as if ” is a side issue in his attempt to present a credible messianic condition of living “as. 37). so too fiction might be a credible category of thinking about being. 42).7 while it takes a truly brave thinker to live as one “who no longer knows the as if. in doing so one of course is pretending to be something other than what one is in that one is nothing. . First.” Such a subject “no longer has similitudes at his disposal . bringing to mind Heidegger’s definition of poets as demi-gods. . one pretends to be someone else because one is no one. at the same time this impotent turning to the aesthetic at the point of thought’s failure is more than acceptable to him as a definition of the modern era. subjective agency value? In an age when god is dead. .THE LITERARY AGAMBEN of the possibility that just as poetry and linguistics can be seen to enter the field of ontology. thinkers of the “as if ” live on the earth as if they were gods. specifically his contention that “philosophy lives on because the moment to realize it was missed” (cited in TTR. of philosophy’s having missed its moment . According to his 90 . and second. . Aesthetic beauty is the chastisement. All of these considerations return Agamben’s attention back to Adorno. This being man’s essence. he argues.

” Living “as if. 91 . and this is what Agamben’s early tome The Man Without Content ventures as he makes the first of several attempts to negate negation. it is itself the negation of modern negativity in the form of a messianic moment to come which is the true state of modern now-time. Yet. of art even. or so the argument of aestheticization goes. therefore.8 Nor can one live life itself for that has been reduced to horror and bareness. turns out to be self-defeating both for thought and art.MODERNITY. The most familiar is the “as if. The second option is to live “as not. I would argue. creativity. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS reading. tragic. Thus one lives as if one lives. If “as if ” is a belated and blinded decadence. aestheticization of life. the “as not” depicts an alternate futural moment of authentic being. modern aesthetics has two potentialities available to it. considering the failure of modern thought and the horrendous nature of modern history how else can one live except “as if ?” One cannot live the truth for the truth is nothingness. but potentially redeeming modern novel. under the spell of living “as if. the aesthetic.” that dreaded term aestheticization: aestheticization of philosophy. The life of the “as if ” is the modern condition of the handing over of the failure of thinking to the debilitating yet distracting pleasures of the text. to live the “as not” is far from being nihilistic.” Aesthetics becomes. 39). In contrast to this. aestheticization of politics. a living through thought as if thought could still redeem itself but also accepting that we will always miss it if it does (a subtle swipe at Badiou perhaps?). as if one has being. living as such. To get to a “new” poiesis. the empty violence of The Real. If “as not” involves negation. For not only does the spell over spells cast a false veil over thinking it also misrepresents the poetic as well. In each of these very modern formulations an assumed impropriety. the State. This as-if-ness requires that one ontologize the spell over spells that Agamben later says “may even aptly describe poetry” (TTR.” while seemingly creative and thus an act of poiesis. One lives as if one is a character in a great. is: How does one travel from “as if ” to “as not”? To do this. The great question for modern thought. thought. one needs to traverse the problems of aestheticization and replace them with a radical poeticization. therefore. one first has to travel through the dread landscapes of aesthetic modernism. is added to the realm of the proper. proving destructive and nihilistic in each instance. as indeed it does. as if the philosophical pursuits of truth and happiness could be realized.

THE LITERARY AGAMBEN AURATIC TWILIGHT As we saw. to the work of Walter Benjamin. . In a post-transmission. or the possibility of sustaining an experience.” (IH. perhaps an engraving commissioned at some expense from a Parisian atelier or a detailed description in a traveller’s journal first handed round by close friends then published and a runaway success? In other words. and the Heideggerian adage that art no longer dwells among us. you will recall. to go through and to test. and totally possess: “Thus experience is now definitively something one can only undergo but never have. for modern life is replete with new and exciting experiences. Rather. he argues. has two meanings for Agamben. 38). In the closing pages of The Man Without Content Agamben turns. Experience. reproductive age—note here how reproduction does not aid transmission of cultural value but eliminates it—what dictates the exact rate of the fading of a work’s aura? Does aura dim in direct proportion to the numerical potentiality of a work’s reproducibility. what we miss is a common experience that the modern subject can undergo. test. . the Nietzschean idea that god is dead. 15). due to two modern statements by the masters of modern thought. a gradual decline that rapidly accelerates as the industrial process and consumer demand increases? Or would it be more accurate to state that a work is divested of its aura at the moment of its first reproduction. The essays that make up this remarkable study then primarily investigate the implications of the thesis of the end of cultural transmission.9 The arrest of transmissibility is. specifically here highlighting a profound aporia in Benjamin’s work on the fading of the aura in modern art and culture. Experience is never accessible as a totality and never complete except in the infinite approximation of the total social process . This consideration of the negation of experience in the modern is a development of what Agamben calls the end of the transmissibility of common values and experiences within our culture. one must 92 . indeed criticism is in essence all that modernity has become. another way of expressing the end of experience in post-transmissible cultures. What is lacking in modernity is not the element of testing. an idea also taken from Benjamin. in the debate presented in Infancy and History on experience Agamben is quick to agree with Benjamin that one of the preconditions of modernity is the negation of experience (IH. as he so often does.

The best comparison here is made by Agamben himself elsewhere in this volume when he places together the two key examples of modern art. becomes the very cipher of elusiveness. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS determine if the auratic twilight of the modern is a historical process taking place over time or an a-chronological event. the further away from the source of its authority it is carried. Both are. remove the aura from the work of art: Far from freeing the object from its authenticity. besmirching them in the profanity of repetition and excess did not. carries authenticity to extremes: technical reproducibility is the moment when authenticity. one might presume. 106) It remains hard to tell if Agamben is glossing Benjamin here or totally dismissing his most influential theory. its technical reproducibility . Agamben asserts. Warhol the singularity of the work. Duchamp questioning the authority of the creator. a urinal is signed into being singular and thus art. It becomes. The more an art object is reproduced. As we saw the ready-made confers aura to an industrial object. probably Benjamin’s most astute and generous reader.MODERNITY. every text. Properly speaking this is not at odds with Benjamin but is in accord with what Agamben defines as his great forbear’s messianic hermeneutic principle: “every work. (MWC. states the opposite. like so many of the German thinker’s eclectic projects. This problem is not lost on Agamben. when he argues that Benjamin’s discovery of the loss of the auratic value of art is. a consumer item rather than a work of art. it moves one more step away. by way of the multiplication of the original. in effect. Benjamin argues. seemingly. perhaps the most central theory in the canon of cultural studies. incomplete. Pop art instead takes the process of industrial reproduction and applies it to the art object. With each copy. Not until a work is reproducible can the question of authenticity be raised for the first time by the distance introduced between original and copy by the industrial process. the ready-made and pop art. however. contains a historical 93 . Agamben. This is to say: the work of art loses the authority and the guarantees it derived from belonging to a tradition for which it built the places and objects that incessantly weld past and present together. The technical expertise that allowed for an industrial-scale reproducibility of art works thus removing from them their sacred quality. . comments on aura. .

If aura exists it only exists for us at the moment that we see it in accordance with Benjaminian hermeneutics. What Agamben realizes is that within the modern moment. 145). the lights lowered to dissuade further fading.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN index which indicates both its belonging to a determinate epoch. The two great dicta of modern art’s destruction of tradition. the defacement of the icon simply adds aura to it within a transitional culture of transmissible intransmissibility wherein the potentiality or perhaps simply desire for authenticity still exists. SHOCK! Reproducibility as mass phenomenon occurs simultaneous to the end of cultural transmissibility within Western societies in the form of the negation of common experience by the end of the nineteenth century. that there is only one or that it has the quality of a magical relic. reproducibility along with communicability. does not inhere solely in the work’s unique singularity. we strain to see what is left of the concept of an authentic and singular work of art and in not being able to see authenticity it comes to view for the first time in a moment of tenebrous. god is dead and an art no longer dwells among us. occur together technically as the result of the same forces initially on these very islands from which I am transmitting my code to the world. are both comments on cultural intransmissibility. Indeed. Reproducibility contributes to this malaise only by weakening the points wherein past and present meet. What Agamben cannily reveals in reading Benjamin’s ideas on art under the heading of his ideas on history is that reproducibility is meaningless unless thought of in tandem with transmissibility. blinding anti-poiesis. an activity that 94 . it also depends on the transmissibility of this quality (by transmissibility here read unquestioned status). Myopically peering through the murk. Modernists have often been called iconoclasts but according to Agamben this is literally true in that they take religious relics. as well as its only coming forth to full legibility at a determinate historical moment” (TTR. the religious icon say. both actual in terms of rail travel and virtual in terms of the mass media and new technologies such as the telegraph. works of auratic art. The authenticity and authority of the icon. and deface them (think of Magritte’s infamous vandalization of a reproduction of the Mona Lisa).

along with his rumination that the modern is “the transient.MODERNITY. As regards the proposal of shock as the “common place” of a post-transmissible culture however. modern experience. In order to bring this mammoth prophylaxis/invention into play “the artist had to attempt to reproduce in his work that very destruction of transmissibility 95 . Face to face with the dissolution of aura within a society where the authority of tradition was daily under attack. Baudelaire’s conception of shock.”10 easily confer upon him the honour of being the great precursor to contemporary reappraisals of modernity and aesthetics. the lieu commun and the eternal transient. is the missing element of Benjamin’s great theory of aura. the contingent. Agamben realizes. the fleeting. Baudelaire was confronted with the very collapse of art as a means for the transmissibility of common cultural values and thus the end of art as it had been conceived through the whole of transmissible Western culture. Baudelaire demonstrates the powerful forces at play in modernity’s embracing of reproducibility at the moment of intransmissibility by his creation of two impossible paradoxes. In both formulations. or commonplace wherein modern shock can become what we hold in common. the ability of modern life and art to shock (for shock is the result of a happening for which a culture is not preprepared) and make shock the new locale of a common. the other being the eternal and the immutable.” Baudelaire “fulfilled this task by making the very intransmissibility of culture a new value and putting the experience of shock at the center of his artistic labour” (MWC. The end of experience experienced as shocking is. our new. At this juncture Agamben then begins to tinker ever so slightly with the terms in play when referring to the means by which Baudelaire saved art and created modernity. The paradox of the eternal transient is the more well known and its oxymoronic nature obvious. In effect. Having to “invent a new authority. Shock is defined here as the “jolt power acquired by things when they lose their transmissibility and their comprehensibility within a given cultural order” (MWC. Baudelaire was tasked with inventing a new source of authority for the art work. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS replaces the communal places of common art. 106). temple or festival. it is the one half of art. common experience. in other words. with the famous Baudelaire lieu commun. what Baudelaire attempts is to take the very value that ends tradition. 106). Baudelaire’s comments on modernity here.

linking tradition with the present age. must be defined as a process of transmitting the very quality of intransmissibility. The alienation experienced within art serves as nothing else but the dissolution of the borders of said work through the revelation of the finitude of the work at the moment of its collapse. 106). Instead of a work of art being a thing in itself whose reproduction undermines its sacral singularity effectively profaning the work. It becomes. Attend here to the means by which Agamben repositions the meaning of the terms reproducibility and transmissibility. unrecognizable from the work of art which precedes it but at the same time it operates as the lens through which that work can be called art. in the final analysis. and this alienation is in its turn nothing other 96 . The work becomes a moment of shock. it forms the basis of the whole of the epoch of aesthetic modernity and modern aestheticization. that dissolves the finitude of the art object as a delimited and valued thing through its reproducibility and conversion into praxis. art was transmission. The new work of art. Shock becomes not the collapse of meaning in art but the meaning of art as the collapse of meaning. Art did not act as a vehicle for transmission. and relighting of aura’s eternal flame through the epochal hiatus between transmissibility and the transmission of a communal intransmissible experience of culture. in this light. The work of art must therefore cease to be an objectal work and become instead praxis or being at work whose materiality is reduced to the vehicular transportation of that which cannot be transported. the alienation effected by the work of art. This event alone produces what we now call modern art. reproduction is instead reserved for the praxis of the creator. in effect. expunging.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN that was at the origin of the experience of shock: in this way he would succeed in turning the work into the very vehicle of the intransmissible” (MWC. More than that. With the rise of reproducibility the work of art becomes severed from this community and ceases to transmit so that reproducibility is not the cause of the diminishment of aura but merely facilitates what is in fact the revelation. absolutely and significantly finite. Previous to the moment or epoch of shock there was in effect no “work of art” as art was environed seamlessly within the very culture it was able to transmit through time. At the same moment it brings the work of art into contact with history for the very first time: “The survival of the past in the imponderable instant of aesthetic epiphany is.

creating a continuum between tradition and the present that all but eradicates their difference. it fulfils the double meaning of epoch to be found in its etymology: epoche a point in time and a delimited period of time. singularity and transmissibility. At this point. It would seem alienating shock is not the legacy of modern art but of self-satisfied traditional values. temporal and spatial. 97 . This experience of aesthetic epoche ¯ is Agamben’s definition of that epoch of epochs we call modernity. each in violent contradiction—art is defined as the singular instance of the held in common—are seen critically for the first time. occupying both the position of an event of major transition and the creation. effectively eradicates separation. that is. Aesthetic modernity is the point in time when the epoch of the modern period of art is seen for the first time through its retrospective revelation via negation of the epoch of transmissibility which precedes it. the arche-epoch of art’s very first coming into being or the conditions for art. of tradition” (MWC. When the transmissible act of making something singular comes to replace the singularity of the work of transmissibility one is both exiting art and seeing it for the first time as art. 107). retrospectively. The “now” ceases to be a moment in time but rather is the endless extension of tradition into the future. ¯. Agamben’s contention here is that the work of art in space and time is experienced for the first time in the moment of shock at the realization that the work no longer exists in a time-space continuum but is expropriated from both. Transmissibility. of both the premodern and modern epochs of transmissibility and intransmissibility respectively. a recursiveprojective interplay that we will later come to term poetic structure. Thus the end of art is a recursive glance back to the transmission of art through time that only comes into full view at the moment of its cessation. In contrast.MODERNITY. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS that the measure of the destruction of its transmissibility. Indeed one could go one step further here and propose that aesthetic modernity not only reveals tradition through negation but in fact invents it for the first time. Epoch of epochs for. for example. turning back to gaze over one’s fleeing shoulder. PROFANING SCISSION Both transmission and reproduction are dependent on metaphysical conceptions of scission and separation.


reproducibility removes the art object from its original authenticity establishing an impossible to traverse abyss between the idea of authenticity as origin and the work itself as literally present. Reproducibility, therefore, introduces an intransmissible space between poiesis and praxis working effectively as the destructive locum for anti-entelechy. Reproducibility is necessary for intransmissibility as such or the making permanently profane the sacred work which is the genius of modern art and its most valuable anti-poietic legacy. Yet, as we now know separation within Agamben is never straightforward and always to be questioned. In the essay “In Praise of Profanation,” for example, Agamben boldly declares that religion can be defined as “that which removes things, places, animals, or people from common use and transfers them to a separate sphere. Not only is there no religion without separation, but every separation also contains or preserves within itself a genuinely religious core” (Prof, 74). While Agamben, reading the founders of modern anthropology, defines the sacred as this passage across the zone of separation, he concedes that the differentiation profane/sacred is less important than “the caesura that divides the two spheres, the threshold that the victim must cross . . .” (Prof, 74). One of the simplest forms of such a crossing is contagion, he notes, the transmission of a disease that threatens to reproduce out of control. The “contagious” nature of separation, whose etymology is to be found in the word contact, allows us to understand the very roots of our transmissible culture in religion. Later, in the same essay Agamben is again reading a Benjamin fragment, this time “Capitalism as Religion,” wherein he finds Benjamin’s suggestion that capitalism appropriates the separating ability that defines religion and generalizes it in all domains: Where sacrifice once marked the passage from the profane to the sacred and from the sacred to the profane, there is now a single, multiform, ceaseless process of separation that assails every thing, every place, every human activity in order to divide it from itself . . . In its extreme form, the capitalist religion realizes the pure form of separation, to the point that there is nothing left to separate. An absolute profanation without remainder . . . (Prof, 81)11 This is naturally a description of commodity culture or the paradox of the separation of separation where the object becomes so profaned that it becomes impossible to profane as separation as such


is negated.12 In such a culture all objects are equally transmissible and therefore, in theory, equally sacred resulting in a sacralization of the profane. The consumer object is transmission’s evil doppelganger wherein the object no longer operates within transmissible, historically located cultural values, but instead all values become ahistorical products of the object defined purely as transmissible or exchangeable.

In an age of artistic singularity and transmissibility, which is not an age per se but the precursor to the age of art as art, taste and terror are not qualities that the spectator ought to admit to. Inclination and repulsion, although naturally qualities that are unavoidable when observing any phenomenon, could not, during the time of tradition, be admitted into the role of the spectator of particular art works. Certainly, one could love art and one could fear it, especially from the position of actual or aspirational sovereignty such as one finds in Plato, but always as a whole or single entity. Judging art in totality was possible and common in the form of censorship for example, however such sovereign decrees would not depend on personal inclination on what we call today taste. One could not, in a truly transmissible culture, judge a work of art or even perhaps identify it. Art would be, during such an age, extensible with culture as a whole and culture synonymous with the polis. To judge art as bad would be to judge bios as bad. Only a sovereign can do that. Like Nancy, I am uncertain if a totally transmissible culture is anything more than the nostalgic yearning of certain poets and philosophers.13 Yet, irrespective of whether a truly and totally transmissible culture ever existed without remainder, the transmissibility of art was an assumed characteristic up until the moment that the nexus between tradition and the present came under critical consideration in France in the eighteenth century with the debate between the ancients and the moderns. Kant’s third critique on judgement, of course, along with Hegel’s assertion that in the modern period art was at an end, contributed to the development of the category of taste which enters into common usage in English round about the eighteenth century. Agamben however traces its origins back to the middle of the previous century with the rise of the figure of the man of taste who was reputed to have a sixth sense for art which allowed


him to identify the “point de perfection that is characteristic of every work of art” (MWC, 13). As taste develops as a concept Agamben notes how the roles of and relationship between the artist and spectator change accordingly: As the idea of taste increases in precision . . . the work of art (at least so long as it is not finished) starts to be regarded as the exclusive competence of the artist, whose creative imagination tolerates neither limits nor impositions. The non-artist, however, can only spectare, that is, transform himself into a less and less necessary and more and more passive partner, for whom the work of art is merely an occasion to practice his good taste. (MWC, 15) The resultant downgrading of the role of spectator in relation to transmissible art cultures is more than apparent here. From active participant in communal culture, of the same subjective value effectively as the artist, the spectator now becomes the one who sees, gazes, gawps from a distance and then, at the end, passes judgement. I like it/I don’t like it. In contrast, the artist’s role becomes far more pronounced for art made by such a creator cannot in effect be judged it being the very dismissal of all such strictures. It comes into being much as a Kantian flower might, and can no more be judged than a flower can or its creator, god. Finally, the relation between the creator and the spectator is now one of irrevocable disjunction. They are not participants in communal culture but two entirely different subjects in relation to a new, alien form. The artist invents so as to live, to attain subjectivity of a kind. The spectator merely observes with the aim of practising or perhaps better honing their new sixth sense: taste. While the rise of taste seems to provide the creator with a god-like power which Nietzsche comes to formulate as the Will to Power as Art, like all humans who attempt to emulate the gods the results are fearful and dangerous: “The artist, faced with a spectator who becomes more similar to an evanescent ghost the more refined his taste becomes, moves in an increasingly free and rarefied atmosphere and begins the voyage that will take him from the live tissue of society to the hyperborean no-man’s-land of aesthetics . . .” (MWC, 16). Taste and invention then seem to be bound together tragically by a rule of inverse proportions: “For, while the balanced figure of the man of taste becomes wide-spread in European society, the artist


enters a dimension of imbalance and eccentricity” (MWC, 16). The critic, in other words, becomes a stabilized subject by his increasingly professionalized and technically refined inclinations. The poet is gripped by holy terror. While the spectator becomes spectral through a process of endless refinement, his corporeal presence is literally attenuated into a tissue-thin membrane of exquisite judgements, it is the freedom afforded to the artist by the rise of judgement over mutuality that really opens up an uncanny landscape of diaphanous presences and gloomy open plains. The origins of this differentiation lie, according to Agamben, initially with Plato and then more recently with Nietzsche. Indeed, while we may assume that the fear of art is a contemporary issue manifested in people’s suspicious dismissal of art not as bad or even not art but as rubbish, the Greeks too felt the terror of art. The Man Without Content begins with a large tranche of Genealogy of Morals wherein Nietzsche makes his famous attack on the conception of Kantian disinterestedness before making his own case for an interested art. After this greedy bite of Nietzsche, Agamben goes on to note that Nietzsche’s attack on disinterestedness was not designed to bring about an alternative aesthetics but to purify the concept of beauty by decanting it from the sensory involvement of the spectator, so as to serve it up entirely to the pleasure of the creator. In a prophesy of modern art which Agamben goes on to debate throughout the rest of the essays in the book, modern art comes to be defined in terms of the experience of creation rather than the sensible apprehension of the spectator, as had been the case for Kant and Hegel of course. Art becomes, at this point, invention; art becomes modernism; art becomes shock. As ever with Nietzsche this is all very thrilling but there were good reasons for an ideology of aesthetic disinterestedness.14 As Agamben notes, there is a long history of repulsion as regards the rich dish of an interested and interesting art from the decree to raze the Roman theatres, the attacks of Saint Augustine on scenic games, to what Agamben calls “the first time that something similar to an autonomous examination of the aesthetic phenomenon in European medieval society” (MWC, 3) occurred (it was primarily concerned with the dangers of ars nova distracting the laity). Agamben goes further noting the infamous section of Plato’s Republic and Sophocles’ Antigone as contributors to a decidedly Greek fear/awe of art as a form of profound and politically threatening interest.


An art of interest is, primarily, an art of involvement, complicity, often an art of seduction. The distance of the spectator is devoured by the interest they share in the performance in front of them. They are no longer spectators but participants in the very act of pure creation. Possessed by art’s contagion they begin to live as if they were heroes, queens, gods, and monsters. While some remnant of the Greek idea of an art of interest remains in such concepts as, say, catharsis, which is the archetype of an interested experience of art, and modern debates on censorship, it is perhaps hard for us to conceive of a work by John Ashbery as capable of the literal magic, as Artaud expresses it, of an interested art. The term Plato uses to describe the inspired imagination is “divine terror” (MWC, 4), and Agamben concedes this is a rather tasteless overplaying of the effects of art on the modern spectator. That said, returning to Nietzsche and the various exponents of an interested art, terror was very much on the minds of the modern artist. Fatuous explanations for the prevalence of early death, tragedy, suicide, murder, madness, and renunciation among artists usually look to modern psychological models of manic depression and perhaps a disturbed childhood for good measure. Lautréamont, Woolf, Baudelaire, Proust, Mayakovsky, Khlebnikov, Eliot, Pound; why did they lose their life, their health, their socialization, their minds? Agamben’s insight into the madness of modern art takes up an entirely different, unexpected and, for our understanding of the arts, profound recipe than that of simple psychology. At the same time as, in modern aesthetics, the spectator is able place art at one remove by virtue of disinterest: “For the one who creates it, art becomes an increasingly uncanny experience, with respect to which speaking of interest is at the very least a euphemism, because what is at stake seems to be not in any way the production of a beautiful work but instead the life and death of the author, or at least his spiritual health” (MWC, 5). This statement results in another equation wherein the increasing innocence of the spectator’s experience in front of the art work corresponds to the degree of danger central to the creator’s experience. Agamben backs this up with many now well-known expressions of the risk of art— Baudelaire, Hölderlin, Van Gogh, Rilke—suggesting an alternative messianism in his work, that of the self-sacrifice of the modern artist at the altar of an interested anti-aesthetics of creation as subjective state.

then perhaps we are today in a privileged position to understand the authentic significance of the Western aesthetic project” (MWC. 7). Rather they want to burn the very dwelling of art to the ground. for artists only” (MWC. with a senate. . Yes. statuary. and build a new home that perhaps over time could become a city. commissions. but not so as to make art transmissible in life again but rather to make life subject to the very alienation the artist feels when faced with the uncanny presence of pure poiesis. Having taken us across a ghostly plain we are now confronted with a burnt-out homestead. whistling about our ears. pit man against Terror?” (MWC. Here Agamben merely hints at the now classic definition of the avant-garde to be found in the work of Burger and others.MODERNITY. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS The death of poets leads Agamben to a typically messianic conclusion which calls for the destruction of aesthetics. In this once rich land of cultural transmissibility a mismanagement of the environment has lead to barrenness and conflagrations on hill-sides once renowned for their fertility and festivals. this most innocent of occupations. how can modern art subsist on the ambiguous fare of taste based on universal disinterest. and terror which is the result of interest? Taste seems to attract the spectator to participate in precisely 103 .16 a nihilistic art that seeks not so much innovation as is sometimes assumed (make it new). 6). These artists wish to make artists of us all. This instigates a movement from the misty nostalgia of a Heideggerian art that dwells among us to a truly modern conception of art that immolates its very dwelling on this earth. 8) the philosopher asks. HOW TO EXIT ART “How can art. but a devastation of the distanciation between art and life imposed by the presence of the spectator and the institutions that have arisen to support this concept. a destruction perhaps already in place: “If it is true that the fundamental problem becomes visible only in the house ravaged by fire. to return art to life. The essay then ends by jettisoning us out onto this calcified outcrop with the words of a mad prophet. or perhaps more pungently.15 but also easily identified in the statements of the artists themselves. The landscapes of Agamben’s thinking are always appealing and slightly appalling. and artistic scandals. not least literary criticism. Nietzsche. lay out foundations. an art for artists. Such mad artists do not want to move to a fresh plain. . museums. calling for “another kind of art .

rhetoricians and terrorists. The rhetorician wishes to “dissolve all meaning into form” (MWC. an art which is auto-anthropophaganous or self-devouring. Frenhofer labours at his masterpiece for ten years to create a work of art that negates art and becomes. This remainder. allows Agamben to begin to undermine not only the quest for the absolute in terror. a kind of aesthetic wine-tasting where they can sample Picasso but cannot become drunk on Joyce. In direct contradistinction. an art which exits art through the door marked “To Art. silence. His is an art of abstraction which repulses 104 . 9). tones. of a thought in whose flame the sign would be fully consumed. kitsch.” Yet in reality the woman he has painted is reduced to mere colours and abstract forms: “a chaos of colors. hesitating nuances. putting the writer face to face with the absolute” (MWC. Loath as I am to succumb to the simple binary oppositions displayed in this. Agamben calls the terrorist a misologist. a “living reality. indeed becomes transmissible with life. in trying to create art that competes with.” Frenhofer invents a modern art. He notes. a kind of shapeless fog” leading the young Poussin to exclaim “but sooner or later he will have to realize there is nothing on the canvas!” (MWC. the artist is allowed to be totally consumed by the desire to create and yet this same desire leads to the pure intoxicating terror of madness. As Agamben rightly indicates. Agamben traces the relation between poiesis and terror to the distinction to be found in the mid-century French writer and critic Jean Paulhan between two types of writers. 8).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN what they cannot have. the dark face of his own beloved philology. 8). “It is the dream of a product that exists according to the statute of the thing” (MWC. who “does not recognize in the drop of water that remains on his fingertips the sea in which he thought he had immersed himself ” (MWC. like the Pygmalion myth. Agamben’s earliest work. through a reading of the character of the artist Frenhofer in Balzac’s The Unknown Masterpiece that the dream of the terrorist is to create a work that exists in the world in the same manner as objects do: block of stone or drop of water. 9). the distinction is clearly reflective of a tendency within modern Western (anti)aesthetics or at the very least the two extremes of that most extreme epoch aesthetic modernity. while terrorists “refuse to bend to this law and pursue the opposite dream of a language that would be nothing but meaning. of course. but also to commence with breaking down the differentiation between rhetoric and terrorism. 9). and death.

or thought leads Agamben to posit the very paradox of the artist’s terror. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS the disinterested spectre of Poussin (literally spectral here. he ends up with nothing in his hands but signs . and the more he wants to erase it. and Duchamp’s silence. Agamben’s conclusion to the tale is a devastating and much overdue total foundering of the differentiation between form and thought. unpalatable masterpiece he says: “The quest for absolute meaning has devoured all meaning. The terrorist is left. 10).” (MWC. Returning to Rimbaud for a moment. or has the sign abolished the meaning?” (MWC. Gogol’s disappointment that Dead Souls did not liberate the peasants is matched by Mallarmé’s inability to complete Le Livre. . Yet. rhetoric and terror.MODERNITY. the more he has to concentrate on it to render it permeable to the inexpressible content he wants to express. Roussel’s collapse when La Doublure did not change the world. For what is the mystery we call Rimbaud if not the point where literature annexes its opposite. Fleeing from rhetoric leads him to terror. Such confusion over the source of the conflagration of art’s dwelling place. Speaking of Frenhofer’s ever-collapsing. in the very apotropaic hall of mirrors that is modern art. convert poiesis into fiat lux. isn’t the unknown masterpiece instead the masterpiece of Rhetoric? Has the meaning erased the sign. meaningless forms. Rimbaud’s flight from art. to survive. terror flings him back into rhetoric. But in the attempt. then. silence? Isn’t Rimbaud’s fame divided. allowing only signs. De Chirico’s self-parody. 10). and the appetite for signs becomes a cause of disgust. To truly exit literature one cannot make literature into a thing. “In order to leave the evanescent world of forms. which is the archetypal gesture of the modern artist: “But the paradox of the Terror is still present even in this extreme move. form. . as Blanchot rightly observed. agitated and enflamed. between ‘the poems that he wrote and those he did not deign to write?’” Agamben then 105 . But. Misology becomes philology. namely. he has no other means than form itself. the ultimate paradox is that the act of greatest terror is precisely that of aestheticoamputation. There are many famous examples of terrorism in modern art. a mere representation of the artist in art). Instead one can only escape the matter of art by removing it from oneself entirely. the repulsion from signs becomes an impossible attraction. set up by aesthetics. Agamben mentions Mallarmé’s statement that the only gesture available to this terrorist of poetry was to have poetry surgically removed from himself while he was alive.

Nietzsche’s Will to Power? What confers true genius on the modern artist is the very failure of terror in the pure silence of an absolute and thus truly terrifying rhetoric: the work of pure silence. Which is the greatest artist. most potently. decomposed. This is why Kafka casts such a shadow over Agamben’s work and the modern age as a whole.” As soon as one speaks of the creation of art one enters subjective negation. I mention this rhetorical flourish because it touches on the importance of the potential not to write that is the heart of the act of poiesis. becoming even kitsch? To paint absence is one thing.18 He sits. for what else have we been debating here? Not the loss of being through the semiotic necessity of its enunciation but through the enunciative necessity of the semiotic. at the very nexus between the terrorist become rhetorician and the rhetorician facing up to the terror of the absolute void. Bruno Schultz’s first novel. but surely the greatest works of modernism are those which were never created: Lautréamont’s third book.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN finally and fatally enquires: “isn’t this the masterpiece of rhetoric?” (MWC. ignored by his “friend” Brod. In their choice not to make they make their greatest masterpieces: the pure rhetoric of the semiotics of the absent sign which is the sign under which all modern art is composed. as Badiou shows. risk accusations of the obvious. 11). makes him the most pathetic and powerful of all modern artists: the man who sought silence and was thus then forced to speak. His decision to have all his works destroyed at his death. over time. There is no resisting dictation in the modern age. destroyed but. surely. This is the ultimate desubjectivization of the poet.17 does not the material depiction of silence. Even silence succumbs to speech it would seem. As soon as one actively pursues the negation of art one creates anew an art of negation as such. the final version of Le Livre. Rimbaud and Duchamp do not merely make and then choose not to make. the most eloquent rhetorician? Who has the most fiendish savour for violence and fear? While Malevich and (late) Beckett. manifest the very condition of acsesis as both testament to the lack of events and precursive preparation for the event to come. Consider the gesture we call author-function Rimbaud and Duchamp against those we call Malevich or Beckett. Will there ever be an end to art that is itself not a work of art but a pure experience of the poetic? 106 . never made. The way out of art into language is permanently barred by the very sign that indicates “Exit from Art.

Second it is a mere prosaic remnant of the poetic art that once dwelled among us. and Nietzsche. A choice lies before modern poiesis therefore. poiesis arrives. at the presentation of its own dissolution: the collapse of poetry into prose. democratic.19 and that this age is marked by its being the epoch of the end of art. the power of art over the spectator collapsed into profane secularization only to rise again in the form of shock rather than awe. It arrives precisely at the moment that prose as bios or social ethics has inundated all during the period of Western. the prosaic. The modern art work becomes a means of presenting that there was once art but now such work is at an end. at the moment that poiesis becomes available for full view to us for the first time since the Platonic occlusion. As Agamben shows in an extensive analysis of the history of the development of the museum from the ancient cabinet of wonder. that poetry is the archetypal art in that it exists between language (the sensible) and image (idea).MODERNITY. through four central tenets to Hegel’s overall aesthetic theory.20 The final element here is of greatest importance to aesthetic desubjectivization but this thesis makes little sense without all four elements of Hegelian proto-post-aesthetics. once the space of 107 . Enlightenment democracy. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS MODERN AESTHETIC DESUBJECTIVIZATION The Man Without Content is effectively a conversation between Agamben and the three fathers of modern aesthetics: Kant. at each level of Hegelian aesthetics modern art is denigrated. As one can see. aesthetic double-desubjectivization which may be the only means by which art under negation during modernity might result in some form of pro-ductive poiesis after modernity. Third its critical definition is also its negation. that we currently live in the age of prose. Hegel’s work is perhaps most central to Agamben’s reading of art under negation. to accept its tripartite collapse or to turn these failings around and form from them a new lieu commun. For Hegel modern art is a valorization of the sensible presentation of the idea. as it were. These are that art is the sensible presentation of the idea. and negation. First it is subordinate to the idea. courtesy of philosophy. art. or an art that celebrates subordination. Kant’s theory of aesthetic disinterested judgement and Nietzsche’s conception of an interested art emanating from a god-like creator bracket the work of Hegel together forming a theory of modern. As we have seen at some point or over time in Western culture. Hegel. This means that.

At this moment the work of poiesis enters the world of prose: The artist then experiences a radical tearing or split. which soars above the contents as over an immense repository of materials that it can evoke or reject at will. as it were. This is the very essence of art as transmissibility. 35) Contained in the vaunting rhetoric here of Agamben’s reading of Hegel are the various stages of his complex ideas on poetry and 108 . through exterior interiority. religion. The definition of modern art at the point of its cessation in Hegel comes from the moment when the material of the work of art is seen by the artist as material as such and as art as such. autonomous. and to the other the free subjectivity of the artistic principle. the poem. Art got one ready for god who in his turn prepared one for Geist. is revelatory in this regard. At this moment works of modern art are produced through the profanation of the relic into an art object already suffering auratic aphasia. by which the inert world of contents in their indifferent.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN display of a valued object changes and the object is placed under glass the relation of the spectator to the object also changes. Previous to that she had no direct selfconsciousness of material or making. For Hegel this scission within the subjectivity of the spectator is first enacted within that of the creator and transmitted. substantially. and does not need. secular shock. At the moment that the creator steps out of the transmissibility of cultural traditions her relation to her material changes. That Hegel placed art at the lowest level of the journey of the spirit from exteriority. In a very basic way this idealized act of creation was neither making something nor creating art as we moderns understand these terms. All of her acts were the result of her consciousness so that when she made something she made herself as a subject within a unified culture. contagiously through the art work. any content. or when the creator becomes critical spectator of their own work. because it can only measure itself against the vertigo caused by its own abyss.21 They no longer pause in front of the object in religious awe but are as if rooted to the spot or transfixed by pure. Art is now the absolute freedom that seeks its end and its foundation in itself. (MWC. rather the subject-artist simply presented in sensible form the idea of her communally held spirit within an exterior form as a necessary step towards a final interiorization. prosaic objectivity goes to one side.

as though its true object were not so much what art is but what it is not” (MWC. This shadow of art is the modern experience of 109 . At this point perhaps the greatest paradox of modern art comes into view as we float or plunge above the void of self-founding self-negation. Art is no longer measurable against culture as either being of the same standard or co-extensive. confounding common denominator. Freedom: defined here in a Nancyian manner as a nonfoundational self-founding. . so that the semantic is handed over to prose and meaning becomes the absence of meaning. Therefore. Height: the subjectivity of the artist is now defined as that of being above the territory of art’s dwelling on earth. Incommensurability: the much touted incommensurability of postmodernity hounded by Habermas in particular23 is surely simply an overstatement of the spatio-philosophical paradox of sublating negation that Agamben sets up here through his reading of Hegel.22 Contentless-ness: what the work of art now contains as content is the work of art as such. which is art as such defined by Agamben as art under erasure. floating in the sense that it both soars above and is endlessly falling away. universality apart from concepts. purposiveness without purpose. Central to the definitions of the object of aesthetic judgement as disinterested satisfaction. and normality without a norm “it seems . Prose: at this juncture the meaning of the work becomes subject to the prose of the world. or the moment at which the artist becomes her own spectator or the spectator becomes the judge of art. Summarizing the four characteristics of aesthetic judgement as Kant delineates them he finds a single. namely that of Kant. Agamben then turns to the very aesthetic system from which Hegel’s work emanates but also seeks to depart from. it holds in its hands not the beautiful but its shadow.MODERNITY. Modern art. PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS modern art. The work of art is moved from being encased in a continuum to floating within the void. is thus definable by a conglomeration of the following quasi-events. that every time aesthetic judgement attempts to determine what the beautiful is. 42). Scission: art is no longer defined through its place in the continuum but through its being excerpted from the continuum. Having set up Hegelian aesthetics as permanently under negation. Art becomes incommensurable in the moment that measuring art becomes possible through the Kantian discipline of criticism. . the only measure of art on earth is art itself. Materiality: the work becomes a commodity fetish or non-utilitarian choice of the object purely for the sake of exchange.

In finding the universal in the particular. 43). 6). . or of discovering natural beauty defined as finality without purpose (objective perfection without teleology). of understanding and reason. the tautegorical aesthetic shares in the weakness of this strength” (LAS. Considering Kant’s famous paradox that the judgement of taste is not based on concepts as it could be subject to proofs and yet that it must be based on concepts otherwise we would not quarrel about it (it would not in fact be taste). judgement merely operates between practical reason and understanding which is judgement’s famous heuristic capacity. . The tautegorical nature of reflective judgement is to be found in the relation of judgement to the sensation which. Reflective thinking 110 . which is the indication to thought that it is taking place. for us. or as Lyotard says: “The strength of reflective weakness can be explained by the heuristic function of reflection. . so to speak. The act of judgement produces the feeling of the activity of judgement. put simply. which is the quintessence of taste. The moment that we engage the faculty of judgement we are negating the very object we are judging. the only experience of art and also the first experience of art as a thing in itself. nothing can be known” (MWC. We can recognize in this concentration by Agamben on the paradox of judgement as a non-knowing concept parallels with Lyotard’s reading of reflective judgement as tautegorical. . Agamben then moves to Kant’s dictum that judgement is “a concept . 44). He thus concludes that “our appreciation of art begins necessarily with the forgetting of art” (MWC. This reading undermines the assumed legislative power of judgement and leaves it instead as a reflective faculty whose strength resides precisely in its legislative debilitation: because judgement cannot legislate it can supplement the contesting legislations. Agamben.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN inexperiencible art which is. is that judgement is the affect of the sensation of thinking. presents a critical synthesis of Kant and Hegel here to provide a model for creation (Hegel) and judgement (Kant) that is based on the commencement of the art object from the moment of its selfnegation. therefore. from which . In Lyotard’s remarkably detailed reading of the third critique he begins by telling the traditional story of Kant’s theory of judgement as the bridge between theoretical and practical knowledge. This led to a widespread acceptance of the term judgement as finding the universal in the particular based on the regulative idea of the finality of nature.

11). is the very person who commits art to the realm of dark non-art: “whenever he exercises his reflection. 45). Natural beauty does not require a regulative concept. appears to him no longer as a truth that finds its necessary expression in the work. or “once the work of art has been produced. Pure reflection is first and foremost the ability of thought to be immediately informed of its state by this state and without other means of measure than feeling itself ” (LAS. . Yet while judgement seems almost to blame for the end of art thesis. The person whose job it is to shed light on modern art. most powerful irony of modern aesthetics wherein the critic sees in the work of art the very contentless-ness that defines the subjectivity of the modern man without content. In contrast. that is. namely. and which therefore he can legitimately believe himself capable of expressing” (MWC. there is no way to return to it by way of the reverse path of taste” (MWC. . therefore. At this juncture. the free creative-formal principle of the artist” (MWC. “What he sees of himself in the work. but on the sensation of thinking thinking. Agamben identifies the central point of his thesis on modern art. The very self-presence of the spectator is the pre-condition of the work of 111 . PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS is. This scission submits all art to the law of the “degradation of artistic energy” which states that once one has passed judgement on a work of art. the spectator-critic. it is in fact the content-less nature of the modern work of art that results in perhaps the ultimate. the scission between genius and taste which defines aesthetic judgement and gives birth to modern criticism. he brings with him nonbeing and shadow” (MWC. Having established this fundamental quality of the tautegorical nature of critical judgement Agamben then differentiates judgements of taste from those of natural beauty in Kant. “one can never return to it from a state posterior to its creation”. indeed for Kant nature is the regulative concept for aesthetic beauty—the very thing Hegel takes issue with. not on thinking something. concepts that could be known. 47). 46).MODERNITY. the content he perceives. we do need a concept of what the work of artistic beauty should be “because the foundation of the work of art is something other than us. 46). Judgments of taste are based. therefore. thought’s thinking of itself as thinking through sensation: “Any act of thinking is thus accompanied by a feeling that signals to thought its ‘state. but rather as something of which he is already perfectly aware as a thinking subject.’ But this state is nothing other than the feeling that signals it .

being-for-itself has as its object its own being-for-itself. What we can conclude from aesthetic modern contentlessness is that the moment the spectator and the artist become two separate entities (the archetypal event of modern aesthetic metaphysical scission) ironically the artist no longer has anything new to say to the spectator for the spectator was party to the very scission that facilitated the shift from art to nonart that the artist thought they had created ex nihilo. existing in both positions without any means of bringing the two together again. The annihilation of content may be familiar. The presence of the critic makes possible modern art. and at the same time immediately as itself. it belongs with them. being-as-nonnart but not being art. perverts any relationship between the genius of creation and the communality of culture. as Agamben says both absolutely Other and immediately itself. it is the pure split and lack of foundation that endlessly drifts on the ocean of form without ever reaching dry land” (MWC. and agrees to enter the circle of absolute perversion. at the same time the spectator is by definition not the artist. The result of this on all of us is devastating: “In the aesthetic judgement. they are of course part of what makes it possible. The pure creative principle results in the alienation of art and the critic not only recognizes this theme-less theme. There is nothing the artist can teach the spectator. desubjectivized being of the critic/spectator : If the spectator consents to the radical alienation of this experience. is the very basis of his theory of the potentially productive nature of the historically contingent. and yet what they know is what they can never be. he has no other way of finding himself again than wholly to assume his contradiction. What they see in the work of art is what they already know. The subject of judgement finds itself both subject and predicate of their judgement. The genius makes art. leaves behind all support. but the critic cannot share in it. but as something absolutely Other. but the critic does not make modern art placing them/us in a doubly untenable position. 48). That is. The critic identifies her being in the alienation of the work which rejects or. the critic knows all.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN art without content. but there is one simple fact separating the two. Agamben’s explanation of this double negation. Yet. the critic cannot. to use Hegel’s term. Thus the alienation of art is their subject. he must split 112 .

54). Of the creative. the artist is always living on what he calls “this side of his essence . If she places her faith in a specific content she realizes she is lying as her own pure subjectivity is everything. and in owning himself he alienates himself. 54) Such a dire conundrum strands the artistic subject in a doubly desubjectivizing quandary. Thus the modern artistic subject can be defined as a radical split. Having dealt with one half of modern aesthetic desubjectivization. . Which annihilates and dissolves every content in its continuous effort to transcend and actualize itself. In this alienation he owns himself. Yet. however. to live the epoch or to live outside of it. for which all subject matter is indifferent. there is no escaping the fact that. (MWC. without content. however. Hence Agamben’s conclusion: “The artist is the 113 . . “outside of this split. he cannot neglect the other half: artist as god-like creator. (MWC. Yet even if one chooses to live the split. the heroic modern artist. if she then embraces pure subjectivity and ceases to seek for content she finds herself embracing her subjective inessence: “content in what is mere form” (MWC. the pure creative-formal principle. negate his own negation .MODERNITY. 55). . for Agamben at least. and Agamben here names Rimbaud and Artaud as exemplary in this regard. 55). split from any content. which is the subjective position all but of a few of us occupy in front of the art work (perhaps indeed all as in modernity even the artist becomes spectator to their own poiesis) is akin to that described by Hegel as the selfannihilating nothing of Romantic Irony. is the absolute abstract inessence. Nietzschean genius he says: What the artist experiences in the work of art is. 54). PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS asunder his own split. in fact. that artistic subjectivity is absolute essence. can attempt to totally inhabit the split and try to live this violence. Yet here Agamben takes on critical desubjectivization and proposes at least a desire to convert ontological negation into a productive category. Faced with this alternative. everything is a lie” (MWC. beside his reality” (MWC. . 48) The position of the modern spectator. “trying to make of the split that inhabits him the fundamental experience starting from which a new human station becomes possible” (MWC.

. or all form without content. modern art. in accordance with Benjamin’s hermeneutic principle.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN man without content. as is indeed. For Agamben. perhaps predictably. the critic/spectator and the artist are both examples of self-annihilating nothings.can result in a productive category hinted at in the terms of such a double negative: modern nonart as the potential for an exit from art into a futural and sustainable poiesis. And finally third. for the very first time. Yet. thoughts about art.” (MWC. 114 . and certainly there is no greater negation than self-annihilating nothingness. Either art is pure content without form. modern art presents us with the most credible and challenging model of “poetic” desubjectivization as a solution to the failings of nihilistic ontology. . Second in revealing the structural interdependence of philosophy and poetry in this process: formless thought or contentless form. 55). are as pure subjective inessence. Modern aesthetic double desubjectivization provides us with a prototype for the following three propositions in Agamben’s overall system. most significantly in a manner only hinted at in the pages of The Man Without Content but which comes to full fruition over the intervening decades. The critic possesses knowledge of an entity they have no experience of and the artist experiences a process of which they can have no knowledge. who has no other identity than a perpetual emerging out of the nothingness of expression . critically. as if for the first time. First as an example of poeticized desubjectivization. Modern art is art that is under negation through the act of coming to view. It opens up to us the importance of tradition and transmissibility which we now see. Here one can see the importance of aesthetic modernity to Agamben’s wider philosophical project.24 The end of art as art results in a double desubjectivization. how negation as such. This has various benefits of course.


This page intentionally left blank .

they must accept and actively live through. and by their occlusion of the fact that their inter-division is a false divide which. Such a di-thetic approach runs the risk of being doubly unpopular in that for those who believe Agamben to be a philosopher or. And so I present for general perusal and 117 . The tension between the philosophical and the literary in Agamben is the central animator of his whole intra-metaphysical. novels. more pointedly. THINKING TAUTOLOGY The title of this volume proposes a compound construction or double thesis. and the visual arts is merely as a means of approaching a post-nihilistic metaphysics. For reasons which I believe now are more than apparent it is not possible to overview the work of Agamben without accepting that his project will always resist being reducible to one side of the ancient division philosophy–poetry. expropriating appropriative methodology.CHAPTER 4 LOGOPOIESIS. thinker requires a compound and demonstrative term to present these tonal issues. the happy few who have come to understand that Agamben is one of the greatest thinkers of the arts in our tradition may be dismayed at the suggestion that all his talk of poetry. or as we will come to see him comparative. however. that Agamben is “literary” and that the literary Agamben opens up a clearing around thinking through poetry/ poiesis that I am calling logopoiesis. a political philosopher. This cannot be helped. an ancient by-way thicketed by prejudice. Neither a thinker of philosophy nor poetry alone and unable to succumb to any of the traditional modes of thinking division. the compound. while at the same time striving to reveal how both traditions first fail to lift thinking out of negation by virtue of their being subsumed by scission. my suggestion that no understanding of Agamben’s indifferent ontology is possible without recourse to the literary might even seem frivolous. At the same time.

thinkers who accept the centrality of Heidegger but also look to poetry as a way beyond his ontology. 20). and poiesis. I do not intend here to establish a strict canon as logopoiesis is still in its nascent stages and presented here as little more than a provocative. which is why logos and poiesis alone are not sufficient designations even if. as is now apparent. like Heidegger before him. or not solely. would include Jean-Luc Nancy. it does not accurately reflect the sophistication and tensile balance I intend to convey in the term logopoiesis. beyond stating that it was the later work of Heidegger and its emphasis on poetry and poetic thinking that commenced the tradition that was able “to hand philosophy over to poetry” as Badiou states it (MP. A fully worked out vision of logopoiesis would require detailed reading of all their work in conjunction with that of Agamben. Other contemporary logopoietic thinkers therefore. There may be others. nor is it a type of poetry that thinks. I will not here present a history of logopoiesis. Agamben proposes various names for this alternate or “new” form of thinking. and some comments would be reserved for the work of Deleuze.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN perhaps initial scepticism or even weary derision my theory of logo-poiesis. Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe and. The simplest definition of such poetic thinking is a turn to poetry to assist thinking to overcome the aporias of modern thought. 74). While this gesture is important and marks the roots of the term in the work of Heidegger. or thinking through making. any designation of thought that hands over thinking either to philosophy or poetry is not properly “poetic” thinking but is in fact metaphysical thinking about poetry. we are now in a position to propose logopoiesis as not merely a viable compound term but more significantly as a complementary coupling or comparative tonality. one which thinks the very basis of thinking as such in the pure mediality of language the most 118 . Having now dealt in some detail with logos. As we have seen. for Agamben at least thought is or must be poeticized and poiesis is a mode of material thinking. convenient possibility. Jacques Derrida. as we saw. Poetic thinking is not thinking about poetry. Badiou is also a great logopoietic thinker of course and he. indeed the inserts into such a narrative are sparse and inconclusive. or not entirely. or thinking thought as such. While. uses the term “poetic thinking” to describe the centrality of poiesis to a new form of thinking that exceeds that of Heidegger in some fashion (HI. perhaps more contentiously. One would not want to neglect Blanchot in this regard also.

Poetic thinking ultimately stresses a form of thinking that relies on and appropriates poetry. The definition of the terms in play. It first came to the fore as a term for a thinking poetry in Pound’s ABC of Reading in contrast to melopoiesis or the poetry of pure semiosis. much debated and contested terms is unwise. One term will naturally seek dominance over the other. Thus logopoiesis is essentially tautological in essence. and how indeed two terms can be placed in relation to each other simply by spatio-linguistic proximity are all issues to be taken rather seriously. however. Heidegger tells us. None of the thinkers I have mentioned do so. Certainly he does not use the term logopoiesis. and neglects the possibility of a poetry that thinks.2 As such “poetic thinking” is destined to be a problematic and misleading designation whereas logopoiesis presents a balance between the philosophical and poetic elements of such modes of thinking even if the harmony is an uneasy one.” which would be the translation of logopoiesis. as its novelty resides in the manner in which something original has been totally forgotten and then rediscovered centuries later). For this reason. As should be the effect on both terms when placed in a zone of bound proximity. 119 . he does not hone in on one particular name or ever actually advocate a “poetic thinking” at all. One cannot blithely produce neologisms and not expect certain repercussions. Yet logopoiesis is not a neologism. The dangers are heightened further when it comes to the combination of two terms such as logos and poiesis which.1 While sporadically mentioned by critics. especially considering the dangers of duality inherent within our tradition. I have opted for the more obscure but also productively suggestive term. a full understanding of categorical thinking and the problems of naming. witness Halliburton’s book on Heidegger of the same name. balanced proximity giving way to a hierarchical topography and so on. has found significant currency within philosophy. Poetic thinking it could be logopoiesis it is. essentially name the same process of bringing to appearance. and the fact that poetic thinking really names a form of philosophy that considers poetry.LOGOPOIESIS. THINKING TAUTOLOGY authentic experience of which is the poetic word (I hesitate to call it new. logopoiesis has not come to be a developed rhetorical or critical term. THE LOGO-POIESIS TAUTOLOGY The creation of a compound term out of two ancient. In contrast “poetic thinking.

Yet the means by which poiesis does this differ from those of logos. which effectively means speech. Appearance. has come to be translated/interpreted variously as reason. to discover them” (BT. and so on. therefore. Therefore the fact that logos can simultaneously mean mediation and knowledge is revealed not as a possibility but in fact a necessity (it also negates once and for all the misconception that Heidegger is a thinker of revelation. 22). 29). How. 26).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Heidegger explains that for the Greeks the term logos. the manifest” (BT. poiesis makes something manifest to appearance that was not manifest before. quite the contrary he is a thinker of obfuscation). presuppositional philosophical thought? The answer he gives is that logos really means deloun or to make manifest what is being talked about in speech. If we now return briefly to Heidegger’s foundational work on the term poiesis. makes logos and poiesis appear as synonymous and thus the term logopoiesis as tautological. The knowledge generating powers of logos as reason. meaning something that shows itself to indicate something else that does not show itself. but what does it mean to make something appear and how is this affected by mediation through language? Heidegger believes that the term appearance in the context of “what shows itself. and relation. 25) must be interpreted effectively as a symptom. its definition as presencing. to let them be seen as something unconcealed (alēthes). Heidegger specifically defines the bringing-forth of poiesis as producing something into presence. 120 . Thus logos is definable as making something appear in speech. judgement. Logos makes appear something in precisely this way: “to take things that are being talked about in legein as apophainethai out of their concealment. relation. “does not mean that something shows itself. rather it means that something makes itself known which does not show itself. Like logos. can speech be speech and also mean all of these other things that effectively form the very basis of discursive. rely on the mediation of speech: making something appear which is hidden and remains so. definition. judgement. concept. bringing forth. concept. the self-showing. he ponders. Logos means speech as a means of bringing something out of concealment and making it appear not as the thing as such but as the concealed thing. ground. It makes itself known through something that does show itself ” (BT. This is facilitated by the root of logos being Legein or the making present of something: “the simple apprehension of something objectively present in its pure objective presence” (BT.

making. . one makes is not the thing produced by poiesis.” (QCT. Yet to do so runs the risk of obfuscating the truth that logopoiesis is essentially a form of tautological circular thinking. therefore. 121 . . 29). Most certainly thinking and poetry produce truth in a different manner. is that in philosophy truths are produced through the support of linguistic mediation. rather in making something poiesis brings something that was hidden to presence. production as instrumentality which he terms challenging-forth. Enframed techne produces something to the dictates of the age in which it is produced. Techne is the active process of bringing something to presence through making. This difference becomes clearer if we re-consider the role of production or techne in relation to presencing. but ultimately logopoiesis says the same thing twice: the production of truth—the production of truth. It could also be accused of using speech instrumentally as a form of Gestell. THINKING TAUTOLOGY whereas logos mediates presencing. which he also translates as presencing.LOGOPOIESIS. while in poiesis they are produced through making. apportions itself into the revealing that brings forth and that also challenges . Gestell is instrumental and pre-ordained production. while free techne or poiesis exceeds the frame and produces freed thinking. To sum up. Perhaps it is more illuminating to write the tautology out thus: (logos) the truth of production—(poiesis) the production of truth. while poiesis means producing something into presence through the act of making. Yet in later Heidegger the emphasis has changed. he differentiates two forms of producing forth. Thus logos means making something manifest through the mediation of speech. logo-poiesis is primarily tautological as both logos and poiesis are mediating modes of producing truth. The difference between philosophical and poetic thinking. When one makes something the actual thing. and could indeed use another form of mediation. Truth is now produced into presence by virtue of techne. Here language is merely symptomatic of truth. What is important here in early Heidegger is simply that the mediation indicates that the production of truth is not the production of a thing as such but of truth’s appearance as something concealed. Yet logos merely utilizes speech as a mediation. As Heidegger’s work progresses and he becomes convinced of the restrictions of producing based around enframing (Gestell) or a predisposition within production that forces techne to serve pre-ordained dictates rather than facilitate free appearing. while poiesis is that form of revealing that “ever so suddenly and inexplicably to all thinking.

as I said. These experiments do not simply concern the truth or falsity of hypotheses . “Bartleby. 260). to recognize the Being of something as something” (P. it disallows philosophy or poetry to totally appropriate the term. I would also call this an archetypal definition of logopoiesis: a form of thinking that is without truthfulness. Glenn Gould’s playing with not-playing. First. rather. 122 . as we shall now go on to see.” Here he speaks of the prose of Robert Walser which the critic Walter Lüssi called “pure poetry” because it “refuses in the widest sense. before or beyond its determination as true or false.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN The tautology of the term is relevant for several reasons and thus must be retained. Akhmatova’s ability not to write and Benjamin’s Idea of Prose are all. 174 respectively) and indeed the centrality of the hermeneutic circle. tautology names the specificity. perhaps indeed singularity of the projectiverecursive circular mode of thinking that is the quintessence of logopoietic thinking—itself a tautology we can now dispense with as logopoiesis names a modality of thought—and which. . or On Contingency. emulating as it does Heidegger’s own late tautological style in such formulations as the “language itself is language” and a thing’s thinging (See PLT. tautology is true to the Heideggerian roots of the conception. for truth is what is at issue in them” (P. models for logopoiesis. in their way.” He then proceeds to explain: “Not only science but also poetry and thinking conduct experiments. Such a truth resides in the fact that there is language as pure medium. the most profound experience of which belongs. it touches on the debate as regards the tautegorical nature of logopoiesis. Agamben declares that this ought to be the “paradigm for literary writing. 260). Damascius’ consciousness of the tablet. Second. Finally. at the same time. we are repeatedly assured. is inimical to philosophical thought. with the poets. but which produces truth as the very precondition for thinking. they call into question Being itself. THE EXEMPLARY TAUTOLOGY OF LOGOPOIESIS We have already seen some examples of logopoietic thinking. it cannot be proved right or wrong by testing it for agreement in relation to concepts or things in the world. Third. 190 and OWL. These experiences are without truth. Perhaps it would be useful here to adumbrate a few more examples provided by Agamben in that central essay in the canon of logopoiesis. .

if I may but temporarily coin that rather horrendous-sounding neologism. all logopoiesis produces life out of desubjectivization or. and potential. That Agamben uses precisely the same phrase when explaining that the importance of poetry is that it produces life (EP. as we saw. 260). All poetic thinking.LOGOPOIESIS. This is what Agamben calls the “irreducibility of his ‘I would 123 . THINKING TAUTOLOGY Agamben then goes on to list a history. power.3 Agamben stresses that Bartleby’s experiment with being and potential is of this kind. He is a scrivener. being. he ends with Heidegger. Speaking of these notable poietic experiments with existence he says: “Whoever submits himself to these experiments jeopardizes not so much the truth of his own statements as the very mode of his existence. of remarkable logopoietic thinkers. and most significantly. 94) indicates how integral in actuality is his vision of thinking and poetry. 93). the only experiment to be conducted by logo-poets. He describes Condillac’s introduction of a statue to the sense of smell and Dante’s desubjectification of the “I” of the poet into the third person. but as we saw desubjectivization is a central tenet in Agamben’s conception of the relevancy of poetry to philosophy and being. He is a scrivener. This is not. this is his form of life. I believe. but when asked to copy or write by his boss he replies that he would “prefer not to. he undergoes an anthropological change that is just as decisive in the context of the individual’s natural history as the liberation of the hand by the erect position was for the primate or as was. who “replaces the physical ‘I’ with an empty and inessential being that is only its own ways of Being and has possibility only in the impossible” (P. Rather he does not want to. but a scrivener whose potential never arrives at actualization. He remains a scrivener with the potential to write mimetically. the transformation of limbs that changed it into a bird” (P. Of course he then recounts Rimbaud’s declaration “I is another” alongside Kleist’s use of the marionette as paradigm for the absolute.” He speaks of Cavalcanti’s description of the poetic experience of being like an automaton. the father of logopoiesis. He mentions Avicenna’s imagining of an eviscerated and dismembered being that can still state “I am. Each of these thinkers conducts an experiment in being which we should now recognize as that of desubjectivization.” Here he experiments with issues of will. 260). for the reptile. Finally. the moment when the subject “withdraws from both the lived experience of the psychosomatic individual and the biological unsayability of the species” (EP. effectively. It is not that he cannot copy.

“Emancipating itself from Being and non-Being alike.” poetry thrives on it. Potential shares with tautology the same truth-testing aporetic base in that its truth cannot be appraised not because it is always true but because it constitutes the very experiment or test of truth. he argues. Bartleby’s ontology of unfulfilled potential can not be submitted to truth conditions not because it is always true but because it is simultaneously true and not true. are somewhat dissatisfying. between potential absoluta and potential ordinate. he would simply prefer not to. form-of-life (HS. or better.” It is not that he does not want to copy. as Keats demonstrates in the final line of “Ode on a Grecian Urn. For a start Melville’s story seems to merely recount the conditions of potential in an allegorical or analogous form. 255). as all illustrations are. Logopoiesis therefore must be a construction dependent on the logic of potentiality as Agamben finesses it. The ontology of potentiality can also be termed that of logopoiesis confirmed by Agamben’s subsequent comments on the relation of the Bartleby’s formula to tautology “a proposition that is impenetrable to truth conditions on account of always being true” (P. In the end there is little difference between this presentation of truth 124 . It is the formula of potentiality” (P. Such a process is in effect heuristically tautegorical in that one can only attest to the truth of its taking place through the sense of its taking place or not taking place. Philosophy cannot abide the tautology. 259). “The formula that he so obstinately repeats destroys all possibility of constructing a relation between being able and being willing. A tautology is a form of thinking whose truth cannot be tested because it is always true. but. 261). another name Agamben gives to this ontology is life. 188). Agamben goes on to describe how the green screen (another version of the tablet perhaps) that isolates Bartleby’s desk “traces the borders of an experimental laboratory” wherein the scrivener who can copy but chooses not to frees himself from the principle of reason: either one is a scrivener and one copies or one is not and does not.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN prefer not to’. potentiality thus creates its own ontology” (P.4 INFINITE POETRY While illustrative these examples. Logopoiesis is a truth-testing tautology that can only occur outside the realms of philosophy. In that this ontology withdraws subjectivity from actual identity and biological indistinction. Similarly.

While the use of deixis is fascinating Agamben rightly asks what we can learn of the poem’s reliance on deixis as indicating the instance of discourse. This is best illustrated by the centrality he gives to poetry in Language and Death. and back again. Narrative. that moves beyond what we have already learnt of deixis from other sources. of merely allegorizing literature in the service of philosophy.” Author-function Leopardi is then struck by a sense of “interminable spaces” in the distant beyond. He notes the deictic “this” is repeated six times in the poem’s fifteen lines. absolute silence and “the living presence and its sound” the poet is overwhelmed: “And so / in this immensity my thought is drowned: / and in this sea is foundering sweet to me. faced with the “immensity” of both infinite space and infinite time. indeed. which it undoubtedly does in the poem. / and this hedgerow that hides from view / so large a part of the remote horizon. and dialogue have all been used by philosophy to make a point.” Naturally.” with “this hedgerow” becoming converted later into “that. “L’infinito” begins: “This lonely knoll was ever dear to me. as some have of Heidegger and Badiou.LOGOPOIESIS. in particular his reading of Leopardi’s poem “L’infinito” proceeding directly out of the analysis of the troubadours’ noble if failed attempt to think the place of language as such—the ultimate logopoietic adventure for Agamben I would suspect. always conceives of the sense-certainty assumed by the “this” as always already “universal and negative. This is logopoiesis in its weakest state.” so that while we may assume that Leopardi did 125 . along with an interesting interchange between “this” and “that.”6 Agamben’s analysis begins in technicalities which indicate the sincere philologer within him. And how.” moving one from proximity to distance. like Hegel. the impersonal genius of the wind interjects and “I find myself comparing to this voice / that infinite silence: and I recall eternity. specificity to generality. Yet Agamben is not to be accused. marked by “supernatural silences. THINKING TAUTOLOGY and that found in Plato’s dialogues or the fabulous Nietzsche.5 His is a truly engaged logopoiesis that gives as much attention to the operations of poetic thinking as to philosophical thought processes.” At this point. poetry. is this specific use of deixis singular to the poem when innumerable poems use the same technique? Agamben believes that Leopardi. most specifically the circular tautological nature of thinking under the auspices of logopoiesis.

” and then “this” for “that” suggests that. like the poet himself. first as regards the now fully fleshed-out conception of dictation. that the procedure of author-function becoming reader-function. in other words where and how poetry thinks? First. referentiality in poetry is always already moving away from reference to an actual thing towards 126 . the hedgerow. and third how poetic thinking differs totally from that of philosophy. Previously. in such a way. is modified to become the more vague and distant “that. already referentially deficient but still intimate. and the wind in the poem have immediately moved beyond referentiality to an existential fact. Agamben’s use of prose was illustrative. Poetic language takes place in such a way that its advent always already escapes both toward the future and toward the past. and into other realms of generality. converting with haste Leopardi the existent-being into Leopardi the author-function gesture. also converts the ontic object of the text as such into mere text-function. (LD. in the instance of discourse that the habitual use of deixis indicates. In the Leopardian idyll. 76) Although a consideration of one short lyric this is also an observation of great significance. and rhythm work. The place of poetry is therefore always a place of memory and repetition. he is immediately transforming the sense-certainty of the poem into a set of universal qualities revealing. I believe. however. serving as the basis for the possibility of its infinite repetition. here his analysis of poetry is exemplary and paradigmatic. More precisely the instance of discourse is assigned to memory from the very beginning. he believes. the “this” points always already beyond the hedgerow. beyond the last horizon. the knoll. What are these qualities that typify the place of poetry.” The rapidity and alacrity with which the poet abandons a noun for “this. This. toward an infinity of events of language.7 He is reading a poem by Leopardi but. reducing both subjectivities to mere gesturality. that the memorable is the very ungraspability of the instance of discourse as such (and not simply an instance of discourse determined historically and spatially). as in the Hegelian analysis of sense-certainty. second as to how poetic structure. a That).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN once perceive a knoll in his home town of Recanati. is indicated for example by how soon the “this” in the poem. reference. here the This is always already a Not-this (a universal.

therefore.” There was a knoll but in the poem there is no knoll. that the taking place of language is unspeakable and ungraspable. or has always already been converted from singular event to universal quality. this allows Agamben to make a truly profound revelation as to the nature of poetic structure. Finally. At this point the poem shifts from being a specific instance of discourse to the truth of discursive ungraspability ceasing to be singular in becoming general. the uncertainties of memory down by the station early in the morning. The poem. The poem deals with a truth that is always already in place before the poet ever even wanders lonely as a cloud. Third. to a universal precondition of experience as such. poetic referentiality is always marked by a belatedness transferring all poetic temporality into memorialization. Although the lived experience always precedes the act of mimesis in our tradition. fourth. the fiction of the razo creates lived experience simply to support the event of writing a poem that is long past. a gesture conjured up to support to presence of the poem as such (LD. THINKING TAUTOLOGY the thing first standing for something else and then finally an indication of the thing of language as such. they have already entered into a field of repetition. and thus available for perpetual repetition.” located as it is beyond the knoll in 127 . something singular to the poet. a poem is therefore always profoundly evental. is truly an event in that it negates the very possibility of its ever occupying this space and being termed as such. Second. as the object referred to in the poem is the very ungraspability of existential reality the poem is quickly transferred from a specific description of a lived reality. the poietic poem. or conceptually through such considerations of space and time that we find in “L’infinito. A poem can never be an event. Reference in poetry therefore is always an indication of the taking place of language either in actuality through use of heightened semiotic devices. This invention of an encounter or happening is in fact an act of false memory. there was a solitary reaper but in the poem she has already fled. He says that the poem “expresses the same experience which we saw as constitutive of philosophy itself. Agamben’s first conclusion from this astonishing reading is itself somewhat predictable but essential all the same. there was a Grecian urn but in the poem there is no Grecian urn. namely. The event as such is either always already prepared for. frog-spawn. Its advent is both pre-cursive and reflective. universal. This is a point he also makes in reference to the razo de trobar.LOGOPOIESIS. 69). and yet as soon as the poet encounters daffodils.

This element is what he calls here poetry’s “super-shifter . Thus literature can get there first. in all poetry even contemporary mainstream free verse and experimental poetics.8 As Agamben says in response to this obvious yet seemingly invisible fact: The metrical-musical element demonstrates first of all the verse as a place of memory and repetition. if philosophy has already indicated this surely all that is left for poetry is to back philosophy up. . 77). For a start Agamben excitedly notes in relation to Bartleby that Melville’s observations on will precede those of Nietzsche by three decades. Thus he is able to conclude in a phrase of some significance to my own theory of logopoiesis: “The poetic experience of dictation seems. and that the instance of the word that takes place in a poem is. that they will return again. from verto. The utilization of metrical forms in poetry.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN interminable silence (LD. Its role as a functioning meta-deixis although not often enough remarked upon is central to the literary experience as a whole. to coincide perfectly with the philosophical experience of language” (LD. although in later studies he refers to it as the semiotic. as opposed to prorsus. That said if philosophy is marked by language as negation then poetry too cannot escape this metaphysical nihilism. is an essential part of poetry. Agamben’s definition of language’s sayability as pure medium being perpetually silenced by the instance of the Voice. to proceed directly. thus. 77). 77). 77). the act of turning. This is no more the case than in the poem which demands to be read then re-read. taking place in time. In addition. The verse (versus. the metrical-musical element” (LD. However the true significance of poetry is not that of winning a metaphysical race but lies elsewhere in the semiotic element of verse that philosophy simply cannot match. Poetry and philosophy are most certainly linked in terms of how they think language. as in prose) signals for a reader that these words have always already come to be. for this reason. There are blessings and curses to be gleaned from this analysis. to return. This is. Well. 128 . Literature points to itself as an instance of discourse not merely when it plays games with reference and deixis but as soon as it takes place as a work. not quite. He adds: “The word. . weaving a complex planar and tabular matrix of anaphoric and cataphoric elements that are the essence of its form. of course. comes about in such as way that its advent necessarily remains unsaid in that which is said” (LD.

THE HABITS OF THE MUSE Agamben’s conclusion to his reading of Leopardi is complex and subtle. philosophical discourse cannot. the unattainable). lineation. poetry seems to prepare a portal through which one could emerge into a post-nihilistic world or word that philosophy does not have at its disposal. indeed. This is not the solution to our metaphysical problems. but the commencement of a possible shift away from the aporias of both logos and poiesis. modern poetic dictation is just as marked by negation as modern philosophical thinking. and while my formulation of logopoiesis advocates 129 . however. where poetry thinks. structure. in what I have called logopoiesis. THINKING TAUTOLOGY ungraspable. Does it not. Philosophy’s prose proceeds but poetry’s verse returns and this constitutes their essential difference. remain unclear in the detail as to why poetry’s reliance on semiotic repetition is able to potentially save the whole of Western metaphysics? I would suggest so.LOGOPOIESIS. You will recall that although poetry and philosophy both share as their object the unattainability of language as such. counting as one of the most profound reflections on the literary ever penned in any language at any time. philosophy and poetry. finally. poetic language commemorates its own inaccessible originary place and it says the unspeakability of the event of language (it attains. in poetry the unattainable is its very essence. reference and. no quick solution to this problem. (LD. it performs or at least demonstrates that the very place of poetry. As the poem is always already in place before you even come upon it. he believes. 78) This is the essence of the nature of poetry for Agamben. Thus the poem is able to take possession of the unattainable as the positive basis for its own self-generation. Through the musical element. This is prosody as such or poetry’s reliance on repetition in terms of stress. that is. is by definition a placeless one. This allows poetry to take possession of language’s unattainability in a way. There is. and has always already taken place and then begun again before you even get to the end. sound. While philosophy is able to speak of the unspeakable giving us insight into negativity but no means of overcoming it. which is something philosophical language can never do unless it becomes poeticized. But this placelessness has a place to be found in prosody itself.

the poem form is dominated by the advent-finitude tabular matrix. Consider rhyme as a simple example of this. its advent. although always there in the metricalmusical element. This is the place of poetic thinking. is. the use of “this. This is not unique to this poem. Just as the poem never ends always returning our attention back to that first line. is also referred to directly by the first line of the poem which in Italian reads: “Sempre caro mi fu quest’ermo colle. turning. Thus he defines the roots of always as meaning “once and for all. The first rhyme already recalls the second. In “L’infinito” the habitual.” Here always. novels. “was ever dear to me” and “sweet to me. He thinks he finds this at the end of the poem where the poet admits his thought is drowned in the immensity of the unattainable before adding the proviso: “and in this sea is foundering sweet to me. placed at the head of the poem composing the poem’s advent word from which the verse is launched as always already being in place. it never begins either commencing always on “always.” Two elements at the poem’s end recall. He then suggests: “The sempre that opens the idyll thus points 130 . going backwards to go forwards. symphonies.” Agamben traces the etymology of sempre to the Latin semper which he first fractures into two elements. so many the Indo-European word for single. if one is always proceeding and returning? One never is. Second. Every couplet is in miniature the ontological potential of the poem to save thought. For now we must satisfy ourselves with Agamben’s final point in relation to “L’infinito” as regards what might be called poetic habit. sempre. and films recall their commencement in their ending. When is one ever in the poem spatially or temporally. All that Agamben is really looking for is an honest experience of linguistic/ontological unattainability or the definition of poeticphilosophical being as by definition the unattainable.” “This lonely knoll” and “this sea. sem-per. The poem proceeds through verse.” and the emphasis on dearness/sweetness.” a common enough construction of the experience of the always. the second harks back to the first. an adventure indeed.” This in fact is not a remarkable observation. the habit of its reversal. First. unlike in the English translation.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN this productive position for literature I cannot say at this point that call it anything more than a projection on my part. its restless habitus. for Agamben. combined with a positive potential. progressing only to refer back. of which he finds the sem.

fully experiencing the unattainable of the place of language. a having (habitus) that unifies (once) a multiplicity (all times): the having ever dear this knoll” (LD. The singular cannot be attained except through its being named in language. it represents the initial sempre as an interminable multiplicity . as is ever the case at least since Plato’s time. THINKING TAUTOLOGY toward a habit. In trying to inhabit the experience of the knoll. invention in Derrida. Yet in a later poem. to occupy its singular once-ness for all time indicated in the “this. . the perpetual place of always. by the poet’s trying to haveever-dear the experience of the knoll. Agamben’s second conclusion on the poem therefore is as follows: “The experience at stake in the idyll is thus the breaking apart of a habit. 80). 131 . Yet we know that in trying to have the knoll the poet is instead cast into the interminable space that dismays his heart. Agamben believes this change in situation as regards thought is dramatized in “L’infinito” through the figure of drowning: “Thought drowns in that about which it thinks: the unattainable taking place of language. 80). . Habit cedes to a thought that ‘feigns’. because it leads into the heart of the Same. seeks to think. yet the process of being named is the very thing that robs any event of singularity for the name allows the event to be reiterated and transmitted through space and time. the rupturing of a habitual dwelling into a ‘surprise’ . This is in a way a restatement of the logic of the name in Heidegger. to hold this unattainability in suspense. 80–1). . “Il pensiero dominante” he seems to embrace thinking which. The thought is a movement that. to measure its dimensions” (LD. 79).” the poet instead founders in the multiplicity of potential experiences of the knoll. Poetry. . This “voyage” taken in the poem is “truly more brief than any time or measure. Agamben now rereads the whole poem as an attempt to seize the habitual. It departs from a habit and returns to the same habit” (LD. although dominating is also sweet. cedes to thought its sovereign power in affairs of the mind but is wrong to do so. here. the that of the knoll or its endless repetition through its prophylactic and transmissible encounter in poetic language.LOGOPOIESIS. will even kill him if he is unable to change his situation. the habitual dwelling with which the idyll began” (LD. But the drowning of thought in ‘this’ sea now permits a return to the ‘ever dear’ of the first line. and the event in Badiou. This is perhaps why in an early letter Leopardi writes of the way in which thought makes him unhappy.9 that is.

Both seek to grasp that original. “so that it necessarily escapes whoever tries to speak it” (LD. Agamben’s reading goes even further than this however: “The ‘confrontation’ that has always been under way between poetry and philosophy is. 78). in the Ion. Muse. he sees a rival to his claim for thought’s sovereignty. its utter. that it says nothing of worth. inaccessible place of the word. the circular structural basis of all logopoiesis. nothing new. in a nutshell. is the highest stake” (LD. Wildean. which. the circular journey immortalized by The Odyssey becoming a foundational recursive and tautological structure of so much Western art to follow. 78). In that “philosophy too experiences the place of language as its supreme problem (the problem of being)” (LD. a project of which I think we can say Heidegger is the greatest master. 78).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN In contrast to our previous definition of thought as that which takes measure of the dimensions of the unattainable. Use of the poetic word in fact is an expropriated appropriation in that one is possessed by the muse. The circular journey to nowhere brings to the fore the darkness of the poem. that it takes us nowhere. Agamben believes philosophy was born out of the very need to 132 . nothing that can be tested as being true in terms of agreement or reasoning. Here. and instead of appreciating filiation. is responsible for giving the poetic word the character of being an eurema Moisan or invention of the muses. 78). Plato. just sails around. much more than a simple rivalry. one encounters Plato’s problem with poetry as identified by Lacoue-Labarthe in his recent response to Badiou’s critique of his work on poiesis: competition. Agamben believes Plato is correct in his calling philosophy supreme music and its muse the true muse. is the name the Greeks gave to the “ungraspability of the originary place of the poetic word” (LD. amity. therefore. thus. 78). spoken by it. he claims.10 Plato sees the community between poetry and philosophy. Periplus as a term marks the structural pointlessness or meaninglessness of art. anti-poiesis. Previous to this analysis Agamben draws ancient parallels between poetry and philosophy through the figure of the muse which as we know he also terms dictation. here thought cannot measure trapped as it is in the tautology of the same. For Plato the meaning of the most beautiful song is “to demonstrate that poetic words do no originally belong to the people nor are they created by them” (LD. for speaking man. philo-poiesis. he explains. the habit. The name of this technique in poetry is the periplus. Periplus describes. radically productive uselessness.

the trans-planar and tabular experience of the anaphoriccataphoric matrix of poetic recursiveness. The first is the scission of poetry from philosophy echoed by the bifurcation of language in the theory of the sign and dramatized in poetics through the development of the stanza. as is often the case in such salty tales of the sea. in the periplus logic of tautological habitudes. vocal silence at the very heart of being.LOGOPOIESIS. once and for all time. THINKING TAUTOLOGY liberate poetry from inspiration or to retrieve language from mystical music-making and return it to statements of truth. The second the establishment of negative. Perhaps only language in which the pure prose of philosophy would intervene at a certain point to break apart the verse of the poetic word.” Thought has been truly poeticized by being sucked into the vortex of poetic periplus. 133 . . to Leopardi Agamben ends what is surely one of the great additions to the science of aesthetics in considering a logopoietic thinking that finds no measure of the infinite but is captured instead. along the way. you recall. In parentheses as if an after thought which in fact is the advent of this whole impossible yet unavoidable enterprise. It does this. thought “in its drowning” is “now truly lost forever . tautological logopoiesis. Yet. Yet. would be the true human language). thought has many adventures during which thought’s silence and interminable nature miraculously ceases to be “a negative experience. Returning one last time. Plato argues in Phaedrus. Thought in the poem. the most beautiful voice of the muse is voice without sound marking the origins of two essential and ultimately destructive events in Western thought. neither verse not prose. Thought now experiences. lost at sea as we say. once and for all. (LD. no sooner launched the logopoietic bark is inundated by the cruel seas of the infinite and drowns. by transforming muse into spirit or Geist. Yet. and in which the verse of poetry would intervene to bend the prose of philosophy into a ring. he argues. sets out from only to return back to the same. 78) With this parenthetical wondering Agamben gives birth to the new discipline of logopoiesis. and thus freed. Agamben inserts the following: (For this reason. Who will save us: poetry or philosophy? The answer is neither and both.”’ At sea. . that is. perhaps neither poetry nor philosophy. will ever be able to accomplish their millennial enterprise by themselves.

The result is the “extinguishing of thought. as the ethos of humanity” (LD. time between times or between chronological time. its having-been and its coming to be . it suffices to pull ourselves from the ocean and back onto the shore. 134 . dry off. without resorting to arche-presence of the false imposition of unity. its habit and its versus. and reflect on how far we have come. a truly original idea of language and thought that exceeds all the traditions of thinking from Plato as far as Heidegger by simply escaping the craft of thinking through drowning in equivalence and pointlessness. At this point the metaphysical and poetic Agamben will once more come together and take the measure of each other. the truth of a statement cannot be tested. negativity as the breaking and making of the habit or of a poetic. its coming to be. Everything hangs on the temporal-spatial essence of poetry. Logopoiesis in its tautology names a certain experience of truth that emulates that of potential. This logic is the tautological logic of poetic thinking. For now. . and eschatological futural time. the very testing of truth through its own alienation. and the very turn of poetry as a formidable alternative to the traditional modes of thinking which renounce the circular in every instance in favour of moving ever forward towards the truth. . 81). in the exhaustion of the dimension of being. its versification of language. its having been. the figure of humanity’s having emerges for the first time in its simple clarity: to have always dear as one’s habitual dwelling place. Later when we return to poetic structure we will see how Agamben’s recent work has come to name this in-between time messianic time. Logopoiesis is the turn of verse in all senses of the word. for different yet related reasons. Both the ability of poetic language to turn (projective-recursion) as a potential for a pro-ductive philosophy to come. and yet how much further we still have to travel. Yet the circularity of logopoiesis goes even further than this.” its drowning and its tautological negation so that “in the negative dimensions of the event of language. however. The result of this is a form of radical desubjectivization.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN in the poem. In both tautology and potentiality. Through the projectiverecursive nature of poetic structure we are gifted with a model for a truly tautological mode of thought that draws together all the strands of Agamben’s attempt to think beyond the metaphysics of scission and negation. literary singularity born out of structures of repetition.

CHAPTER 5 ENJAMBEMENT. without remaining unsaid in what is said” (EP. THE TURN OF VERSE THE DEFINITION OF POETRY Bare space is still veiled. interruption. the poem must die through a process of self-alienation to become what it is destined to be. In Agamben’s hands the poem may be reborn into the service of a profound shift in metaphysics but at a certain cost to its own self-identity. 135 . and the arts. 115). the end of the poem. Like all other identities in Agamben. recurrence. From this we are now in a position to ascertain that the prosodic element of poetry which concerns so much of Agamben’s work on literature. All of which gives a certain piquancy to his avowed project here. he concludes on material seemingly at one removed from the technical concerns of prosody: “The poem thus reveals the goal of its proud strategy: to let language finally communicate itself. consider the conclusion of the short essay on poetics entitled “The End of the Poem. interests him only in as much as it provides singular and privileged access to thinking the thing of thought as such: language. and finitude. language. (BT.” Having spent several pages defining poetry in terms of lineation. Never more powerfully apparent than here is it that Agamben is both negligent of the singularity of literature and yet entirely dependent on it. 96) If it were not already apparent that there is a profound interdependence in Agamben between thinking.

this is. and poetry is the archetypal tensile linguistic form. The fact that the poem comes to an end both allows 136 . as you can see summarized in the title of this lecture. happens to emulate precisely the tension at the heart of modern. must also be those for thought. I will have to begin with a claim that. Thus we can see that differential opposition. negative metaphysics. Rather the definition of poetry exists precisely in the ambivalence to be found at the heart of all structures of differential scission. is to define a poetic institution that has until now remained unidentified: the end of the poem. This is not merely due to the repulsive attitude of first philosophy to poetry. although widely attacked by Agamben cannot simply be eradicated. To do this. without being trivial. 109) This deceptively simple definition of poetry as reducible to the prosodic technique of enjambement that does not even belong with Agamben1 establishes a set of preconditions for poetry which. perhaps Agamben might rapidly find what he is looking for in poetry but. here in the scission between phone and logos. like all tension.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN The essay. not least because the non-relational relation between two terms in a zone of indistinction that typifies the Agambenian method is best described as a tension. (EP. source of the tension he mentions here. yet as we saw poetry has a special place in this tradition. begins in a rather pedestrian vein that gives little indication of the direction it will eventually take: My plan. we now realize. It is notable that the essay title and Agamben’s initial declaration both refer not to the internal tension of the poem but its cessation: the end of the poem is the true definition of poetry. that between the semiotic and the semantic. between the semiotic and the semantic sphere. This may indeed be a truism for all entities the result of the metaphysical tradition. strikes me as obvious—namely that poetry lives only in the tension and difference (and hence also the virtual interference) between sound and sense. not the case. If this tension were easy to maintain. And so it becomes possible to see how this tension which occurs in the technicalities of prosody will open up for Agamben a possible route out of negation into pro-duction. which was originally a paper presented in French. namely that such a scission demands separation and relation. but also that the specific tension of the poetic. by definition.

it follows that the last verse of a poem is not a verse. Does this mean that the last verse trespasses into prose? (EP. poetry alone cannot be thought’s substitute. ongoing poetry of an impossible or virtual nature. then. not least because without finitude there can be no poem. The poem is tense because it must end. the abyssal presence of absence edging all poetry into being. teetering on a ledge above an abyss of pure space or universal prose. while a potential for thought. not a preference for the semiotic over the semantic but the balancing of one precariously against the other. carefully woven according to Agamben from the tensile interchange of semiotics and semantics. 112) If something is defined by a tensile dynamic between arrest and sequential recommencement. it is inevitable that if the sequence cannot recommence then the thing in question at that point no longer exists. THE TURN OF VERSE one to define the potential of its internal tensions and to understand how. This fact is certainly trivial. For if poetry is defined precisely by the possibility of enjambement. only pure. yet it implies consequences that are as perplexing as they are necessary. 137 .2 Yet there would be no tension without this probable eventuality. This space. Agamben wonders: what happens at the point which the poem ends? Clearly. because at this point the whole texture of poetry. If poetry subsists in the tensions it calls up between semiotic and semantic forces. and instead becomes a true abyss of philosophical proportions. here there can be no enjambement in the final verse of a poem. ceases to be a facilitator of poetic tension. a gap which words can pause before and then overleap as in enjambement. 115). starts to unravel.ENJAMBEMENT. Verse is verse because it will at some point cease to be verse defining a structure of identity based on self-alienation we are now more than familiar with under the wider ontological heading of desubjectivization. most marked at the end of the line where semiotic demands of metrical counting and rhyme undermine the semantic expectations set up within the progress of the serial syntax previous to this point of transition from one line to the next. No wonder it is “as if for poetry the end implied a catastrophe and loss of identity” (EP. if poetry is indeed this tension. Thus the final “verse” of any poem cannot be poetry for the tension is asymmetrically poised above a permanent rather than transitory space.

or the fake space of the blank page. This is the source of poetry’s Stimmung. inevitable at the poem’s final footing on the edge before the abyss. from this obvious if not trivial definition. its uncanny angst. but rather is the experience of projective and imminent finitude as such. but rather the already inscribed future failure of poetry. For poetry is perpetually fading. certainly suggested at the end of each line whether it runs on or not. and hence poiesis. meaning that poetry is the natural or normative state of language and prose merely its interim interruption? Such an argument is historically supportable in the work of Godzich and Kittay. Poetry is not marked by finitude. the famous Agamben tablet of potential? The end of the poem raises more questions than it answers but what is certain is that it is not precisely the tension between semiotics and semantics that allows the poem to come to presence. if it indeed ever does begin as such and not simply strike up again on its guitar or lute.” because Agamben is speaking here of deathly negativity. one might also wonder what happens at the point of incipit or the very birth of the poem. vacancy is just as present before the poem begins. by its ending. Is prose. losing its footing on a slippery way it must follow to its death. Just as being-in-the-world can only be disclosed through an admission of finitude so too the poem in the world is only a poem by virtue of its eventual negation by the Hegelian “prose of the world” of the everyday. or is it merely the period when there is no poetic tension? Where does this space end into. in other words. indeed all creation precisely in the terms of Heidegger’s beingtowards-death. Poetry is tense because it is permanently buffeted by recollected 138 . Surely the essay would be better named “The Death of the Poem. its mood or attunement. foreshadowed in the worrying gaps between stanzas. tension.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN If. but also disseminated or contaminated across the stretch of the line in the gaps between the words and the fading of certain syllables in the service of others. Is the space before the poem the space between poems. questions begin to be asked of being. If space looms at the end of the poem. and finitude. outside the collection or book? Is it actual space. not space at all but un-inscribed or zero-marked matter. the beginning of the poem. composed of alinear but sequential marks. to be perpetually born to presence. dissolving. This other tension is the tension of philosophical finitude. which is also a being-away-from-birth. before the title. He comes to define poetry. between the title and the poem body. implied before the poem has even begun.

simply listing actions. after all. Any line therefore at a slant—tell the truth but tell it slant—holds within it an invitation to some future assignation wherein its linearity will become planar. will meet at a third and mutual point (in perspective the vanishing point). 39) This is taken from Idea of Prose. (IP. from this standpoint. rhythm. But we shall call poetry the discourse in which it is possible to set a metrical limit against a syntactic one (verse in which enjambement is not actually present is to be seen as verse with zero enjambement). Quantity. and Agamben’s plan for the institution of the end of the poem is born out of his obvious yet remarkable observation that: No definition of verse is perfectly satisfying unless it asserts an identity for poetry against prose through the possibility of enjambement. THE TURN OF VERSE premonitions and intimations of mortality. A plane occurs whenever there are three points or where there are two lines which are not parallel for. those two lines each made of two points. is a geometric term pertaining to the point where any two lines meet one’s line of sight at the perpendicular and form a twodimensional flat surface or plane diminishing in accordance with perspective. None of which is at all trivial. A plan. Prose is the discourse in which this is impossible. maps out a planar surface. BOUSTROPHEDONICS I will take Agamben at his word and read “The End of the Poem” as a plan for a poetic institution of foundational instability. and the number of syllables—all elements that can equally well occur in prose—do not. and the intervening ten years between Agamben’s initial. at some point of extension. Such plans always implicate the formation of a plane. for example. however obvious it may seem to be. provide sufficient criteria. A plan.ENJAMBEMENT. quasi-scientific formulation and the more complex rhetoric of “The End of the Poem” allows Agamben to add 139 . among other things.

and articulation charted here: the space between the words. which is a grammatological differentiation. while the phonematic difference cannot contain the grammatological. metrical iambic rhythm.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN one additional element to this formula. words in any real sense. notice how hard is the conception of the phonetic as a line and the grammatological as a stream. of course. Western. This third difference is enjambement.” There are two clear levels of segmentation. are all composed of successive series. alphabetic languages which are written although not necessarily spoken. Let us take a random and innocent syntagm in English to better illustrate the issue: “The curfew tolls the knell of parting day. at least until one pauses for breath. the adoption of the terms semantic and semiotic to place atop of the initial bare skeleton of prose and poetry. a third level of segmentation available to only a very limited number of syntagms. The second is less so and is based on scientific work on phonemes which establishes that when one speaks a stream of syntax. English. for. and leaves the world to darkness and to me.” These two realms rely on very different modes of sensation resulting in cognition of a language which remains permanently bifurcated and at odds with itself. although of all of these mathematics also has a tabular potential. and in phonology one cannot hear “words. The first of these observations is. the ploughman homeward plods his weary way. There is.” They are not.4 So in grammatology one cannot “see” stress. a designation which includes Italian. by which I mean the simple appearance of the words does not reproduce stress. undifferentiated utterance. and the regular. The grammatological difference cannot contain the phonematic. resulting in the perfectly sensible and violently contested idea that the voice precedes writing. and mathematics. in that speaking the words does not reproduce textual spacing or planar dimensionality. although free verse has made the potential for this differentiation available in principle to all syntax with Agamben’s theory backing this up to some degree. rather obvious. difference. Latin. The brain that cuts up this continual stream into single units identified as “words. which is phonematic. dare I say it.3 Let us scientifically and geometrically proceed with this for a moment. the lowing heard winds slowly o’er the lea. as you may have recognized when you 140 . rather they are electrical impulses giving an impression of words. There is a fundamental disjuncture in such successive series between words as they are heard and how they are written. however. one utters a single.

Agamben summarizes this ancient ontological counterpositioning in terms of the bar (/) that we found articulated the ban and articulation of the sign. THE TURN OF VERSE saw my example or felt when you read it. As one can see from my little experiment in linguistic presentation. the extract in question is more traditionally inscribed thus: The curfew tolls the knell of parting day. The first is the line taken by Agamben that without the line-breaks after every ten syllables this sentence is prose. but in the fold of the presence on which they are established: the logos . neither in writing nor in the voice. While attestation suggests Agamben conceives of enjambement grammatologically. as proven by my example that until those breaks are spatially imposed the sentence in question holds off from become a verse. The ploughman homeward plods his weary way. there are a number of reasons why this cannot be the case. The remaining evidence is much more empirical. The lowing herd winds slowly o’er the lea.” There are two levels of analysis to present here. This leads to Agamben’s contention that gramma (writing) rather than destabilizing the pre-eminence of phone (voice) as full presence is actually the pre-condition or reverse face of such a pre-eminence: “the originary nucleus of signification is neither in the signifier or the signified. Is such a break a grammatological or phonematic occurrence? The way Agamben presents it remains permanently unclear. enjambement is neither purely grammatological nor phonological. . And the human is precisely this fracture of presence” (ST. The second takes us into a much more complex question as to what is actually meant by a line-break. . so I have to extrapolate from his evidence the possibility that it is both and neither. 156). True one needs in 141 . And leaves the world to darkness and to me. revealing not simply Derridean différance but also the “topological game of putting things together and articulating” (ST. is the fold that gathers and divides all things in the ‘putting together’ of presence.ENJAMBEMENT. 156). The first pertains to Agamben’s more general work on language and in particular his radical critique of Derrida’s theory of the trace conducted through Agamben’s own problematization of the idea of the gramma.5 So goes famously the first stanza of Gray’s exemplary “Elegy Written in a Country Churchyard.

All of which brings us back to the poetic plane. while at the same time one can feel enjambement but it remains as discarnate as a feeling or uncanny sensation.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN some sense the spatial presentation of the break for the poem to be immediately perceptible as the visual entity called poem.6 this is not essential but merely a contingency of 142 . In fact you do not need to read the poem to visually apprehend it is a poem nor do you need to see the poem when you are reading it to know or feel it is a poem. this time not between poetry and prose (philosophy) but between speech and writing. But if one reads the four lines as one line. which can be presented graphically as follows: Geometrically speaking. Enjambement artificially breaks the sequential line of language at the right hand side of the page here. more intangibly. for indeed one cannot understand enjambement unless one understands the semantic content of the lines in view. one still finds oneself pausing every ten syllables. until one has one’s suspicions confirmed by the graphical plan of the poem before one. poetry is the becoming planar of an endlessly extendable two-dimensional field we call page the of side hand left the at line the up takes then It This maps out three points: the beginning of the line. This is due to the perfection of the metrics here widely recognized as one of the most superlative and thus static examples of traditional English prosody. Enjambement therefore not only establishes a tension between semantics and semiotics but it simultaneously eases or even eradicates another ancient antagonism. and perhaps finally. . if strained. the use of zero enjambement facilitated by terminal caesurae at the end of every subsection of ten syllables. Certainly you can see a line-break or feel it. the almost genetic inclination of English speakers to allow their speech to fall into iambs organized into groups of ten syllables or so. its ending. While prose fills a planar page space. but its full force comes through the combination of the two. Enjambement in this manner demonstrates perhaps the only instance in language where the rivalry between the immediacy of speech and the mediation of writing is transformed into a constructive. entente. and its recommencement.

Writing scribbles down voice. neither poetic nor prosaic. I would argue. It hints at a passage of prose with the very gesture that attests its own versatility. and it is a point. THE TURN OF VERSE the development of the book as a technology for the preservation. Yet at the very point. enjambement brings to light the original gait. as it were. In abstract terms the line of prose is always one single line.7 the verse finds that its very identity as verse is lost at the precise point of its being 143 . and transportation of prose writing. In this way.ENJAMBEMENT. Poetry affirms its identity at the very moment that it breaks the line indicating a preference for semiotic metrics and rhyme over semantic clarity and continuity. As Agamben argues: In the very moment that the verse affirms its own identity by breaking a syntactic link. . 40) Agamben’s phrasing itself constructs something of a boustrophedonic folding logic. referring to the rhetorical term echoing the passage of an oxen along and between the furrows it ploughs wherein you write first from right to left and then from left to right. The paragraph. that it abandons sense for the abyss of grammatical. spatial absence (the jagged abyss that looms at the right-hand edge of all poetry) the break is softened into a bend. but boustrophedonic. Most avowedly the paragraph is not a stanza. organization. and reclaims that which it had the temerity to eject. the purely sonic unit of verse transgresses its own identity as it does its own measure. . namely sense. distribution. By this headlong dive into the abyss of meaning. it is irresistibly drawn into bending over into the next line to lay hold of what it has thrown out of itself. Poetry is the moment in which the plane of writing is opened through the addition of an extra point to the bi-punctal line of prose. The cut folded back on itself always becomes a hinge except for the very last verse which remains severed not bent. (IP. Paradoxically Agamben terms this accommodating recuperation a “dive into the abyss of meaning” for in recovering a state of stable continuity through the renunciation of the cut for the hinge. interrupted by the paragraph certainly but never for anything other than stabilizing semantic dictates within this line. although the closest entity in prose graphematically to the property of enjambement does not interrupt the dimensionality of the prose line into a poetic planar surface. Here voice shouts down writing. of poetry .

rely on temporality. Between the cut and the fold. This experience of space produced by the boustrophedonic transition from line to plane. Students of metaphysics will be more than aware of how considerations of time become those of space. This plane of language first and foremost introduces writing to a fundamental experience of space as opposed to the simple activity of differential spacing: space as a second dimension. THE MESSIANIC AS NOT The space of thought within the poem. allows the poetic to become poetry. “Poetic” remains therefore at the level of praxis. What poetry “makes happen” geometrically is that it adds a third point. What poetry makes happen in the birth to plane is nothing other than thinking.8 opening up a planar space in writing that is the very basis of the grammatological. to poetry as the tensile effect of this activity. one can see a dramatization of this dynamic in the grammatological presentation of the work while partially occluded in the phonematic in which voice unfolds in time. One of 144 . has suffered a ban. since Plato certainly. immediately closed down again by the cut becoming in an instant a fold. and abyss. an essential logopoietic opening up of space for thought in a medium that.9 Students of poetry will be more than aware of how considerations of space. and vice versa. cannot be cleared until the issue of time in poetry is resolved. or something that the poetic makes happen or brings into presence. as a threshold. colonization. poetry is continually and permanently born to presence and withheld from view. the way it always refers both forwards and backwards. indeed poetry as such is based on the fundamental number three. revealed and concealed or vice versa. to refer to the activity of enjambement. At the point in the line when the line becomes a part of a plane the poiesis of poetry is revealed.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN founded. something that writing does. If we take the structural shift of the metricalmusical element of the anaphora-cataphora projective recursive tabular matrix of poetic structure. and finally excision of an opening for suprasensuous thinking within the sensible body of a “work” of art. such as the becoming planar of the cut/turn at the end of the poetic line. while poetry as such is poiesis. therefore. as a surround or framing device. More importantly we find here in the becoming planar of the line of sense an internal bifurcation in the category poetry as Agamben shifts from the adjective poetic. – KLE SIS.

the epoch of modernity.ENJAMBEMENT. negation. we must pass through the distorting hall of temporal mirrors that is the complex and brilliant theory of messianic time to be found in this volume. and progress in our task of a logopoiesis in which poetry is an essential partner in the indifferential thought to come. of course. If we are to move from lineation to the space of poetry. as regards Agamben’s own philosophy of indifference. To move from boustrophedonics to a logopoietic philosophy of indifference that finds its clearing in the very space of thought within the poem requires a considerable and remarkable diversion of the way through these entangled and ancient defiles. and the quest for a post-nihilistic theory of productive thought about art that did not succumb to the metaphysical-epochal designations of ending. There are two central epochal moments in Agamben’s messianic The Time That Remains which we are already. Finally. the medium or supportive gesturality of language as such makes little reference to temporality. THE TURN OF VERSE the prime reasons for the retention of the gramma within the phone of the poem is to allow access to the spatiality within poetic temporality and resist poiesis becoming simply an apparent privileging of some arche-vocal presence. Agamben has only been able to resolve these issues. In our considerations of Agamben’s interventions on art in general we saw how in his critique of aesthetic modernism he was committed to a rather different temporality of epochal ending. but also the possible solution as to how a future for thought can be found in the technicalities of prosody. and the messianic strand of potential. temporal. The second is kairos as an alternative time to chronos presenting to us a possible historical existence that is neither chronological nor eschatological but between and incisive of both. Map-less but with guidance we will commence with the call of the messianic vocation. in one of his recent and most important works The Time That Remains. familiar with. space becoming time.10 The combination of these two terms not only involves an even more ontological radicalization of enjambement as the obvious definition of the poem. 145 . and so on. Indeed the whole project of the early formulation of the Idea of Prose depends upon complex interactions with temporality such as Benjaminian now-time and messianic redemption. Yet its essential combination with the theory of potentiality is. resolve the aporias of modernity. silence. The first of these is kle ¯sis or calling as a surrogate to epoch as event. Yet such is the nature of the adventure. poetic temporality. in part.

To be called to the messianic vocation is to be called to the call. Indeed. or to remain within the dynamic of calling indicated by the logical and linguistic operations of anaphoric deixis. and thus it is from Paul that Agamben extricates the idea of kle as the calling to the messianic vocation. “Let every man abide in the same calling wherein he was called. The call. or the call of the previous calling. until the deictic indicator refers back to its previous referent. 198 & 209). Finally. 257). 22). Reading specifically a ¯sis sentence from 1 Cor. can the referent or call can be said to call at all. fictive subjective as-if-ness that we have already delineated.” Agamben focuses on the seemingly tautological phrase en te kle he ekle ¯. the messianic “calling. but a “peculiar tautegorical movement that comes from the call and returns back to it” (TTR. While the tautology of this phrasing. is instigated and completed only after the fact of when it is called to call. therefore. deixis. 7:17: 17–22. repeating the same logic we found in play with aesthetic judgement.” can be read intertextually in relation to three areas of concern for logopoiesis. now. Clearly it presents a modification of Heidegger’s idea of the poetic as the calling of calling (PLT. therefore. What deixis indicates here. usually translated as “the ¯ ¯sei ¯the same calling wherein he was called” (TTR. and establishing an impossible to ignore parallel between negative modern criticism and a possible positive outcome of this vocation through the act of messianic calling to the call. is that the commencement and completion of the vocation of the messianic all occur within the temporality of the act of calling. messianic calling is first presented in the “Second Day” of The Time That Remains bracketing the debate of modern.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN Kle ¯sis. 19). the calling of being called. most familiar linguistic operator. The Time That Remains is a sustained philological analysis of the Pauline canon of messianic texts. one might redefine this form of anaphora as tautegorical cataphoric anaphora. Here the “he” is an anaphoric designation of the previous kle ¯sei. wherein the repeated term can only be presented as a term to be repeated 146 . Agamben argues the problem is that the phrase is not tautological. Such a use of anaphoric deixis is peculiarly tautegorical because not until the call is recalled.11 In terms of it being the logic of “as not” it is a modification of the sceptical “no more than” that Agamben places at the heart of poetic potentiality and epochality (P. is one which commentators have struggled for centuries to render in their respective languages. This occurs through a technical application of that.

“Vocation. Jew.” he says. 22).” (TTR. The messianic vocation is the revocation of every vocation . “calls for nothing and to no place . Agamben calls ¯ ¯ this the “ultimate meaning of kle ¯sis” (TTR. Tautegorical. its being essentially and foremost a calling of the calling” (TTR. but of change. . THE TURN OF VERSE after it has first been repeated. its relation to the messianic event. a form of indication that “may apply to any condition. 23). .ENJAMBEMENT. Citing Paul when he says that kle involves ¯sis operating “as not having” a condition. the vocation calls the vocation itself. yet cannot be repeated until it has occurred. This being the case the messianic vocation has no specific content. but instead are called into the nullification of one’s vocation as one’s vocation. of having a condition as not having a condition. apostle. . it revokes a condition . Instead one is called into the subjective state of vocational desubjectivization (whatever vocation) as Agamben confirms in his follow-up analysis of the “as not” of the messianic vocation. Think of this if you will as anaphoric deixis that refers to no particular thing but merely refers to its own operations. and only because of. negatively heuristic kle is the first part of the mes¯sis sianic which structurally and technically emulates the process of deictic desubjectivization we saw in Agamben’s appropriation of Benveniste. to another. 23)— immobilized by the confounding circular logic of the tautegorical. . We are faced here therefore not with a matter of eschatological indifference. for example called to criticism as the critical tautegorical nullification of criticism. . but for this same reason. but not called to a new vocation.12 Calling or kle is first of all an empty ¯sis revocation of every vocation. One is called away from one’s vocation. Precisely because such a remaining “signifies the immobile anaphoric gesture of the messianic calling. the “Ho s me ” of the Pauline text. . almost an internal shifting between each and every single condition by virtue of being called” (TTR. “Why remain then in this nothing?” Agamben asks. Thus one is called to remain in the negation of vocation as a form of vocation. referring to the first half of the Pauline formulation. You are not called from one vocation. 23). As Agamben says with more admirable clarity than I can muster: “Kle indicates the particular transformation that every juridical ¯sis status and worldly condition undergoes because of. and indeed there is increasing room for Benveniste here and in other later works. the classic definition of deixis. as though it were an urgency that works it from within and hollows it 147 .

that of the messianism of a temporality to come. He first uses the example of the technique of comparison within Paul. In the messianic parable signum and res significa approximate each other because language itself is what is signified. it sets itself up against itself in the form of the as not: weeping as not weeping” (TTR. At the end of this section Agamben speaks of the process “as not” in terms of another classic form of rhetoric. In Paul’s comparative explanation of the subjective effect of kle weeping ¯sis is pushed towards itself as not weeping. As he says: “In the parable. they do not resemble children. but makes it pass. as the operation of language as such to such a degree that in many languages the word for language originates from the parable. it prepares its end” (TTR. Agamben concludes from this form of comparison: “In pushing each thing towards itself through the as not. Traditionally a parable is assumed to have a double meaning but Agamben views this not as a signifier having two signifieds. “but rather they interpreted the comparative as an (intensive or remissive) tension that sets one concept against another” (TTR. but are placed alongside children. 24). from the Greek 148 . While apparent that Agamben here is speaking of the mediality of language in another register. “unless you become as children. the messianic does not simply cancel out this figure. . is that of a thing with itself in the form of non-self-identity. rejoicing pushed towards not rejoicing. the parable.” and how this form of comparison was analysed by Medieval grammarians in a particular fashion as not a form of identity or resemblance. The comparison. Instead. . noting how in the Bible the parable comes to stand for the word of god itself or logos. but of the duality of language itself imposed upon it by human speech.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN out. if it exists at all.” Like the comparison the parable. 24). 24–5). for it does ¯ ¯ not push a concept’s semantic field toward that of another concept. . If this is true then for Paul men are not as children. the difference between the signum and res significa thus tends to annul itself without completely disappearing. if I may refer to such a thing. not until he starts to speak of figurality is one able to see how these comments pertain to modern aesthetics. 23–4). seed meaning seed and logos. nullifying it in the very gesture of maintaining and dwelling in it” (TTR. “The Pauline hos me seems to be a special type of tensor. Speaking specifically of the parable of the sower where seed represents logos of course. Agamben identifies how a whole tradition of the parable develops that takes paraballisation.

comparison. Agamben’s argument in The Man Without Content. 62). occasion or now. how does that differ from the messianic figurality of anaphora. Rather. kairos. a consideration of a third form of figuration. Language does not refer to the world but to language as such. chronos. The sign is not a system of difference and similarity but of a non-selfcoincidence as identity. “it is a remnant.” however. To negotiate this subtle and complex difference will take the rest of my study here on the conception of poiesis. as I said.” (TTR. and to take us from negative modernity to productive poiesis we must turn to the second Pauline term. in relation to what he sees as a common misrepresentation of apostolic messianic time as eschatological.ENJAMBEMENT. the time that remains between these two times. signifier and signified. THE TURN OF VERSE para-ballo to place one thing next to another. He explains that while Paul regularly uses eschatological time when speaking of the two Jewish time traditions.” The historical conflict he maps out between “as if ” and “as not” can now be situated around familiar territory pertaining to language and figuration. MESSIANIC KAIROS Agamben first addresses the term kairos. but so as to put “each being and each term in tension with itself ” (TTR. “As if ” would seem to be figuration as such. . the “as if. . and the atemporal eternity that extends after the end of time. This shift from comparison to parable brackets. Language operates does it not as if it referred to the world at large when we discovered in fact that such deictic acts merely reveal is a temporal belatedness in terms of referentiality? “As not. that which stretches from creation to the end of time. eschaton. The messianic condition of “as not” is the movement of scission within language from being within the sign to being between the sign and itself. when the division of time is itself divided . In the language of messianic time comparisons and parables exist not in terms of linguistic comparison. works in a manner which places figuration alongside itself. Glossing on the traditional representation of time as a line along 149 . indicates a process of internal division (as well as creating tabular space). and parable? These constructions are also self-regarding but in a manner that Agamben believes is truly redemptive. The question therefore remains if modern “as if ” aesthetics finds its archetype in art for art’s sake. messianic time is neither of these epochal designations. 43).

for example A—B—C wherein A is creation. Agamben hones in on this gap between representable and thinkable time by adopting the linguistic concept of operational time. in this instance messianic time. therefore. insufficient to capture the complexity of time. nor a synthesis of all three tenses in a manner that emulates Bergson’s influential theory of modern time. as ever. in regard of linear time. Kairos. here represented as between the two vertical dotted lines. As Agamben says. although the time of the now. introduces a remainder [resto] into it that exceeds the division” (TTR. and as part of the eschaton while exceeding that. being neither point nor extension but the precondition and deconstruction of both. B the messianic event. he notes that such a line has never accorded with the human experience of time. Thus he reconstitutes the time line by adding a segmentation which removes position B from the line and instead locates it as a caesuric interruption of the line: A C Of this model and its reappraisal of messianic time he suggests that we take “messianic time as a caesura which. Messianic time. 150 . interruptions. is not a dot on the line of time but a segment or stanza within the divisions of epochs along this line. The result is a caesuric division between an epoch’s cessation and the resumption of the new epoch. he explains that this linear model is. the classic representation of time since Aristotle. stratifications. reiterations. 64). or we concede the thinkable nature of time and all its complexities. Of the time line consisting of assumed strings of points. in its dividing the division between two times.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN which one situates epochs. and C apocalypse. extends epochal time into the postepochal and post-epochal time back into epochal time. and dimensionalities. As such it operates with precisely the same logic as the term epoch. Agamben is aware that this messianic time presents a powerful challenge to our human consciousness of time and indeed the general difficulty of thinking time. Be not afraid. but accept such a time is unrepresentable. Such caesuric time operates as part of the epoch of chronos while exceeding it. either we are confronted with a model that is representable but unthinkable as actual experience of time. Kairos adds futurity to the past and pastness to the future but it is not the moment or instant.

insofar as he is a thinking and speaking being. 67) Such an “ulterior time” as he initially calls it is not a supplemental time added onto the exterior of chronological time but a “time within time—not ulterior but interior” (TTR. By this we do not mean they are simply rhetorical forms. tautegorical calling and self-constructing temporal representation. . Whatever experience of time they undergo they are able to come to represent it as this idealized model in their minds subsequently. that prevented him from perfectly coinciding with the time out of which he could make images and representations. Guillaume ingeniously explains that the time line past—present—future is naturally too perfect and operates as if such a time line were always already constructed for the subject. 66) which. This interior time is what Agamben means by messianic time: “the time that time takes to come to an end. The benefit of operational time is that it adds “a projection in which the process of forming the time-image is cast back onto the time image itself ” (TTR. Rather. more precisely. 67). to achieve our representation of time” (TTR. or. for Agamben figuration is a structural 151 . Instead. and Guillaume calls this operational time or “the time the mind takes to realize a time-image” (TTR. the time we take to bring time to an end. 66). produced an additional time . formation. 68). This time that remains is the messianic kairos. 67). THE TURN OF VERSE Operational time originates from the work of French linguist Gustave Guillaume.13 He then adds a modification to this defining messianic time as “the time we need to make time end: the time that is left us” (TTR. perhaps only an instant but a period all the same. another time is implied that is not entirely consumed by representation. . and having been constructed. are both examples of the figural nature of the messianic for Agamben. Agamben argues. (TTR. Kle ¯sis and kairos. This process of temporal construction takes a period of time. converts time from a linear to “three-dimensional” entity by which he means it conveys the three moments of temporality: potentiality. Agamben concludes that In every representation we make of time and in every discourse by means of which we define and represent time. It is as though man. the subject’s experience of time is constructed by the subject in accordance with this ideal representation.ENJAMBEMENT. as we know.

At this stage then our extended debate on the epochal time of the messianic and our technical considerations of prosody also start to turn to face each other at long last. The calling of the “as not” places one’s subjectivity alongside its negation. that of recapitulation. as Agamben says. so too in the antitypos there is a compacted summation of the typos or. 74). in which the past is dislocated into the present and the present is extended into the past” (TTR. is not important as a “biunivocal correspondence” (TTR. the most famous example of which is that between zoe and bios in Homo Sacer. This tendency to think of time as a past prefigurement of a future yet to arrive. “messianic ple ¯ ma is therefore an abridgement and anticipation of eschatologi¯ro cal fulfilment” (TTR. typosantitypos. 76). the two elements are heterogeneous. We have already considered comparison and parable in this regard. although. Paul adds one more final figural notion. This is the epoch of the messianic. Without getting too lost in the theology of this suffice it to say that if in the messianic kairos there is in the typos a prefigurement of the antitypos. Paul explains that at the messianic moment of total fulfilment of time. such a correspondence existed prominently throughout the medieval period. Agamben is now able to add a third figural term. 74). and yet in a manner in which their proximity naturally calls up some attempt at relation in the form of tension. it is the relation itself” (TTR. To this typological caesuric figuration.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN process wherein two conditions are placed alongside each other in a nonrelational fashion. The messianic is not just one of two terms in this typological relation. This results in what might be called the relational tension of the nonrelational. This means that each instant of messianic 152 . as he considers Paul’s explanation of how all that is past will come to be taken into account at the end of time. Agamben argues. while kairatic time places time’s constructed nature against its representation of non-constructed and proper perfection. 74). all things are recapitu¯ro ¯ lated in the messiah. ple ¯ ma ton kairon. in an inseparable constellation. the antitypos. he tells us. not a third epoch following the past (typos) and future (antitypos) but the way in which these two epochs are brought face to face with each other by means of their caesura or “zone of indiscernibility. A good example of this is Adam whose sin acts as a typos or prefiguration of the coming of the messiah and the negation of sin. Rather. typos. what concerns us is “a tension that clasps together and transforms past and future. typos and antitypos.

This example. If we step back now from theology entirely we can first explain this more generally in terms of our experience of operational time. and even he concedes this may be surprising. and eschaton or temporal finitude. Any theory of temporal extended linearity must contain some idea of completion and any theory of temporal completion must complete on something.ENJAMBEMENT. As messianic time extends chronos into the eschaton all narratives of completion. MESSIANIC RHYME Perhaps now it does not surprise us. each moment of chronological time is prefigured by its completion. and then in relation to poetry. At this point Agamben wisely decides to give “something like a concrete example. as the very location of poetic thinking: logopoiesis. in fact. This situation is expressed by Agamben as Pauline messianic tension conveyed in the complex term epekteinomenos or straining forward in tension towards something which Paul uses to describe the effect on the subject of kairos due to kle ¯sis. The same goes for eschatological time. 78). a kind of small-scale model of messianic time” (TTR. and the structure of the poem. THE TURN OF VERSE kairos effectively fulfils the eschatological moment of immediacy with god rather than conforming to this as a one-off event that occurs at the end of time. In the kairos of operational time two incommensurable epochs or conceptions of epoch lie alongside each other. As soon as Agamben 153 . the temporality of poetry. by virtue of the metrical-musical element. must first consist of a summation of all that went before. One is. A structure such as the kairatic kle depends ¯sis on the precise mix of occurrence and reiteration. Everything about messianic time recalls the figurality of the poetic. something that is now past. The law of figuration means that because messianic kairatic time extends the eschaton into the chronos. anaphora and cataphora that is the basis of any poem structure and which we have already defined. chronos or temporal extension. 78). able to restate this fairly logically away from the theological philology of Agamben’s text. “The tension toward what lies ahead is produced on and out of what lies behind” prompting Agamben to call this the “double tension” of messianic calling. or an act that demands the called subject “seize hold of his own being seized” (TTR. the greatest of which is surely modernity itself. is the poetic convention of rhyme.

and he is truly gifted in his appreciation of the technicalities of prosody along with the implications of poetic ontology. which necessarily will come to an end as determined by the rule of the form: “The poem is therefore an organism or a temporal machine that. in each case. You begin to recognize the pattern. it has a specific and unmistakable temporality. only organized in different combinations. from the very start. Put simply. as one moves towards the predictability of the end. The final stanza or tornada is then only three lines long but repeats all six end-words placing two per line and always ending on at least one of these. or model is. The first six stanzas are each six lines long and the six end words are always the same in each stanza. a fact made most apparent in that rather rare stanzaic form the sestina. For example. I have argued in my own study of this phenomena in modern experimental poetry. strains towards its end. example. A sestina is made up of seven stanzas. But for the more or less brief time that the poem lasts. and variance of the use of homologous rhyming end words. This reading back however comes most to the fore in the tornada where. in the penultimate stanza one can predict the distribution of the final end words without reading the stanza simply by looking back at their distribution in the previous six stanzas. for example the sonnet. one can begin to see how wonderfully this analogy works. he argues. repetition. This is especially true. Thus he says of the closed rhyming lyric form. Thus in the sestina. Agamben’s analysis of the rhythm of the sestina while most apparent in this poem form is. look to how the next stanza will recombine the six fixed elements and thus one is always reading both forwards and backwards. every poem unfolds in linear time semiotically marking this out with great clarity by using artificially ended lines which graphically demonstrate chronos much more adeptly than in any other art form. insufficient. 79).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN describes the poem. although to describe it as analogy. all usages of the words thus far are 154 . a foundational quality of all poetic structure. A kind of eschatology occurs within the poem itself. it has its own time” (TTR. At the same “hermeneutic” time one also picks up on the interplay. That said every poem is also a recursive or reiterative structure. in the case of rhyme. Agamben’s example is taken from the twelfth-century poet Arnaut Daniel but I have also written some years ago about the use of sestina in John Ashbery. effectively.14 The form still operates on occasion in modern poetry in other words. the closed form means that in every line the end is prefigured.

in order to make place for the time of the poem” or what he also calls its “cruciform retrogradation” (TTR. especially his most recent work Inland Empire whose very title expresses the reliance on his work on precisely this anaphoric-cataphoric internal matrix of developmental reiteration. and the narrative structures of the films of David Lynch. 83). This matrix I have called the anaphoric-cataphoric matrix of every poem. . the time of the end. as we saw. in any case the eschaton already fulfils that role. which I have already posed as the 155 . First he notes how the poem produces an internal disruption of linear time that is not an alternative “poetic time” to replace chronological time. Agamben’s insights take the tabularity of poetic structure far beyond anything anyone else could have imagined. poetic structure is far from a mystery. “on the contrary. of course.ENJAMBEMENT. or indeed leitmotifs in Wagner. converting the poem from a linear-horizontal entity to a tabular planar form. model or not. 82). While Agamben calls the sestina a “model” of messianic time this same process is observable in the reiterations of symbols in Joyce’s work of novelistic epiphany. This is the time of the messiah. in this sense. what we have is the same time that organizes itself through its own somewhat hidden internal pulsation. . Agamben explains: “The sestina—and. AN ENDLESS FALLING INTO SILENCE Agamben’s insights into the relation between poetic structural tabularity and a post-nihilistic modality of indifferent thinking depend. THE TURN OF VERSE recalled in their final combination. but it does have its own time. the time that the poem takes to come to an end” (TTR. The same process is discernible in the rhythmic distribution of lines and colours in Pollock. transforms chronological time into messianic time . Poetry is not an example here or not solely exemplary. The poem does not create a new. Such a tabular-planar structure. through the sophisticated mechane of the announcement and retrieval of rhyming end words (which correspond to typological relations between past and present). post-chronological time. While I have worked for some years on this project. on a shifting interrelational tensile comparative combination between temporal-structural projection and recursion. and.15 In miniature therefore we have the whole basis of Agamben’s logopoiesis. every poem—is a soteriological device which.16 This aside. Nor is the philosophy of time handed over to poetic time.

lodged within the trans-psychological definition of hesitation such as it is or ontological hesitation. evental element. and return to our original debate on poetic. and tabular structure. but you do need to have experienced a line-break to think this way and to be sure of experiencing it at least more than once. in a phenomenological reading. betimes. advental finitude. Hesitation is not the localized emotional experience of hesitating yet. stems for the most part from the well-documented and complex relation one finds in poetry between the sensuous and the suprasensuous which differentiates it from philosophy and other arts that share with poetry the emphasis on semiotics. We must now remove ourselves from messianic time. for a time. must surely be beyond an actually felt hesitation such as one experiences at the end of a line of poetry. you do not need to experience a linebreak every time you wish to think about prolonged hesitation. For an unveiling of philosophical. and when one wants philosophically to speak of hesitation as such. a trace of psychological pause. It leaves. what is hesitation in thought without the knowledge of an experience of hesitation in the world? Or to pose the issue in different terms. one is likely to have recourse to a line-break and an example. categorical hesitation. When one does experience a line-break one is likely to experience the opening up of the truth of hesitation. a philosophical hesitation. Rather this felt hesitation moves one into another realm of hesitation as such. 156 . for hesitation as theme and/or category. Then one must dismiss hesitation as sensation without entirely dispensing with it. Agamben immediately asks the question: What is a hesitation if one ceases to think of it psychologically? A hesitation of such an order. but also structurally at the two extremes of the poem body. quasi-universal. Having assured us that poetry is a “prolonged hesitation” between sound and sense. most notably music. in particular through a consideration of the ends or limits of the poem and their dependence on certain ideas of silence. and propositional hesitation. if only to confirm that enjambement is a recursive rather than unique. as a thinker. tension. is dependent on the permanent tension within the poetic line certainly.17 This difficulty pertaining to the actual nature of the experience of hesitation. affective or intellectual. recursive. cannot be separated from the original experience of hesitation that one undergoes every time one reads poetry. hesitation true for all time as it were.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN way in which poetry thinks. one must first experience hesitation as sensation. Yet philosophical.

not a physiological voice imprinted on a psychological capability. Of all the philosophers in this rowdy school of logopoiesis Agamben carries the burden of post-Heideggerian tragic philosophy closest to the truth-freedoms of verse. and that aesthetics. Poetry has nothing to do directly with the object. yet it always proceeds from a poem in Heidegger and all his students. the poem. while simultaneously sailing the ship of truth most perilously proximate to the ruining rocks of sensation. psychologically-actual and philosophical-conceptual. because after all sounds as such do not interest Agamben but voiced sounds. such a delay between voice and meaning which Agamben likens to a katechon 157 . Although Agamben denies it. a project so vast it all but overwhelms his slight work on prosody. the science of sensation.19 This is an unadmitted but now quite familiar aporia in modern philosophical work on poetry.ENJAMBEMENT. The conceptualization of poetry in philosophy is never tied either to a particular poem or any one of its singular effects manifested in a clear set of differentiations: poetry is not in the poem per se. between the dying away of a voiced vibration. yet truth always proceeds from the sensible at the same time. This is an issue that occurs repeatedly in Heidegger. is not dependent on aiesthesis. sensation. Derrida. say as an inventive mode of bringing truth to presence. Yet the pathway to poetry. definable at the very least as a thing.18 Certainly truth precedes. are not separated by a caesura or clear-edged cut but are two strands of a single folded line whose essence resides not in the event of a hesitation as such but in its prolongation. the two hesitations of verse. He applies truth to poetic sensation so as to be able. sensation. at which point he behaves almost like a literary critic. Badiou. not literally from a voice. First by applying a philosophical category to the technical specifics of prosody. from sensation. and then by using these techniques to mount a post-nihilistic metaphysics of indifference. to clear a future pathway for truth in what is a high-risk yet now essential intellectual strategy. A prolonged hesitation between sound and sense. THE TURN OF VERSE Heidegger clearly states that aletheia. and Nancy and their use of what one can term epistemological exemplarity in relation to their reading of certain poems by certain poets as exemplary of the general conditions of poiesis. in this way. but the Voice as such. truth. and poiesis is not necessarily poetry. is not the name to be given to twentieth-century work on poiesis. is laid out through precisely the reading of specific poets and their singularly inventive effects. a word heard and its meaning.

as poets teach us. singular and impossible to repeat. general but not universal silence. self-dissolution. This being the case poetry is not precisely the opposition between sound and sense but the possibility of the opposition between two types of hesitation. For example. Poetry is not silence per se but instead consists of the abyss into which poetry is thrown by the very possibility of its own being. If this is. then there must be at least two orders of silence. and the poem. Agamben progresses towards the point of silence that is the end of the poem. that is rendered mute. semiotic and semantic. and what poetry is as that which goes on in the poem but which is not susceptible to or reducible to the poem. of him who. Poetry partakes of a local. Even as the poem is falling into a profound silence at its material and generic limits. as they pause on the precipice of their own self-conscious. between two units. the sounding cataract is any thing but mute. nothing is said therein. he points out that the poem is “grounded in the perception of the limits and endings that define— without ever fully coinciding with. a perception of the tension of poetry. between sound and sense. 110). a single body of work which means that it must and indeed already has come to an end. differentiations between the poetic. that is. 114). Instead poetry can be defined as the prolonged hesitation. a kind of silence. Such an abyss is not to be mistaken for silence either for. namely the opposition between metric and semantic pauses. for poetry cannot survive its own finitude. as I contend. is defined by a silence brought about by its finitude meaning that poetry is never silenced. repeatable. 158 . according to this. universal but not generalizable. and between actual opposition and possible or potential opposition. self-negating finitude. and almost in intermittent dispute with—sonorous (or graphic) units and semantic units” (EP. poetry. would destroy the poetic machine by hurling it into silence” (EP. Thus a poem. Through such careful distinctions between orders of silence. This would require here a differentiation between what the poem is as ergon partaking of an impossible. The poem is. fulfilling the time of poetry and uniting its two eons. the poem of a silence which is not local but over there. it remains in full as the hesitant voice within these impossible limits.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN or “something which slows and delays the advent of the Messiah. unlike poetry or at least its tension. self-willed. Yet the poem is also an ergon. is silence. having stated that “all poetic institutions participate in this noncoincidence” of which we speak here.

Space must be present for enjambement to occur for example. then the ergon could not continually come to 159 . as I said. This means that the second sense of ergon is continually born to presence from the already existent presence of the par-ergon. The ergon is nothing other than the production of delaying time-space within a space opened up and delimited by the imposition of an exterior to the poem in the form of the parergon of silent space. The body as such of poetry does not exist without that body suffering a moment of cutting or caesura. The poem must be cut-off in order to be complete. for the poem to know of its finitude and be complete. for example.ENJAMBEMENT. surfaces were invented by the devil. all the same a space of a similar structural order can be said to exist in some form internal to the poem. this can only be an illustrative analogy. A boundary condition of a hexagonal crystal. THE TURN OF VERSE I must speak of silence but. Poetry must be ceaselessly. First that ergon is brought to its limitation and finitude by the infinite presence of the parergonal space-place which is also the time of its completion. as if one has to somehow hack off a limb for the human body to be complete. This is another way in which one could read Agamben. a part of the body of the poem on the page or in the book but not a part of the poem body as such. but this space is of the order of a boundary condition: the line exits on the right and always enters to the left. As the physicist Pauli was fond of saying: “God made the bulk. that jagged chasm to the right of the poem. it simultaneously exists through the bottom line á la Pacman. Without the internal space. A plane only becomes a surface when an actual cut is made in the infinitely extendable plane. and locally cutting off. We can deduce from this line of reasoning that the ergon of the poem is defined by two concepts uncomfortable in each other’s presence and yet not contradictory. some remnant of our animalistic past.” A plane becomes a surface when the boundary condition is suspended and the edge of a structure bounded by a vacuum occurs. hesitantly. I am always delaying its arrival. Although. states that if something enters through the top line of the structure. a silent space that is not silence. a space which is inarticulate. or a tail. A plane is always defined as being imaginary because it is infinitely extendable in every two-dimensional direction. like the poet. that the poem body is constructed from the accumulation of poetry’s delaying of the arrival of silence at its limits from which the ergon is born. It may be useful analogously to think of this in relation to what physicists call a “boundary condition” when studying planes.

the potentially endless and thus infinite fake silence between one line and the next. Second. merely perceptions of silence. gestural support. constructions of the representability of an idealized construction of a concept that. then. is not silent at all but simply unpronounced. There is. but no silence as such. The perception of this double deconstructive presence of absence within the ergon of poetry is what the poem as such is reducible to. The ergon of the poem body. Nor is it even space as such but simply the uninscribed medium.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN being. while differentiating the semiotic and semantic unit does not make a clear distinction between sonorous or graphic semiotics unearthing a rare moment of indistinction in his meticulous work. either a profound error on the part of the philosopher or we are still considering silence psychologically and not philosophically. There are pauses. or represented in unthinkable fashion. silent sense. or as-yet blank tablet. however. the final moment of finitude that is singular and plunges the ergon of poetry into infinite. it would seem. What is silence? Was that it? Is it after the question mark or between these lines? Is it even possible to encounter silence within a text such as this so clearly an example of discursive quasi-philosophical. the unpronounced and the uninscribed. by which one can only mean space. Is there any actual silence within the body of the text? I would argue not. relies on two competing convocations with its borders. which the poem invites into its body so as to expel it and thus allow itself to endlessly be born into being. utilizing messianic time. This is the moment of the plane becoming a surface. this consonance which was previously forgivable is harder to support. A finitude which. is either thinkable and unrepresentable. enjambement as boundary condition. First. alinear prose? Agamben. like time. Surely the silence of sound is an actual silence while the silence of the grapheme. Agamben suggests that true silence only occurs once one has exited the text and entered the abyss of sense which has no requirement of 160 . In speaking of silence. the body puts off by its extension and yet invites by the structural necessity of its completion.

(IP. incessantly speaking and responding to signs even while keeping silent. Here Agamben defines silence not as the suspension of discourse. in what is almost a cryptogram: “In silence. it endures the without-name. This silence is the silence of philosophy of which Agamben says. absolutely without identity. in a Heideggerian gesture. philosophy stands exposed. the name of poetry. sensibly. once the following essay. in the word. Only the human animal can establish the quality of exteriority as regards language. 111). 161 . because man is the sole animal who learns language through infancy. which is anything but a sign. “The Idea of Language. Silence is not its secret word—but rather.” an essay which only speaks. without finding in this its own name.20 This being the case one must engage with the profound and complex conception of the idea of word in Agamben. is the conclusion of the essay “The Idea of Silence. rather. he is the only creature capable of not having language. by which I mean the quality which allows it definition and availability to our apprehension. is silence. only man succeeds in interrupting. of interrupting words with the as-suchness of the word of language whose defining quality. This complex negotiation with a silence which exposes philosophy to a period without name which is not. Only the human knows of the quietude of the caesura. to me at least. exists only for man.ENJAMBEMENT. or an utterance. the becoming visible but remaining silent word is. human living being as such through the faculty of language: Only the word puts us in contact with mute things. Here then we finally understand what Agamben means when he states that animals are always within language. an exteriority of the word that Agamben. the infinite language of nature and placing himself for a moment in front of mute things. THE TURN OF VERSE textuality to exist at all. 113) Paradoxically. The word as such. The inviolate rose.” has engaged with the silence of philosophy. not in other words as the cessation of speaking (surely what he means by a psychological hesitation). 113). an entity beyond the trivial differentiations of sonorous versus graphic. the becoming visible of the word: the idea of language” (IP. describes as silence. While nature and animals are forever caught up in a language. We now know that this encounter most powerfully occurs at the end of the poem. philosophy’s word leaves unsaid its own silence” (IP. the idea of the rose. “but silence of the word itself. however.

for at the end of the poem. One could almost argue that the concept of enjambement in Agamben’s work is a graphic and thus grammatological presentation of what is unpresentable in Derrida’s work as a whole. Yet Agamben is a thinker of another order of perfect. Prose literally overwhelms poetry in the following line. and Agamben’s work seems similar in the way he establishes two oppositional concepts. Poetry. after a prolonged hesitation. There is. and literally collapses back into this alterity as the next line commences. no pure poetry.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN As Agamben says. rather. If one were to think back to the Derridean conception of invention. one is struck by how singularity is always immediately ruined by its repeatability. Poetry is literally elevated above its dyadic other at the end of the line. and leaves them suspended in an almost endless dynamic of supersession and negation. only to be literally interrupted and superseded at the line’s outermost point. to resume the semantic stream. which is also always the final line. there is no enjambement. but which is often termed deconstruction as a form of intellectual short-hand in quasitranscendental self-critical thought. is itself an impurity between poetic techniques and prose. Certainly Derrida is the thinker of a certain type of pure impurity.21 will continue its demonstration of deconstructive energies almost as an illustrative tool for Derrida’s work. pure impurity as indicated first by the way he structurally treats the semantic and the semiotic as ostensibly of the same order. Left to its own devices the poetry machine. semiotics and semantics. the end of the poem is marked by a change in the tension between the units of semiotics and semantics which is poetry. They are both units within an “almost intermittent dispute.” While clear that the semiotic and the semantic are both radically heterogeneous and of differing 162 . one condition always simultaneously the pre-condition and impossibility of the other. as I have termed it elsewhere. in fact. thus granting us finally access to the realm of pure poetry. but it is an unavoidable reality however unpleasant. ironically pure semiotics does not hold sway. At this point where the semiotics of the poetic line are unable. TENSION: THE ONE LINE The impurity of poetry surely seems an untenable position within a post-Heideggerian theorization of poetic singularity as a mode of thinking such as I am proposing here. in the final verse.

two tonoi of the same linguistic substance). suggesting that Agamben does not so much ignore the radical incommensurability between sense and matter. favouring instead a one dimensional and yet also trans-dimensional single line. Interestingly. Without quibbling over an extra dimension here and there. what we can be certain of is Agamben seems to take the geometric presence of poetry backwards away from two (three) dimensions. and finally a tension or tone. but intermittently. at the moment of deus ex machina. Rather. potentialityformation-having been constructed. Agamben naturally frames the issues with greater facility when he eloquently states: Everything is complicated by the fact that in the poem there are not. a line which metamorphoses first into a current. a model which echoes Agamben’s own description of operational time. the machine 163 . THE TURN OF VERSE orders of magnitude. as commit an act of violence to both so as to make them enter into the prison of the line with the promise of parole (enjambement for the semiotic. rescinded. which somewhat misleadingly he calls three-dimensional. the caesura for the semantic) constantly. repetitious mechanistic element of prosody with which we are all familiar. for example. dianoia and poiesis. The metaphor of flow is a well established one in reference to prosody and is essential to sustain the interruptive power of enjambement’s “sharp interval” in the form of mechane. two series or lines in parallel flight. which in reality means very uneasily. there is but one line that is simultaneously traversed by the semantic current and the semiotic current.ENJAMBEMENT. then a machine. The machine of poetry referred to here is not simply the technical. The semantic can just as easily occupy the unit of the line as the semiotic. (Sound and sense are not two substances but two intensities. Both are equally out of their element in the line. 114) Here Agamben gives supporting evidence to my earlier claim that the planar essence of poetry means that it must always be thought of as a two-dimensional plane consisting of the three points of the poetic line. And between these two currents lies the sharp interval obstinately maintained by poetic mechane. but also the ancient Greek origin of the term in relation to the end of a play. for Agamben they can both be fitted to a pattern of similar units. incipit-interruption-continuation. issues that would be strongly foregrounded by Derrida. strictly speaking. (EP.

unlike the deconstructive mechane. enjambement puts forward a theory of necessarily betrayed purity. enmeshed as it is into the very lines of prosody. Second that it is a theory of the obvious and its obviation. that instead they are two tones/tensions/stresses within the same linguistic substance? What linguistic substance can this be? Is this the language of which he speaks at the end of the poem. and like the trace it is a theory of intermittent and almost interminable spacing. but what does Agamben mean by suggesting that the semiotic and the semantic are not radically heterogeneous and different also in magnitude. tension. I am giddy. or the moment when the material copy of essence is abandoned and essence alone remains: Deus. Its complexities lie first in the apparent proximity of this theory and the work of Derrida.22 Yet unlike Derrida the impurity of the line is permanently under question. Tono in Latin is the tone. I need a gag. and a figuration of the literal implied transcendence at the end of every Greek work of art. especially in relation to invention and the trace. Am I flying through the second act or being carried beyond the play entirely and into the realm of the gods at the end of the third? I look across and I see you also suspended by the bodiless limb of a crane. In addition. thus it allows a literalization of a kind of localized transcendence. Obvious in two ways. Don’t come too close. I feel the tension of the tonoi of the line of poetry as it suspends me above the plane of the stage below. they may form knots. I have forgotten everything. The semiotic and the semantic are not differential terms but two tones within one single linguistic substance. which are separate strands but not different from each 164 . the zone wherein language can communicate itself “without remaining unsaid in what is said?” Is this a certain philosophical silence as linguistic substance as such? Agamben’s theory of enjambement is as complex as it is obvious.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN of art was regularly used both to end the work and also to allow characters to fly. the lines with get entangled. Like invention. We will plunge to our death unless the tension in the lines is maintained. Keep up the tension in the line. No wait. my lines and cues. and metre of verse. the tonoi of poetry. that way they can never become truly entangled. first that it marks out an axiom for poetics which we scholars of poetry can recognize. and its obviation in the recommencement of the line within the planar territory I am calling the poem. of the obstacle to sense that the premature line-ending constructs. flying.

This end. unlike perhaps in the work of Derrida. we experience messianic silence as the prefigured anaphora of absolute finitude of each local ending. Between silence in the line. Its unique combinatory structure of prefigured recursiveness is meaningless without a direct and complex relation with an absolute point of finitude: the end of the poem. in the endless falling into silence that defines the end of the poem. but the occupation of the time it takes time to end. in enacting an endlessly falling into silence rather than a structural point of cessation. is inserted into time as such or everyday vulgar temporality as Heidegger calls it.ENJAMBEMENT. At which point. something will happen. for Agamben this event will be the final event. not the end of time or even the very last event. In a form of agreement with Badiou. This is not to be conceived of eschatologically as one last event of course. for example at the end of the line. Instead in each instance of time the time of the end. Rather the messianic temporality of the interval is the interruptive event of the cessation of the temporal succession chronos-eschaton. eschatological silence. a messianic event. and of which we have a local example at the end of each line that is a psychological hesitation different in kind from silence as such but somehow its key. the time it takes for finitude to come to a point of tension or dissolution. THE TURN OF VERSE other. presents us with a messianic event of events. will come to an end as the poem must also come to an end. and the recursive cataphora that the poem experiences at the very moment of its negation through finitude. 165 . The poem excels in messianic temporality. chronological silence. however. and silence at the end of the poem. who himself admits to a sparse number of events. For time to come to an end it must find within itself the interval between prefigurement and recursiveness brought about by the impossibility and yet necessity of a local and structurally final relationship with silence. therefore. Unlike Badiou. for Agamben poetry is in preparation for the event to come.

As he says in caesuric cadence: “The rhythmic transport that gives the verse its impetus is empty. the element that arrests the metrical impetus of the voice. Agamben remarks on the “breaking action of the caesura” (IP. We now have a clear answer to a question I posed earlier. holds in suspense. the caesura—for a little—thinks. is thought” (IP. while for an instant the horse of poetry is stopped” (IP. more fundamental or alternate mode of thinking.” Speaking specifically of the Italian poet Sandro Penna. He takes Penna’s horse to be the voice or the word as utterance whose measured equine progress can only be arrested by the logos. This allows Agamben to note that “For the poet. Rather. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT THE CAESURA The essay proceeding directly from “The Idea of Prose. as pure word. Voice here is not the transport 166 . The place of thought in the poem is the caesura. Agamben declares this couplet to be a treatise on the subject of the caesura before composing one of his many allegories.CHAPTER 6 CAESURA. 43) represented by the couplet from Penna “I go towards the river on a horse / which when I think a little a little stops. 44). namely thinking as such. the caesura of verse.”1 Invoking an ancient European exegetical tradition which takes the horse to represent the “sound and vocal element of language” (IP. this thought is another. 43). 43). Yet thought within the context of the poetic line is not of equal measure to that of the thinking of philosophy one finds at the line’s limits as the semiotic steed of haltered poetics gives way to the license of discourse. And it is this emptiness which.” Agamben’s first attempt to define poetry in terms of enjambement is entitled “The Idea of Caesura. is only the transport of itself.

including the poem’s incipit. This pause most commonly occurs at the medial position. This congeniality within prosodic flow to its own negation except at poetic 167 . mid-line. in the essay “The Idea of Thought. Similarly. thought is not semantic discourse. the most common representation of caesuric pausing itself often reproduced in prosody by the so-called double pipes ||. considering that the Latin origins of the term caesura inculcate it into the violent rites of cutting and separation. On nothing other than that. Poetry is presented here as the sleep of thought and yet not until the poet is lulled by the cadence of hooves on grass and road can they be woken into thinking as such and that only when the horse of verse is arrested. Thus caesura was originally any displaced footing within the seamlessness of prosodic flow. and that it effects the ultimate violence to prosody by its interruption of linear flow.CAESURA. arrest. One such little sign in prosody is the comma. The classical definition of a caesura. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT of expression nor the silent Voice of metaphysical nihilism. If the voice in the poem is gestic transport as such the interruption of pure transport by thought is simply a moment wherein thinking is able to think the pure word without the imposed differentiation of word and world that so troubles the end of the line. the only venues within a line of poetry inhospitable to the caesura are at the beginning of the line. but a much more “poeticized” idea of thinking. and the end of the poem. for example. Surprisingly. where breath is lacking. a little sign remains suspended. is any word ending that did not coincide with the cessation of a metrical foot. and ecstatic thinking is presented in such a way that later in the book.” Agamben is able to conclude thus on thinking: “Where the voice drops. but there are also initial caesura that are imposed close to the beginning of the line and terminal caesura which occur close to or at the end of the line. here asleep on his horse. Yet the comma is not a necessary element of caesura. “The poet. hesitantly. awakens and contemplates for an instant the inspiration that carries him—he thinks nothing else but his voice”’ (IP. thought ventures forth” (IP. As we are well aware this is all Agamben craves and we might now name this as the essential precondition of all logopoiesis. not a pause for thought so much as a slight stumble. However its most common usage is of course the imposition of an audible pause within a line often but not always indicated by punctuation (in the Penna verse not for reasons peculiar to Italian prosody). but the infantile voice of language as such. Thus the interplay between flow. 104). 44). prose as we might name it.

In enjambement flow overtakes meaning and the space at the right hand side of the poem is negated by linear. demonstrating prosodic femininity here as “Matter too soft a lasting mark to bear. Over the many thousands of years of European prosody the caesura has been used to various effects. some to Pleasure take. By contrast in the caesura the steady and irresistible progress of verse is suspended by the merest hint of a sign. Thus the place for thinking is a space within verse that works directly in opposition to enjambement. The presupposed flow of the poetic line is interrupted by the imposition internally of semantics so that stress is cut across by meaning through regularized and predictable caesurae. But ev’ry Woman is at heart a Rake. transversal exuberance.2 The first “male” line uses caesura to emulate the poise of the couplet unit within the line balancing the oppositions of eighteenth-century bios: business and pleasure. In the ideal antithetical couplet a line is divided exactly in two by a caesura. some to public Strife. Men. operate as antithesis to the antithesis. Here is a particularly misogynistic and yet prosodically perfect example from Pope’s “Epistle to a Lady on the Characters of Women”: Men. in effect. But ev’ry Lady would be Queen for life. quiet and strife. In a sense this is the most perfect example of the tonos of poetry. terminal caesura can also be taken for true initial caesura. Then semiotics 168 .THE LITERARY AGAMBEN advent and total formal finitude suggests that caesura is an internal concern of the poem body. then bound together by rhyme to a second line which may echo the antithesis of the first or. to allow time for thought to think the conditions of its own transport and its dependence on arrest. but its greatest application is surely the double duality of the classical couplet revived in the English tradition by Dryden and Pope as the Heroic and eventually antithetical couplet. some to Bus’ness. here. enough to open a gap in flow. and in this momentary. Yet. Indeed the lack of caesura at the line’s incipit is simply a form of conventional display for.” each “odd” line eradicates harmony in terms of balance by making demonstrative an excess of one quality (pleasure) or unrealistic demands for which there can be no compromise: all women would be sovereign over a kingdom devoid of subjects. some to Quiet. ecstatic space.

one of the first and most instructive observations to be made is that the concept never gets defined as such. and its temporal-spatial matrix is the ultimate tonos of poetry in the service of the transport and arrest of thinking. of course. Meanwhile. then between interruption and flow.CAESURA. . If flow is the presupposition of the poem then the first caesura negates the semiotic in favour of the semantic. a three-way tension indeed. the implied separation between lines that occurs due to enjambement. life were what 169 . yet immediately in the second line flow inundates sense. in our culture. its transport. a temporal-spatial self-consciousness is mapped across the neutrality of these two terms. . with rhyme introducing a projective recursion that. through the agency of rhyme. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT is reinstated as flow commences and the artificiality of the line ending reminds one that the poem is more horse than waking. When with the second cut discourse is able to impose a damn on flow and pause for thought. The resumption of the line would then seem to be a victory for thinking. the next line is ready to burst its stops and race ahead. terminal enjambement of the perfectly balanced Heroic couplet designed to halt and formalize the profligacy of the endlessly over-running Miltonic couplet. The verse unit is born of a tension first between flow and interruption. arrest and flow. even the zero. is undermined by the coincidence of sound across two syllables and/or words located each time at the final point of the line. Yet at the instance of the cut we now know that meaning is interrupted not prosody. takes hold of the line and refers meaning back against the current to the preceding end word. at the same juncture prosody. As he says of the problematic of life as a definition of being in The Open: For anyone undertaking a genealogical study of the concept of “life” in our culture. At the same time. Agamben uses the term caesura regularly in his essays when speaking of the numerous and problematic acts of scission performed by negative metaphysics. as we now know. this thing that remains indeterminate gets articulated and divided time and again through a series of caesurae and oppositions . between thought. is indicative of messianic time but also the tabular trans-linear dimensionality not just of poetic structure but of poetic thinking as a whole. And yet. This tension. everything happens as if. The most fully developed and perhaps important of these caesurae is that to be found internal to the very definition of human ontology. life. Then.

Life then comes to stand not so much for something like biological existence. it comes to be the very definition of the problem of definition as such. except at the moments of poetic advent and finitude. Human life for Agamben. does not define human life per se but the idea of human life as both separate from and intrinsically linked to the animal. The caesura initially performs a negative function directly at odds with his earlier valorization of the term as the basis for thinking thought. for example. as he more commonly terms it. yet at the same time no caesura is momentous either. The interruption of thinking. The caesura is not possessed of finitude any more than of inventiveness or evental 170 . The same indeed is true of the end of the line and its relation to enjambement. (O. and yet as his comments show the essence of the caesura is not simply scission. precisely for this reason. No caesura is. the first division.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN cannot be defined. permanent. through the operations of the caesura as that which both divides and conjoins. resumption suspension. Life ceases to be a definition of something and instead. is meaningless and indeed inoperative until that division is divided from itself and cast back into linear flow. something we observed in relation to the (/) or barred caesura in the sign between gramma and phone. imposes upon it a permanent indistinction. 13) The caesura Agamben is considering here is that between the human and the animal. In the poem body suspension always results in resumption. Yet. rather than defining the term life here. in this manner. and rather stands for its own inability to take on definition as the energetic source of its ongoing productive presence in ontology as the basis of that which both divides and articulates. must be ceaselessly articulated and divided. then it articulates lineation as the transport of thinking. This more developed definition of caesura as a mode of thinking division in terms of relation now allows us to return to prosodic caesura and see that when Agamben uses the term caesura in metaphysics he is being more than simply metaphorical. the cut and the cut of the cut.3 First the caesura divides the line. namely in-definition or. if we look again at the definition of life in terms of caesura we find a productive negation. Rather the caesura in separating a term off with the desire of imposing definitional distinction instead inculcates said term into a mechanism of division and articulation which. In terms of the act of caesura within the poem we perceive that there are always two cuts. yet. indistinction.

all reliant on the counting and positioning of stress: (line a) caesura. Here earth and water. vanish’d now so long. Rather. enjambement. the section in question also provides the perfect razo de trobar of prosody summarized by the phrase “harmoniously confused. Unexpectedly perhaps. were my breast inspir’d with equal flame. and look green in song: These. This is both true of poetic caesurae and the general logic of the caesura such as one finds in The Open or indeed between zoe and bios in Homo Sacer and State of Exception (2003). the woodland and the plain. Aside from being a masterclass in the extendibility and power of caesuric prosody. and the same is true of life. One is always already in the midst of poetry. But as the world. And where. should be like in fame”. / Here earth and water. at the same time every two lines 171 . the medio or mean point. 20) Here we can observe basic antithesis across a caesura. (SP. harmonious oxymoronic implied semantic caesura “harmoniously confus’d: / Where order in variety we see”. double caesuric antithesis. Live in description. tho’ all things differ. seem to strive again”. “And where. harmonious whole. The tone of balance resides in the perfect tension of the four combined and yet separate units. This world of harmonious tension is both described and performed in the opening lines of Pope’s “Windsor Forest”: The groves of Eden. enjambement. the caesura always cuts in the midst. all agree. seem to strive again. should be like in fame. Here hills and vales. (line b) caesura. Like them in beauty.CAESURA.” This last is perhaps the best prosodic-graphematic demonstration of the stanza of messianic time in that the antithesis is embedded within an extended caesuric zone between the first and second comma. “like them in beauty. “Here hills and vales. and finally the caesuric cut of the cut internalized in the space of one line. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT status. Not Chaos like together crush’d and bruis’d. all agree. result in classical poetics in a perfectly balanced. the woodland and the plain. the cut and the cut of the cut. harmoniously confus’d: Where order in variety we see. tho’ all things differ. these two acts of violence.” While Pope conjures for us a world of balance encased in the harmony of the bi-linear couplet.

Unlike the caesura where thought interrupts poetry. while enjambement is equal to chronos in that at the point of the line’s eschaton it overleaps finitude and imposes a retrograde return to sense. but in most sophisticated prosody there is a wide use of initial and terminal caesurae. concomitantly the first caesura is always a touch weakened in that one is already thinking ahead to its rhyme and also the strong sense of local completion the couplet always provides. however. and yet also recursive. If every second caesura is more forceful in that it cataphorically holds back flow. in rhyme thought and language combine to produce a word-based semiotics that is both predictive. The caesura of English tends also to the medial rising to a degree of compulsarity in Old and Middle English verse. in that it interrupts the linear progression of the line. semiotic consonance. it provides the semiotic rules to sense what the next rhyme might be. For rhyme. while powerfully semiotic.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN there is a moment of cataphoric recursion as the second rhyme is tabulated backwards to its previous rhyme partner. before the push and pull of lineation can continue. sura cannot occur is within the word (as I have just demonstrated). in French Alexandrines. and indeed that is all they are gestic and meaningless prosodic devices. at the moment of reading on into meaning development one always lags behind in some manner in sonic. interruption and flow retain poetic tonos. gathers within itself the recursion of that which went before. Yet the inclusion of rhyme suggests instead a messianic moment that does not rise out of this stuttering continuum but uncovers a solution to the metaphysical logic of the caesura internal to the poem itself. is dependent on semantics to perform. or enjambement where the obverse is true. Left to their own devices. and thus the shifting of the metrical–musical element between semiotics (langue) and semantics (parole) becomes the metrical–musical–semantic element. What is significant here is the means by which rhyme provides the potential solution to the tensile cut of the cut of the caesura– enjambement matrix. Although Agamben does not consider it in these terms. The caesura represents the eschaton. say. unless one ends the poetic line with the first sy/Llable and commences the next with the second. but 172 . The caesura of classical prosody tends to what is called the medial but this is not compulsory as. the couplet contains the very basis of poetry’s capability to think through the tabular-planar metrical agency of a continuation that contains within it the projection of its ending and a cut or completion that. The only place internal to the poem that a cae.

For those of us well versed in prosody this is highly satisfying as it is true that an enjambement 173 . Similarly the end of the poem. Where the poem begins is of another order to where it ends and the two edges of its finitude will never meet. There are. perpetually meeting and departing from their assignation. The poem as a whole or thing is not. therefore. even if the poem is part of a sequence. Logopoiesis is an internal affair that occurs inside verse but which does not delimit verse. so too the beginning of a poem does not take up the line from the end of the last poem. The two edges of a poem’s frame will never meet. What does the terminally or edge-restricted mobility of the caesura tell us? Certainly that the poem’s advent is not a continuation or a type of universal poetic flow. a cyclical loop. these at the moment of advent and finitude. the presence of messianic time within the poem is dependent on a traditional and to some degree problematic designation of the poem as a strictly delimited body. a frame at all for it has no continuity. Also of some significance is the fact that all caesuric cuts occur “after” flow. In this way. This is in contradistinction to the end of one line and the commencement of the next which are always in communion with each other. The spacesilence made parergonal frame around the poem is not. is not a pause but an endless falling into the silence of philosophy on the part of poetry. therefore. even if they are poems in a sequence. If enjambement instigates the event of the poetic by interrupting discourse with voice and semiotic material rhythm. in this light. the parergon will always slice open the finitude of the ergon. or the line.CAESURA. Just as the end of the line has no commonality to the incipit due to the ban on the caesura at the point of the line’s inception. or a meta-linear version of its localized prosodic effects of flow and interruption. Poems are not rocks. never before it. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT even this is that peculiar form of terminal caesura called enjambement. If they are in possession of finitude then not of this order. as we have seen. is interrupted by thought or by the silence that is apparently endemic to contemporary thinking. a miniaturized rule of some value when one comes to consider the very limits of the ergon. similarly voice. poems are not of the same order as flowers. two forms of exterior space to the poem body. contrary to its internal structure. Therefore. The caesura is the essential complement to enjambement. so that the point of the end of the line is radically dissimilar to its incipit. only two operative interdictions on caesuric scission. There are. and two forms of silence cocooning the voice.

of the parallelism of the comparison. or the next. You will recall he is speaking here of the tensile harmony to be located in the work of Heraclitus. leading Agamben to look to the Greek sense of harmonia as “a laceration that is also a suture. the idea of a tension that is both the articulation of a difference and unitary” (ST.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN more likely than not either follows from or is followed by a caesura. The line arrested in the centre is the reversal of this flood of semiotics. Enjambement only occurs at moments when the thought is too big for the line pushing the caesura into the middle of the next line. for example. Thus enjambement works like a stone cast into a still pool. Concomitantly. This hesitation is two-fold because the manner in which language has been lost to us is double. either to thought or to poetry. a caesura midline leaves few syllables in the line to commence a new thought making another enjambement very probable. 157). The line broken at the end then is the influx of the voice inundating thought and for a moment erasing it. intermittent and hesitant silence. As is regularly commented on. the ideal of the poetic line is the exact match between syllables and thought so that all caesurae occur at the end of the line. stopping the flow and for a second eradicating the voice entirely with a momentary. This simple consonance of oppositions is now clearer to us being typical. the next. or even in the case of real thinkers such as Milton and Wordsworth. APOTROPAICS Lurking in the final words of Stanzas is Agamben’s early summation of his appreciation of the necessity to turn to poetry to resolve certain issues pertaining to negativity that had scuppered the great hulk of metaphysics in its journey towards the thing as such of thought. It also conveys the messianic moment of a stilled 174 .4 Agamben’s reasoning for this symbiotic relation between interruption and overflowing would be that both caesura and enjambement stem from different pathways to the same. its ripples spreading out through the lines and the calm surface of the poem taking some time/ lines to settle down once more. momentarily held. event: the prolonged hesitation between sound and sense that constitutes poetry. A control of this rhythmic effect is an additional prosody still relatively mysterious to literary criticism which I have termed “line measure” or the metrical counting of the line as a rhythmic unit rather than solely the syllable.

“back” then. it transpires. While within the acoustical realm—the originary voice of poetry before it was split. then silenced by philosophy—there was the harmony between interruption and flow. appropriated. the harmonious confusion of caesura as a division that combines. is the Idea of Prose that is manifest in the early work and reconstituted first as potentiality and then as messianic time in the later. a double harmony. (ST. which. the visible and the acoustic. locating harmony as a basis for being in concealment within the visible realm. philosophy playing the role of visibility/interruption. This harmony of harmonies. in the passage from the visible to the acoustic aspect of language. Of this Agamben says. the cut that is cut. were not placed on either side of a false bar or division as is articulated in the theory of the sign. not the eradication of division and unity but the tensile suspension of the metaphysical foundational categories of difference and identity. Within the visible realm of being—being has always been confined in our tradition to a monstrative and (in)visible entity—there was the harmony between being as concealed and its momentarily appearing. if I read this compacted section correctly. and remember harmony here means just as much division as it does unification. where it is still possible to discern the solidarity between signification and metaphysical articulation. therefore. I am speculating. “Faithful to this apotropaic project. speaking of Heidegger’s rediscovery of the harmony of harmonies between philosophy and poetry. but also the rule of poetry which is defined by the tension between interruption and flow. There was. when thought and poetry. for Heraclitus. should then be transferred to the numericalacoustic sphere. Speaking of the term harmony in Heraclitus Agamben notes that for the Greek the idea of harmony pertained precisely to its invisibility. 157) There was a time. whose signification had appeared to the dawning of Greek thought 175 . and poetry invisibility/flow. He then adds: That this articulation. Thus there was philosophical harmony mirrored by poetic harmony and then a harmony between the two. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT dialectic. Then there was the harmony between the monstrative and acoustical harmonies with. One can now also see that harmony not merely names an ideal state of being in the universe as it did for the Greeks.CAESURA. testifies to a decisive turn in Western thought. Harmony names. still belongs to the tactile-visible sphere.

that which attracts and repels. the enigma of the order of a sign. For truth to be unveiled it must first have been obscured by a sheet or material barrier. Thus every truth is a form of enigma facilitated by the double 176 . Considering the story of Oedipus and the Sphinx in Stanzas. crucial to his overall overcoming of metaphysics as I hope I have now shown. we cannot but approach that which must. In this instant full presence becomes unavailable to view and the Greek activity of aletheia commences the strange affiliation called philosophy. The sign is of the order of an enigma. is based on an impossible filiation therein to the fact that presence comes to philosophical thought as already divided. as Agamben concedes. Aletheia’s unveiling of truth moves one to the very heart of the almost awkward formulation of truth as unconcealedness which so dominates Heidegger’s work. If there were no secret then there needs must be no solution. Logopoiesis names little more than this at this stage in its development: an apotropaic harmony between poetic flow and philosophical interruption. It makes perfect sense. If the labyrinth is as an open plane then the thread of its solution and dissolution need not be painstakingly unspooled in the terror of darkness. called up at the moment that presence as such is split in two.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN as a mode of speaking that was neither a gathering nor a concealment. For the truth to be unveiled it must first be transmitted through a sheet or material barrier.5 We are now more than familiar with the fracture of presence alluded to here. 157). The relation between poetry and thinking in Agamben. shares a good deal in common with the more familiar rhetorical designation of the enigma. but a mode of speech in which the original fracture of presence was alluded to in the paradox of a word that approaches its object while keeping it indefinitely at a distance” (ST. Agamben is unhappy with the way that the enigma of the Sphinx has been placed beneath the transparent sign of the Oedipal interpretation: “What the Sphinx proposed was not simply something whose signified is hidden and veiled under an ‘enigmatic’ signifier. The presence of the sign is. is the apotropaic structure of all logopoiesis. The apotropaic. 138). remain at a distance” (ST. which also explains why poetry matters to Agamben and also helps clarify his many valuable comments on the technicalities of prosody. ratified in the discipline of philosophy. for the moment. Speaking of the foundation of philosophy Agamben notes that the Western experience of being.

to a protective power that repels the uncanny. has valorized the very quality of interpretation over the fact of the enigma as such. letting in Space.CAESURA. the light From the lighthouse that protects as it pushes us away. Oedipus. and Western thought since then. Early in the Morning. by attracting it and assuming it within itself. . which he has misinterpreted by interpreting its apotropaic intention as the relation of an oblique signifier and a hidden signified” (ST. but a more original mode of speaking. An apotropaic verse. (ST. Oedipus’ sin was not incest but “hubris toward the power of the symbolic in general . therefore. 138). a philosophy dependent on an idea of language has totally missed the glaring fact that the power of the enigma lies elsewhere in the presence of the semiotic within the enigma of the sign. . and conceptual even-ness: And so each day Culminates in merriment as well as a deep shock like an electric one. and books with no author. 138) If this is the case. that is.6 177 .” that ends with a shocking apocalypse for such a poet of tonal. prosodic. structural. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT hindrance of matter. is the model of this relation with the uncanny that is expressed in the enigma. Agamben suggests. the enigma belongs to the sphere of the apotropaic. is a poetics of the enigma as that which is not available for solution. which leads to the heart of that which is held at a distance. Presupposing the enigma as a sign that needs to be made to signify. One of the great contemporary works of logopoietic apotropaicism is John Ashbery’s much-admired “Down by the Station. and like the Sphinx that utters it. fable) of the ainigma is not only obscurity. As the wrecking ball bursts through the wall with the book shelves Scattering the works of famous authors as well as those Of more obscure ones. Like the labyrinth. Returning to the enigma now. Agamben goes on to state: The ainos (story. The name of both these obstructions is rather obvious: the sign. like the Gorgon. The dancing path of the labyrinth. or a maze which has no centre point or any point of exit/entrance. and an extraneous babble from the street Confirming the new value the hollow core has again.

form and theme merge into harmony precisely through their being manifestly at odds. Babelian tower of language. Or is Ashbery merely revealing the enigma of the very fact of the warning or the apotropaic nature of 178 . I feel I can guide a passage through. Indeed are not all enigmas thus doubled-up? The image draws you in. and the enigma of naming. as in all eidos it literally calls your attention to it and by implication suggests that it is a metaphor for the hollow core of the decimated. “a dull crinkled leather that no longer exists. The manifestation of the lighthouse is a double enigma. That the resumption of the semantic in the next line should comment directly on the semiotic “space” is typical of the profound boustrophedonic verse only rare writers can perform. If the hollow core is as the lighthouse. and more specifically in classrooms around the globe the enigma of the poem “Down by the station early in the morning. then one is drawn towards the core and simultaneously repelled. babble) and the semantic which typifies Agamben’s axiom. for years. always leads my students and myself interminably across two verses which. and nonsense. Here it takes the form of enjambement. The line break after “letting in” admits the essential material presence of space foundational to poetic tension. as the line folds back on itself. and the almost enjambed terminal caesura in the penultimate line suggests precisely this. space. Indeed. and even then / It may not have existed” (W. As the wrecking ball demolishes the walls of a book-lined labyrinth of enigmas one presumes is a library. ontology. labyrinthine structure of the wrecked library. / And nothing does. Here. 14). memory. space. a deliberation on impermanence. to the sudden collapse of all pedagogic certainty in the final stanza cited here. I have laboured over both the enigma that is Ashbery. it would appear. in a moment of supreme post-modern self-consciousness. Following on from space comes the loaded term “babble. while dense.” This work. The poem. remembering. is a comment on the tension between the semiotic (enjambement. until you name it. like Oedipus and Ariadne trapped in some terrible union neither dares to seek annulment for.” an extraneous pure semiotic noise the result of the collapse of the single. Ashbery admits into the work the essence of the poetic: the semiotic.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN As can be seen here Ashbery’s verse has always been marked by that which Agamben terms the apotropaic order of the enigma. and yet the poem’s final image seems to resist an endless falling into silence. In some senses Ashbery has found the only solution to the paradox of the end of the poem.

of which Ashbery is the master. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT the enigma? In drawing attention to itself. within the enigma one finds the only instance within signification wherein the semiotic and the semantic are suspended without falling into silence all due to the presence of the semiotic. Ashbery’s comments on ontological inexistence are “instructive” in this regard in the way they maintain the impossible to resolve caesura between phone and logos to be found in the sign and emulated in prosody. In an enigma one encounters the mystery of the uncanny in the form of a rebus to which not only is there no solution but whose very puzzlement is its truth. .” cyclically resumes at the poetic incipit. . but it also gathers them together in the same parallel space of stanzaic comparison revealing what may have already been suspected that the bar of the sign (/) and the double pipes of the caesura || are in fact of the same grammatological order. Rather.CAESURA. remembering . and yet also the enigma of how phone can precede logos if it is a recursive act of memory: naming something as a prophylaxis against the inexistence we are all moving towards. gathers us by actually rejecting us. as many works do such as “L’infinito. which protects us and seems almost to gather us to its bosom. He says in relation to that which no longer exists “And nothing does. I would attempt to say three things about this blinding moment of logopoiesis. The enigmatic in verse. until you name it. What the uncanny unearths is not that there is no solution. The poem neither concludes nor. As regards the apotropaic structure of the enigma the elegance of Agamben’s formulation remains a thing of beauty. .” combining the impossibility of logos preceding phone (nothing exists until you name it). nor that there is a solution. Just as the issue of the suspense of the endless deferral of signification occurs within the poetic line expressly at the moment of its finitude. but that there can be an unresolved relation between the two. the bar within the sign between phone and logos. This leads to my second comment on the sign as fundamentally apotropaic in structure or. the possibility 179 . The first is of the order of the enigma. Certainly the bar divides poetry from thinking in a manner Agamben finds repulsive. The third and final point is that by ending with an apotropaic Ashbery is able to endlessly defer the end of the verse while simultaneously suspending the poem within the very tension that Agamben suggests it is impossible to be suspended within. the light of the lighthouse. is indeed as Agamben suggests not there to be solved but persists so as to retain within itself the presence of the problem as such. to be more precise.

that which can be found internal to the poem and of course Derridean spacing as such in the form of the trace. At the point when one reaches one’s final state and fulfils one’s own destiny. Meanwhile: “under the sign of the Sphinx must be placed every theory of the symbol that. There is. In The Coming Community the short essay “Ease” speaks of the Talmudic tradition of the reservation of two places for each person in Eden and Gehenna (Hell). semiotics and semantics are post-Oedipal thinkers. This glimpse first opened up by the enigma is the very harmony between poetry and philosophy essential to prosodic harmony and the wider apotropaic comparison of logopoiesis as such. 138–9). focuses its attention above all on the barrier between signifier and signified that constitutes the original problem of signification” (ST. its being in 180 . space is what he describes as the space of ease. that which exists between the signifier and the signified within the sign. Those who seek to define signification as that which occurs as a relation between code and solution. Speaking of the inheritance of Oedipus Agamben divides our epoch into two tendencies. one finds oneself for that very reason in the place of the neighbour. a fourth order of space in Agamben’s work located to the side of the poem in a space that does not quite mark the limit of the text nor quite exist interior to the line either. refusing the model of Oedipus. however.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN of this proposition rests upon a second line. The first is more than familiar to we Oedipal decoders of poetic and literary Sphinxes. signifier and signified. 139). This enigmatic. EASE: THE PROXIMATE SPACE Thus far we have spoken of space in terms of that which surrounds borders the poem. in the full sense of the term. What is most proper to every creature is thus its substitutability. Agamben in this early treatise provides a “glimpse of what a semiology freed from the mark of Oedipus and faithful to the Saussurian paradox would finally bring to the ‘barrier resistant to signification’” (ST. 139). Citing specifically the “Hericlitean project of an utterance that neither ‘hides’ nor ‘reveals’ but rather ‘signifies’ the unsignifiable conjunction (synapsis) between presence and absence” (ST. They seek to exit the maze into which they wished they had never been entered by their masters. Agamben notes that the topology of interest here resides not between Eden and Gehenna but within “the adjacent place that each person inevitably receives.

the work of Blanchot. the empty place where each can move freely. common space of singularity. One crucial factor is that the space of ease brings together the technical aspects of prosodic space as we have been analysing with earlier debates on poetic desubjectivization. This semantico-etymological constellation excavates for us the relation of the opportune to the location of the harbour in favourable winds to which one moves. adjacentia). its being whatever—in other words. 181 . therefore. which soon enough we will locate within the poem. Further useful consonance between prosodic space and considerations of desubjectivization and language arrives in the mode in which Agamben goes on to describe the origins of the word ease: “The term ‘ease’ in fact designates. but it is necessary to allow one to comprehend the centrality of space in Agamben’s ideas on poetry. Ease is the proper name of this unrepresentable space” (CC. 25). Forgive this digression into the biopolitical realm of the ethics of alterity. They move to one side of who they are to a space of singular self-negation. as well as Derrida’s post-Lévinasian ethics of alterity and hospitality and.7 In the space of ease. at one’s ease (slowly). under sail or beneath the effects of music. but rather on the universal substitutability of singularity as non-representable (lacking in individuality). An avenue of enquiry that moves Agamben to a conclusion that Badaliya and the Talmud allow for a possibility of a community based not on non-substitutable individuality. such as it is. the space adjacent (ad-jacens. The space of ease delineates. the subject as individual is alienated from identity without succumbing to biological indetermination. moving at ease) and convenience borders on the correct relation” (CC. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT any case in the place of the other” (CC. but describing a complex. in a semantic constellation where spatial proximity borders on opportune time (ad-agio. according to its etymology. He then traces this idea in reference to a Christian community founded in the last century by Arabist Louis Massignon called Badaliya whose name was derived from the Arabic for substitution. “the coming to itself of each singularity. This leads to the potentiality of a new ethical topography no longer delineated around oppositions and individuals. the topography of kle or the vocation of ¯sis subjective revocation. for good measure. 23). The ostensible purpose of this essay is clear within a collection on community that takes up dialogue with Nancy’s work on the coming community and being-with.CAESURA. although I am sure these issues are not unfamiliar. 25).


It also presents the original meaning of convenience as coming together or natural fittedness of things with other things. Thus ease is a temporal, spatial space to the side that gives one time/space to come to things, to step to one side, gain time, make space and so on. This sense of ease as a proximation and facilitation, opening up, making space for space, taking time to experience time, explains the centrality of the term for the origins of European prosody. Agamben therefore goes on to explain: “The provençal poets (whose songs first introduce the term into Romance languages in the form aizi, aizimen) make ease a terminus technicus in their poetics, designating the very place of love…not so much the place of love, but rather love as the experience of taking-place in whatever singularity” (CC, 25). Now we can begin to see that ease is supportive facilitation in the manner in which we have come to see love for the troubadour tradition. Love here is unattainable precisely because it is the medium, support, or space to the side that facilitates attainment as such but which itself, therefore, can never be possessed. Agamben speaks of a similar experience when he considers stil novist poetics, in particular Dante’s famous pursuit of the subjectposition called Beatrice. Beatrice is the name of the amorous experience of the event of language at play in the poetic text itself. She is thus the name and the love of language, but of language understood not in its grammaticality but, rather, in its radical primordiality, as the emergence of verse from the pure Nothing . . . It is because of its absolute originality that speech is the supreme cause and object of love and, at the same time, necessarily transient and perishable. (EP, 58) Such an understanding of speech as primordial, transient, and perishable relates, in Agamben’s work, to Dante’s reformulation of a central Humanist debate over the vernacular and grammar “that is, between the experience of the originary and secondary status of the event of language (or again between love of language and knowledge of language)” (EP, 54).8 Moving backwards through the arguments of the essay “The Dream of Language” where these quotes are couched we find ourselves gazing on an obscure fifteenth-century text, the Hypnerotomachia Polifili (1499), an image from which adorns the English translation of The End of the Poem. Agamben



focuses our attention on the later debate around the language of this text which seems to be made up from a fusion of grammar (Latin) and the vernacular (what was to become modern Italian). The result, he assures us, is an awkward mismatch of Latin grammar and vernacular lexicon of which Agamben comments that the singularity of this text “is a matter not of agrammatical discourse but rather of a language in which the resistance of names and words is not immediately dissolved and rendered transparent by the comprehension of the global meaning; hence the lexical element remains isolated and suspended for a few seconds, as dead material, before being articulated and dissolved in the fluid discourse of sense” (EP, 46). Agamben usefully likens this effect to the use of the word in Mallarmé before going on to note the qualities of the vernacular that make it so central to the role of the space of ease as love in all poetry. Glossing on Dante’s Convivio he remarks that “the vernacular can only follow ‘use’ not ‘art’; and it is, therefore, necessarily transient and subject to continual death. To speak in the vernacular is to precisely experience this incessant death and rebirth of words, which no grammar can fully treat” (EP, 54). What Agamben is tracing here along admittedly obscure defiles, aside from the complex simultaneous development of the idea of language and poetry within European culture from the thirteenth to fifteenth centuries, is the double stream of language which we have already become familiar with, only this time reconfigured away from the becoming-planar of the line towards the point of the word. The vernacular in the Hypnerotomachia Polifili resembles Mallarmé’s verse as I said in that “words stand out in isolation while their semantic values are suspended” (EP, 46), precisely because the vernacular lexicon has not yet been assimilated into a vernacular grammar. This will not happen until Latin truly becomes a dead language and the vernacular becomes a grammar at which point one gazes on two senses of what it means for a language to die. For Latin it means that it becomes a kind of pure langue or a complete grammar that has no actual usage. In contrast, the vernacular is pure parole in that words are used for the love of language, the words themselves, before they are reformulated in relation to definition and syntax. Love, therefore, is to experience the imminent vernacular in all language, a primordiality of pure usage before grammar died wherein words rise up and then die away again. This is an atactic language freed of grammar, for



what is grammar but an obviation of the need for syntax? Grammar is pure structure in which the specificity of the sign is totally irrelevant. The development of the vernacular into grammar by the death of grammar in the form of Latin allows us to see, as if for the first time, words for their own sake as purely vernacular. All of which forces us to now reconsider Agamben’s definition of the stanza as the “capacious dwelling, receptacle,” or womb of art. The stanza like a room is gifted with a certain set of spatial co-ordinates it being an enclosed space within a wider enclosure of space, the house, which is itself an enclosure of space surrounded by an illimitable space, the world, founded on the earth. The stanza, therefore, is a ventricle within the very conception of interiority and just as lineation rehearses the abyssal event of the end of the poem, so the stanza seems to act out the irresolvable aporetic relationship between interiority and exteriority which is, of course, modern philosophy. The stanza contains within its walls a double paradox. It is the material marking of an enclosure of space and also occupies the inside of the inside providing us now with a third messianic structure, not that of time as such, nor poetic time, but the interiority of space between space as enclosure (“eschatological” space) and space as endless extension and continuum (“chronological” space). While Agamben calls this the womb, he could, of course, have designated it with the Greek name chora.9 Now we are at our ease, our work here nearly done. Primed as we are to exit art and finally crack the puzzle of the maze of thought, let us pause for a moment on the complex entity that is called, in our tradition, the poem. What is a poem? A poem is made up of poetry that exists within the tension between the semiotic and semantic that occurs at the premature interjection of space as both temporal pause and spatial presence creating the line. This gesture of interruption is then reversed in boustrophedonic mode so that the seamless flow of metre is interrupted by the caesuric pause of thought. Thus a poem consists of the movement between two syntaxes, ignoring for now which take precedence: prose—poetry—prose and poetry—prose— poetry. Also overlooking the further complexity that spacing is a precondition for all writing and exists in equal measure between each sign and within each sign, we now advance propositionally to the centrality of the end of the poem, wherein the micro tensile oscillation of poetry is writ large and catastrophic. Agamben is clear that



the end of the poem is the end of verse which means also always the end of a verse or stanza. The end of the poem is, therefore, triply the end of poetry, the end of lineation, and the end of stanzation. As can be seen by this definition the end of the poem cannot come to an end as a propositional statement without a full understanding of the stanza. The first thing to note in this regard is that the end of the poem occurs, paradoxically, in a medial position by virtue of the stanza (as I said the end is central). The end of each line is different from the end of the last line, Agamben assures us, and so too must it be the case that the end of the stanza is an ending of a different order. It would be tempting to ascribe the end of the stanza as a miniature disaster and in a semiotic sense it can seem as such, but in fact the stanza is not a vertical form. The space at the end of the stanza is only one quarter of the relevant space for a stanza must have four walls revealing that the spatiality between stanzas is not one of finality but proximity. A stanza, in fact, is not a unit of poetry at all but a unit of sense, part of the syllogistic globalization of meaning promised by the poem and ruined by its finitude.10 As such there is a different relation to space in the stanza to that of the poem as verse or line. The stanza is known, therefore, for what it can contain, for its jug-like capaciousness, and as a receptacle it transcends or somehow avoids the temporal-spatial linearity of versification providing an internal, fractal, Chinese-box nested form of spatiality that endlessly defers ending by the act of turning in on itself in a process of almost endless reduction and insertion. The stanza provides the space of ease but where does this spatiality reside within the receptacle or around it? Is its spatiality that of the page/tablet, the parergonal forces of title, frame, and so on; or is it literally over there, to the side, located in the semi-mythical righthand margin of the Western poetic tradition?11 Thus far I have summarized the relation of poetry to space around four spatialities: frame space, the pause at the end of the line, spacing as such, and the space into which the poem is endlessly falling that Agamben terms silence. There is, however, a fifth space here located in no one location within the poem but which cuts across and is inserted into all spacing. This space is what I am terming the space of ease as facilitated by the technicus terminus of the poem as such as determined by the pure love of the word as such, as mere matter, pure signification, dead stuff . . .




In the essay “‘Corn’: from Anatomy to Poetics” Agamben traces the philology of an obscure term used in troubadour poetry: corn, or arse (specifically a woman’s). Agamben, alive to the rather suspect humour here, also shows that how, over time, a term referring to the female anatomy, corn, comes also, as cors, to represent the metrical unit of poetry as such. This odd transformation, although no odder than many similar semantic shifts, possibly stems from the tradition of equating the woman’s body to that of the poem, which we have already commented on in relation to the stanza as a kind of womb. Over time the term corn has come to stand for what is called the unrelated rhyme wherein an apparently unrhymed word in one stanza is later found to rhyme with a word in a subsequent stanza. This may seem obscure, indeed it is for Agamben the philologist who works hard to recuperate the meaning of this term, but as the essay progresses we come to realize that corn is an essential companion to the verse which, in relation to enjambement, has become so crucial to us in this discussion. If the etymological meanings of verse in the Latin versus explain so much about poetry, so too the potential meanings for corn as “tip,” “extremity,” “corner,” and “angle” open up a whole new aspect like an interior wall removed to flood a dull space with light. Now we can freely state that verse is the folding back of the line on itself, while corn is the retention of the line break as a break or exteriorized caesura. Corn allows one to see the extremity of the line at the same time as one sees it folding over to become, at least momentarily, prose. So what is corn? It is both verse and not verse, resembling something more like a remnant of verse at the moment of verse’s collapse into sense. Corn as a term retains the cut or tear in the fabric of meaning from which poetry attains its lasting power and significance but it is not verse as such. Corn is the corner of the room, what is left over as the line breaks. Undoubtedly it presents risk for the poem as it interrupts the semiotic precedence with that which is neither semantic nor apparently semiotic, which is why Agamben asserts that for the corn to function meta-strophically it must find its rhyme later in the poem. If corn did not find its rhyme it would cataphorically be revealed to be, after the end of the poem, in some sense a premature end resulting in the tension of verse dissipating prematurely and yet also, belatedly in its retrospective realization.

in a wider sense referring to any larger structural unity within a work. if not a disjunction between semiotic event (the repetition of sounds) and semantic event. of course. disenchanted. One thing this observation allows is a more prominent place for rhyme within Agamben’s linear definition of poetry: “What is rhyme.CAESURA. 31). a writer who elevated corn to a metastrophic dominance in the development of the stanzaic form of the sestina in which. that between sound and sense” (EP. weakens the rhyme. Corn distributes the tension of the poem across two different spatialities that accord. namely. the importance of corn is not merely related to the means by which we can bring structure into the work for it also ushers in the predominance of writing into poetry. it can find only a formal correspondence?” (EP. The rhyme is still there but located at what has traditionally been called the harmonic rather than melodic level. The greater the distance between the first instance of the rhyme and its second. transforms the unrelated rhyme into the principle of a higher relation” (EP. Of Arnaut’s sestina Agamben asserts “he is the poet who treats all verses as ‘corns’ and who. The harmonic effects of corn. cannot be heard and therefore must ultimately be read. and graphematics. 34). No poem can 187 . THE SPACE OF THOUGHT Corn is the poetic term for what can otherwise be termed structure. with a wider understanding of what poetry is. such that the mind searches for an analogy of sense in the very place where. as Agamben goes on to concede an understanding of corn as a rupture of the poetic body based on disjuncture between first harmonic and melodic textures and then. by thus rupturing the closed unity of the strophe. because of this. and allows us to move through the poem at a point between local and apocalyptic. I am calling this higher relation structure here because it cuts across the localized effects of the semiotic/semantic tension. Then again. Agamben proceeds to look at the work of Arnaut in this regard. Taken within this context corn becomes an essential point of transition not only for poetry but also Agamben’s overall philosophy. opening up a level of harmony. structure. of course. It takes us away from the localized issue of the line break versus the abyssal logic of the end of the poem. the harder it becomes to hear the rhyme. every rhyme is delayed. As the corn delays rhyme until a later stanza it. by definition. between orality and writing. 35). Structure is the trans-tensile containment of the obviousness of the poetic definition Agamben furnishes us with. In addition. “cannot be understood if it is not situated in the context of a different formal register.

This space. Agamben is finally able to conclude that “Insofar as it opens . the fifth trans-poetic tabular space. almost in astonishment. and his later choice to call the unrelated rhyme or corn the clavis or key. At this juncture we must return one more time to Dante and his discussion of the structure of the canzone cited by Agamben. which of course calls to mind the womb. . Based on two metaphors Dante utilizes. This is most readily found in poetry specifically in the material presence of an articulate space at the right hand of every lineated poem. 188 . 36). This is the space of ease or that space into which the poem moves at the local. asserts: “Dante thus conceives of the structure of the canzone as founded on the relation between an essentially semantic. we can say that the space of ease opens the subject to the potentiality of their own singularity shared in common with all other self-alienated and thus singular beings. we are informed. partial units” (EP. with the caesura we have discourse.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN be complete unless. With enjambement we have lineation. global unit and essentially metrical. and with corn we have the word. The unrelated rhyme forces one to concede that the poem exists in space and time beyond the power of its voicing. one does not take into consideration the means by which words are distributed through the poem based on alternative patterns. sequential level into the tabular. the closed formal womb of the stanza. the unrelated rhyme (the corn!) constitutes a threshold of passage between the metrical unity of ars and the higher semantic unity of sententia” (EP. multi-dimensional. where he opposes cantio as a unit of sense (sententia) to stanza as a purely metrical unit (ars). the bodily metaphor of the lap “For just as the canzone is in the lap of its subject-matter so the stanza enlaps its whole technique” (EP. To sum up this long and complex series of arguments. Ease is also a superlative example of logopoiesis. . 35). is likened in traditional poetics to the spatiality of the womb or semiotic chora. Aside from the obvious observation that all poetry is embodied it leads one to a realization that there is a particular spatiality within the poem that simultaneously allows one to see the poem and to see language as such. yet at the same time it requires that one consider the poem as consisting of lines within stanzas. vertical space of the poem as a global entity. Overviewing Dante’s remarkably prescient comments Agamben. along with the impact of lineation. Ease requires the thinking of proximate space as precondition for singularity. intellectual and aesthetic rooms within rooms. 35).

The two traditional answers to this question are either that structure is an essential and irreducible element of the thing or it is what causes the “ensemble to be what it is” (MWC. Agamben begins his treatise on rhythm by considering the age-old problem as to what constitutes structure. The first thing to accept here is that these contesting views of structure are either based on an internal. I am speaking here of the dense chapter in The Man Without Content entitled “The Original Structure of the Work of Art. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT RHYTHM Agamben is a sporadic and yet profoundly consistent writer. in other words how do parts cohere into a unified structure: lines become a stanza. and third (a point central to the work of Badiou) explain how this element exterior to one’s set can be 189 . 96). Yet the second view proposes that structure is something that is external to the ensemble in question which means first that one must go in search of it. but rather we are able now to look back on that essay and see in it the basis of all that is to come. they cannot as it precedes all such work. Both positions are problematic. The essay is a fairly unreconstructed Heideggerian reading of poetic rhythm.CAESURA. Aristotle asks in The Metaphysics what causes a collection of elements to be more than a mere aggregate. or an external gestalt-based view that structure is something outside of the ensemble that is added to it to make it what it is. and so on? Structure is always a gestalt in that the parts cohere into something that is in excess of the particulate and yet which gives the particulate a single quantum: such and such a thing. synecdochic view of a certain part of a collection of elements being the supra-elemental part. however having come so far we can leave aside the Heideggerian terminology and concentrate instead on what this essay reveals in terms of a harmony of all the different elements pertaining to prosody and logopoiesis lodged within that most difficult yet essential poetic term: rhythm. Internalized structure assumes structure to be something more than its elements and yet at the same time reduces this additional thing to the prime element “the ultimate quantum beyond which the object loses its reality” (MWC. second explain its essential role to the very collection it is radically exterior and other too.” I am unable to assert that all the matters pertaining to poetic structure as a mode of thinking come together in this essay. 97). stanzas a poem. and his most recent work on temporality harks back to his earliest work on the poem which itself presages the more sophisticated work to come.

This centrality is further perpetuated when Agamben attempts to define the essential and original definition of rhythm by explaining how the interruption of flow in art is an ecstatic arrest of rhythm which.” and rhythm “that which causes something to be what it is” (MWC. . Rhythm is the unquantifiable “extra” element that makes a thing a work of art. the Greek philosopher renames Form. yet at the same time rhythm is directly dependent on the elements that make up the work of art. is the tantalizing gift and reserve of art. every work of art is one rhythm. and everything swings from the poeticizing lips of the god” (Cited in MWC. . decrepit Hölderlin: “Everything is rhythm . 98). for a moment. . how in both cases the elements that function in harmony to create the work’s rhythm also provide us with an atemporal. inaugurates and announces the very existence of rhythm: “The word ‘rhythm’ comes from the Greek . One can already see here the value of such a definition of structure as rhythm at least for the art work. that which is outside of a work and makes it what it is (Form). That which flows does so in a temporal dimension: it flows in time . at the same time. measure as the coming to presence of being on the earth (Heideggerian Measure) and measure as a countable number of units or quanta. now feels after Aristotle that he can define rhythm as that which negotiates between the very principle of presence. Agamben argues.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN a set-defining element and yet itself escape the problems of infinite regression and bad infinity intrinsic to set theory. outside the work of art into the place of ecstasy and are gifted with a view of what art is before falling back into the incessant procession of the rhythm of the work below. This second element. Rhythm. . is a double measure. words. and measure as such as a calculable number. as in the case of water. Agamben defines these two positions as number. Agamben. 94). Yet this rhythm—as we commonly understand it—appears to introduce into this eternal flow a split and a stop” (MWC. initially struggling to comprehend this statement. for the sake of argument syllables. This debate is promoted by a comment by a momentarily lucid. This. . 100). in other words. “element and minimal quantum. the very structure of art “that is at once as Gestalt and number” (MWC. 99). the one preferred by Aristotle. He gives examples here of music and painting. How can this “additional thing” exceed the very structure of aggregation it defines? After Aristotle. . and lines in the poem. to flow. At the point that the rhythm stops we are launched. supra-spatial ecstatic moment that he 190 .

day-to-day vulgar time. both the cut in time and the definition of a period in time.CAESURA. Agamben translates epoch as meaning “both to hold back. as we saw. that is. The same is true of epoch in relation to the definition of a period. Man has on earth a poetic status. This being the case rhythm is not a single event. 100). While it certainly takes time and is composed of three stages 191 . coming from the future. This then explains a final. namely the perpetual movement between time as origin. being-in-the-world. falls back into said continuum. Both epoch and rhythm therefore are the making of a unity through a radical act of disjunctive ecstasy which. . as soon it is raised up out of the structured continuum. Being’s destiny and authenticity. the poetic status of man on earth finds its proper meaning. 101). to offer” (MWC. an interruption in the incessant flow in instants that. namely “to be” in the sense of to dominate or to hold on to a place. to suspend. however. . Through the act of pro-duction via entelechy. Agamben’s main argumentative thrust here is Heideggerian. ecstasy. Yet this process of pro-duction is not entirely processual. human being is able to exist in the transition from presence as origin to presence as thing in the world. centring in on issues of Measure. Thus Agamben concludes: “rhythm holds. and as flow. but the ongoing process of the evental interruption of flow. . gives and holds back . As I mentioned. . 99). sinks into the past” (MWC. rhythm in defining art also defines the basis of being’s temporal existence in the world. not on ongoing flow. for example modernity. as well as providing an early prototype for the Idea of Prose and its subsequent reformulation as potential. Yet rhythm is spoken of here in the very earliest work in terms of the Greek word epoch. “In his authentic temporal dimension. because it is poiesis that founds for him the original space of his world” (MWC. he argues. rhythm grants men both the ecstatic dwelling in a more original dimension and the fall into the flight of measurable time” (MWC. third meaning for epochal rhythm in the Greek. 100) before attempting a somewhat “violent” retranslation of the term as rhythm. What matters for us at this late hour however is how he relates rhythm to poiesis for. Clearly rhythm conceived in this way is the basis for Agamben’s later construction of messianic time. and to hand over. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT describes thus: “we perceive a stop in time . to present. Even if epoch and rhythm are not actually synonymous they hold clear structural synonymity in that both speak of a moment outside of something which confers on that something its unified thing-status.

is pro-duction (τίκτω) of origin (άρχή). It dictates how human being exists in the essentiality of chronological time and space as a continuum. is not however simply an erratic or intermittent. is revealing. Rather. It determines how. poetic 192 . and perhaps this is the truly original and poetic part of Agamben’s thinking. Poiesis is rhythmical structure. we can now reread this in a more Agambenian fashion.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN (poiesis–entelechy–praxis). As he says: “That art is architectonic means. poiesis. stuttering singular dimensionality.the term process does not convey the complexity of its operations. 102). art’s architectonic basis. 102). 101). in the origin that has revealed itself to him in the poietic act” (MWC. wherein the human sees its origins. a process wherein “in the work of art the continuum of linear time is broken. interruption (caesura). still very much in a Heideggerian strain at this early phase in his career. Here is where poetic structure. So that when Agamben concludes. art is the gift of the original space of man. does not dispense with the continuum below. As we now know in terms of the spatiotemporality of the poem there is flow (enjambement). rhythm is the perpetual interplay between flow and its arrest. Yet this epochal moment. and man recovers. often by willed skilled acts of artistic making or artistic experience of the made thing. between past and future his present space” (MWC. therefore. and there is the architectural organization of these two elements into a third element which is the projective-recursive spatiotemporality of structure (what Agamben terms the metrical–musical element). “In the experience of the work of art. In one final report from the great Aristotle. does not commence or cease but is perpetually in operation giving and holding back in a space or medial zone interior to the work of art. which would simply carve time up into the traditional aporia of moments along a single line. any more than the continuum permanently disallows the epoch. flowarrest-flow-arrest. man stands in the truth that is. Rather. Poiesis. This interplay. being breaks with the continual and enters into the ecstatic. Said architectonics is a structure now extremely familiar to us across all that we have perused here. Agamben names this overall combination of elements into the rhythmical structure of the work of art that also determines human being through the means by which they make a space for themselves on the earth as productive beings in and out of time. itself simply archetypal of innumerable such structures across all the arts and beyond. architectonics par excellence” (MWC. etymologically: art. at various points.

Poetry is able to save metaphysics from itself by providing another way of thinking. This projective-recursive. patternation. productive mode of tabular thinking is logopoiesis. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT structure. is a tabular-planar dimensional way of being always already projected towards a finitude that in turn always casts us back to an origin. spatiality. we progress. and suddenly surprising. the name we now give to the whole structural process of logopoietic thinking. defines poiesis as ongoing. If. we make. we fall. in the modern epoch. for example. This. and temporality–. association. in rhyme but also in numerous other elements of poetry such as referentiality. being. through poiesis. we return and in doing so. particularly the tabular-planar element of anaphoric– cataphoric projection–recursion that one finds. which is the name for this process. negates simple processional temporality. We rise. under pro-duction also. Poiesis as the ultimate architectonic of our being on this earth as potentially productive beings within the supportive medium of language as such. due to the very logic of the epoch. 193 . simply put. recurrence with modification (torquing). recursive. Rather rhythm–. is why poetry matters to Giorgio Agamben. being and thinking are under negation they are also. and so on.CAESURA. projective.

like so many titles. literary . Yet here at least I have made a start. If I have neglected the political elements of Agamben’s work. The inaccurate entitlement of this book. particularly metaphysical differential scission. metaphysical. every book demands a title: The Literary Agamben: Adventures in Logopoiesis. I must attest to being unhappy with such a designation even if it is my own. The literary Agamben is simply a device to get the critical fraternity to take their eyes off the Homo Sacer project and its impressive extension. . is as strategic as it is descriptive. for entirely mysterious and conventional reasons.RECURSION. Therefore as to the actual existence of a clearly definable “literary” Agamben. he has made it his life’s work to overcome difference through the creation of a productive philosophy of indifference. In my unwritten book I see that until the various strands of Agamben’s thought are presented as a whole. it is for this reason alone. Within our culture. . The enforcement of a “literary” Agamben is not simply reductive. commenced with the adventure of reinstating the literary in the form of 194 . And while he concedes the omnipresence of division. This must now stand as my written book on Agamben. as most assuredly I have. our understanding of this most remarkable thinker is incomplete. it goes against the very spirit of his work. As would the designation the “political” or “metaphysical” Agamben or even a composite of the three. (it would be premature and presumptuous to reduce his work to just three categorizations). THE TURN OF THINKING At the end of a great adventure the intrepid in repose often set down their encounters and observations in the form of a book. political. To propose a certain identity or division within Agambenian philosophy is ill-advised and. self-defeating. His is a philosophy that resists identity in favour of neutral singularity.

or the press. proximity to language as such. At the same time. neglect to say the very thing that is most on your mind to your loved ones.RECURSION. or inexpressive medium for expression. Similarly I feel now that I never at any point clearly expressed why literature. That must suffice. extrapolated out across larger. The rift may indeed be part cause of the modern philosophical collapse into negativity. providing an archetype for a mode of thinking dominated by naming that does not name anything specifically. you forget to take the one thing you need most of all. and rhythmical structure as an alternative model for thinking. I am fortunate enough to have the time and perspicacity to correct this. and structure that make it the essential complement to philosophy in the quest for the meaning of the existence of language as such as indifferent medium for thinking. and line. Poetry produces the closest experience of language as such. The fundamental experience of ontology via language being that of desubjectivization. Or in taking your leave. that exists within our tradition. Sometimes when you set out on an adventure and you have a tight deadline. discursive structures. THE TURN OF THINKING a sustained analysis of poetry into the heart of Agamben’s indifferent thought. has for centuries being attributed to the poetic experience of inspiration. historical relation between poetry and philosophy. intimacy with the semiotic. combine together to establish poetry’s role as one half of a mode of post-nihilistic productive thought such as I have repeatedly presented in Agamben’s work. the semiotic basis of depersonalizing desubjectivization is most readily presented and investigated by poetry’s emphasis on the material effects of language at the expense of rational discursive meaning. the funding committee. desubjectivization due to linguistic depersonalization. For Agamben there are five conditions of poetic language. word. The predominance of semiotics in the poem is felt at the level of the syllable. why poetry in particular is of such importance to the work of Agamben. a process of depersonalization at the hands of language. but also across the whole of the rhythm of poetic structure. 195 . This being the case the fact that poetry and philosophy suffered a powerful separation at the hands of first philosophy means that philosophy’s attempt to think the very basis of its continuing existence through an investigation of language cannot be completed until this rift is once more bridged. experience. visas to apply for. connections to make. These five conditions of poeticized ontology. As our departure is delayed here a few more pages due to an oversight in some paperwork.

1 196 . I am certain many books are like this. The initial interest I had in Agamben’s ideas on linguistic materiality faded from view until finally I understood what it was I was writing about: thinking as such through poetry. and a character who at the beginning seemed one part of a great ensemble took over the story all but negating the early narrative. the stanza and poetic dictation specifically. An analysis so profound. museums. “The Invention of Literary Singularity. is not illustrative but a fundamental part of his thinking.” now forever unwritten. The actual book was lost along the way. It brings to presence the predominance of negation in all elements of metaphysics. as well as revealing a potential way out of this great abyss through the alternative modes of poietic thinking. His recourse to literary examples in this regard. I dropped it. Nancy. Language as such as neutral medium and support for thought and being allows Agamben to rethink the very thing of thought and move beyond productive metaphysical negation. However aesthetic modernity provides a strong example of anti-poiesis that has two key effects.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN It is inevitable that one will lose one’s way and in losing it find one’s true way. and unexpectedly normal that when the niece and her new beau reappear back on screen at the film’s end you have all but forgotten who they are. suprasensuous and sensuous. Derrida. saw Agamben as a supporting figure in a grand narrative of the turn to poiesis in the work of Heidegger. and the relation between the larynx and the syrinx. dictation in poetry. The history of modern metaphysical nihilism is matched by the history of aesthetic modernity dissuading us from looking for solutions in poiesis alone. Badiou. thousands of words on the category life. real. The order of the remaining chapters was endlessly changed. This is not the book I set out to write. In my case the usual: chapters which were central were removed entirely. The ancient antagonism established between poetry and philosophy is first revealed and then in part resolved by the rehabilitation of the category of poiesis. All great adventures work this way. Mine has been no different. That book. and ultimately Agamben. I am reminded of Ozu’s great film Flavour of Green Tea Over Rice where the story of the rebellious niece is supplanted by the consideration of her actions on the relationship between her aunt and uncle. As this happened the previous disorder of the chapters froze into a pattern that came to seem as almost predestined. The Agamben chapter got out of hand. Logopoiesis. I admit that.

This is not simply thinking through the appropriation of the arts but the very structure of poiesis as an alternate and complimentary mode of thinking to that of the metaphysical tradition. Heidegger of course casts an ambiguous shadow over the work of Agamben. narrativizing. Indeed. People have called it thinking. syllogistic. a turn or kehre he denies and 197 . I suspect. However a powerful example of the presentation of thinking before thought exists in Heidegger’s unfinished work Being and Time. Being and Time therefore. and teleological thought is weakened as it progresses to its conclusions. Rhythm is the very ground upon which all future work on logopoiesis must be based. The tensile rhythmic interchange between enjambement and caesura provides the medium for logopoiesis. The book essentially remains unfinished as the “third division” was never written and the second division was not all it could have been as Heidegger was forced to add it in haste. is a combination of the premature cessation of the flow of meaning through the imposition of a semiotic beak and the interruption of semiotic flow by the interjection of the space of thought. We have arrived at the quintessence of the logopoietic thought process.RECURSION. is a powerful lesson in self-deconstruction in part obviating many of the critical studies of the work to come. threatening a storm that in the midst of such a swashbuckling tale might indeed be welcomed even if it poses real danger. This conclusion voyages far from my original intention. culminating. aside from its myriad other merits. summarizing. Mostly writers recount their thoughts but not their thinking. revealed by Agamben to be that of poetry as such. as common as marriage when seen through the thinking lens of Ozu. like the dark and yellowing illumination of the sky above you as you set out. There are certain elements of Being and Time as a work of written thinking that tell us a good deal about thinking as such. but as a mode of thought it is meaningless without the combination of these elements into a trans-linear anaphoric–cataphoric tabular-planar projective–recursive structure which Agamben names rhythm as such. The structure of this thinking. That Heidegger then turns away entirely from the categories of this book in the later work on poetry. Such a situation is. it has been observed that the second division takes up the issues of the first and in reconsidering them undermines them so that the powerful forward thrust of Heidegger’s propositional. deductive. THE TURN OF THINKING Bringing together thought and poetry I was able to propose the tautological compound logopoiesis.

turns away from this coming to presence. the verb used here to express the activity of the “turn in” of thought. therefore. means both to turn in and to put up at an inn. “the primal dimension within which man’s essence is first able to correspond at all to Being . . As the translator’s footnote informs the English edition of Heidegger’s text. 41). A turn from dispute into stasis and stillness. and in that way simultaneously turns counter to the truth of its coming to presence. As they rightfully go on to explain this is of no small importance to Heidegger’s work on Hölderlin. . but the process of the turning from the negative to the positive by virtue of the negative. feeling. and willing. to alight. is thinking” (QCT. particularly his study of the hymn “The Ister” and the periplus logic of the river developed there.” but. In the text Hölderlin’s Hymn “The Ister” Heidegger establishes an ontological rhythm of cruciform retrogradation that we found was central to Agamben’s theory of the relation of poetic rhythm to thinking as such.2 A similarity further confirmed when Heidegger adds: “In the coming to presence of the danger there conceals itself . . The influence is neither negative nor positive. . 198 . he defines this coming to presence of being as enframing as danger. and we can see the profound influence Heideggerian thinking has had on Agambenian thinking. . In the 1949 essay “The Turning” Heidegger comes to define thinking precisely in terms of recursion. the possibility of a turning in which the oblivion belonging to the coming to presence of Being will so turn itself that. one can recognize here the basis of Agamben’s methodology. the truth of the coming to presence of Being will expressly turn in—turn homeward—into whatever is” (QCT. He then adds: “As the danger. This primal corresponding . Being turns about into the oblivion of its coming to presence. Speaking of the contemporary destiny of being in terms of instrumental. 41).THE LITERARY AGAMBEN yet which is all too apparent. with this turning. It recalls always the source.” Although Heideggerian negativity is the destinal ontology Agamben wants expressly to turn away from. As the river departs from the source one can describe is as both homely and unhomely. suggests that turning away from and towards was. objectivizing. Add into this Heidegger’s claim that language “is never primarily the expression of thinking. . ever his method of thought and that the second division is not a failure but a triumph of recursive thought. or stay. einkehren. and framing technology. Thus the act of turning is not simply turning back or away from the present but a turning in. an interiorization of thinking.

It exemplifies thought but it is not thought as such in my opinion. The river therefore is both a locality or founding of a place and an endless journeying. but only in departing from it. THE TURN OF THINKING the homely. allegorical. Similarly as the river journeys it also provides the essential natural elements for settlement. In contrast Heidegger’s reading of “The Ister” concentrates on the meaning of the river as expressed by the semantic base of Hölderlin’s great hymn. From poetry. The manner in which the river flows and yet is also arrested by locality echoes the stop–start interplay of caesura and enjambement in Agamben. This is not the case. illustrative. Agamben’s main concern is the definition of human being in terms of desubjectivization brought about by the profound depersonalization of the human being in the face of language as neutral medial support for thinking 199 . While finally expression of the river as both flowing out into the uncanny and always being called back to the familiar source combines all these elements into an internalized poetic structural rhythmic periplus: Agambenian rhythm. through philosophy to language. great work of the last philosopher. to a degree. Thus the poem remains. Thinking as rhythmical turning by virtue of poetry is my first thesis in relation to logopoiesis. And second because Agamben is able to draw out the turn of thinking in poetics through detailed analysis of prosody as such. Indeed much of Agamben’s work on poetry is prefigured in this text. the river drains into the ocean whose amorphous nature recalls the installation into shape of the source. This is an essential development in logopoietic thought from its origins in the later. In contrast Agamben demonstrates that the very definition of poetry in terms of semiotic rhythm is the quintessence of turning as a form of thinking in the form of the verse. and specifically singular in relation to thought. which is also essential to Agamben’s theory of messianic time. My contention here is not that Heidegger had already said what Agamben goes on to say. This rhythm is the essence of thought as a form of turning embedded in my choice of the tautological term logopoiesis to express this mode of poetic thinking. rhythm. Heidegger brings another interiorization into poetic ontology and thinking. the reason why so many great cities are on the banks of rivers. First because of Agamben’s powerful critique of Heideggerian Being as based on mute negation.RECURSION. The ocean works very well as the endless falling into silence of poetic finitude. In attaching the river to the ancient sea-bound periplus. archetypal.

I can now understand why you coin the term logopoiesis to indicate this complex compound of ideas although initially I was unconvinced. as the poemthought commences due to the presence of semiotic conventional rule-based constraint (I enjoyed very much your article on this by the way). That is: a self-consciously self-indicative anaphoric-cataphoric tabularplanar field or linguistic medium for thinking that is a projective recursion. rummaging through my capacious pockets for some gizmo for gouging stones out of the hooves of horses. This is not our concern. but also thought about other categories that I have yet to address such as objectivity. objectal-instrumental. desolated by modernity and yet still eternally wonderful. as far as I can tell. What I summarize as thinking through making.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN as such. prosaic. I have understood it as the following: a modality of thinking through making and all that this entails. Thus if Agamben wishes to access the linguistic basis for all being.3 it already prefigures its development and cessation. Later. temporality. logopoiesis. deductive. I find a postcard from Giorgio. and full development of what literature is through its definition as a means of thinking through intimate experience with the semiotic materiality of language as such. The first instalment of which is a consonance between the very structure of poetry and that of thinking. In such a model. and the sensuous. Certainly thought about being in terms of the subject. redefinition. Written on the back in Italian is the following enigma that I have translated the best I can: As to your delightful tale of logopoiesis. by submitting thought to 200 . Such a thought is definable by precisely the same structure as that of the poem for which read all works of art. On one side is a sepia image of the Rome of his childhood. teleological. is a way-station along the obscured tracks of a greater mission. exhaustive. Logopoiesis names the rehabilitation. by flowing and interrupting said flow. our aims are more modest. progressive. my own sensibly founded modesty forbids me from venturing any further than a total reappraisal of all the arts in terms of their being a form of thought. and eventually conclusive mode of progression through logical cumulative analysis. Rather than a syllogistic. If for Agamben poetic thinking. logopoiesis is the tautological turn of thought. As it progresses it does so by always simultaneously going on and looking back.

are suspended in every sense of this word. Just as human life can only come to life by ending the category of life and the tension therein.RECURSION. That said the poem never comes to an end because the cataphoric-recursive element always folds the poem back on itself. In the same manner the poem never commences. A poetic thinking shares this structure. As in thought so in art. space and time. put on hold. It is for this reason that we call poetry. Beware the sloughs of negative despond by the 201 . as the poem ends it both comes to an end. language. verse. By the same gesture as it seems to move towards its conclusions. as indeed must all logopoietic thinking. poetic thought turns. philosophy and poetry. It must end. Such a thought exists both in space and time you suggested at one point. THE TURN OF THINKING a constraining linearity and exploding linearity through a translinear tabular-planar rhythmic structure. a moment wherein categories such as beginning and end. You are not quite there yet but you are certainly moving towards very provocative territory. it is always already within the problem. Some ideas seem out of place. The last philosopher has spoken his final words. and perpetually ends (did I get this right?). but which we cannot take hold of. Very interesting. Finally. but not for all time. to come into existence. it must at the same time be turning back on itself and away from summation. subject and object. indeed all the arts. let’s say the problem of being. in on itself. inside and outside. Rather than defining a problem and then seeking to solve it conclusively. thought and language. I will need time to think more about it. Finally then in the tensile interchange between having to end and being unable to end you have the perpetually adventurous finitude of poetic thought as such. Not everything is as it should be. For now at least. trans-linear space. Philosophy has now passed. In being dispossessed of the very thing which takes hold of us we turn from thinking about being to the turn of being as thinking. our habitual place. As ever. This rhythmical space is also the rhythmical temporality of thought. Yet the grammatological space required to actuate the caesura in the line reveals the dependence of linearity on not merely interruptive. part and whole. we are held by that which possesses us. Quite so. structural. never comes to an end. If traditional thought advances. The linear extension of the semiotic and its interruption are both temporal. it is the turn of verse. mono-dimensional space but also architectonic.

Good luck with your next guide. Giorgio 202 . You will find his conversation and company very stimulating even if at first he seems obscure. By the way. He is a close associate of mine although we do not always see eye to eye. Remember to take the right turn there. There. It’s your turn now. I have finished what I have to say. ignore the example of Orpheus.THE LITERARY AGAMBEN way. Hope we meet again some time in the future but I believe we may not as my destiny is beyond those cliffs which are treacherous. There are always benefits to be accrued from looking back along the way you have come. upon an empty plateau about which they say great danger finds its dwelling.

“Cutting the Branches for Akiba. Siting Agamben. See Adam Thurschwell.” SL. Colin McQuillan. 2007). Negri’s provocation has been picked up by Jenny Edkins. 1–7. 44. henceforth cited as PMD.” PMD. trans. 2 (2007). no. 70. ‘The Political Life in Giorgio Agamben. 92.” Angelaki 7.” in Sovereignty & Life. Agamben’s first published work begins with a consideration of the uncanny as the ability of literature to produce desubjectivization.” SAQ. 117–18. “Time of Death. NC: Duke University Press. “The Enigma of Giorgio 203 . 175. “Playing with Law: Agamben and Derrida on Postjuridical Justice. Negri reiterates this critique in Antonio Negri. Benjamin Noys. 135. ‘Bare Life or Social Indeterminacy?’ SL. and Ernesto Laclau.” negriagamben.” The Germanic Review 82. henceforth cited as SL. Henceforth cited as MWC.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. 112–13. 27. unpaginated. see Erik Vogt. No study of the uncanny is complete without reference to Nicholas Royle’s magisterial and unsettling The Uncanny: An Introduction (Manchester: Manchester University Press. Andrew Norris (Durham. 11. and Alex Murray. trans. Antonio Negri. “S/Citing the Camp. Agamben’s Critique of Derrida. 190. 38. Rainer Maria Kiesow.” trans. The Man Without Content. 1999). ed. no. “Witnessing the Inhuman: Agamben or Merleau-Ponty. “The Ripe Fruit of Redemption. The first critical concession of the three Agambens can be found in Justin Clemens. 2003). 2 (2002).” SAQ. “Giorgio Agamben: The Discreet Taste of the Dialectic.generation-online.” SL. “Law and Life. SAQ. and Robert Buch. Matteo Mandarini (New York: Continuum. henceforth cited as SAQ. Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli (Stanford: Stanford University Press. Jean-Philipe Deranty. Kaufman.” in Politics. and Eleanor Kaufman. no. 57. “Approaching Limit Events. and Time for Revolution. Catherine Mills. “Seeing the Impossibility of Seeing or the Visibility of the Undead: Giorgio Agamben’s Gorgon. 2005).NOTES EXOTERIC DOSSIER: THE LITERARY AGAMBEN 1 2 3 4 5 6 For various criticisms of Agamben’s supposedly dual methodology.’ Kritikos 2 (2005). “The Saturday of Messianic Time. Dominick LaCapra. 173. Arianna Bove. 1 (2008).html. Georgia Albert (Stanford: Stanford University Press. www. ed. 254. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. 2003). “Whatever Politics. Nicholas Heron. See Giorgio Agamben.

trans. Henceforth cited as WWB. 1–11. Henceforth cited as MWE. 29–30. Lovitt’s introduction is also useful. William Lovitt (London: Harper Perennial. Henceforth cited as O. Daniel HellerRoazen (Stanford: Stanford University Press. trans. Henceforth cited as HS. Justin Clemens. The End of the Poem. Henceforth cited as EP. See Giorgio Agamben.” WGA. 62–75. Literature. 3–52.” in QCT. 1999). For more see Matthew Calarco. “Introduction: The Interim. For” in the collection Martin Heidegger. Mills defines as a crucial element of Agamben’s thought the faculty of having or capacity to do something. 43. 59. 163–79. Henceforth cited as QCT. 3. the inhuman. ed. Vincenzo Binetti and Cesare Casarino (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. bare life. 140. Infancy and History: On the Destruction of Experience. See “The Question Concerning Technology. Giorgio Agamben. 1977). trans. 109. The Philosophy of Agamben (Stocksfield: Acumen Press. social life. Henceforth cited as PA.” SL. “Article: Syrinx / Larynx: A Full-Throated Ease.” William Watkin’s Blog. trans. & 187–8. 3. Karen E. Giorgio Agamben. blogspot. 2008). 1998). Liz Heron (London: Verso. and Alex Murray. 119. 107.” Paragraph 25.” and “The Turning.” in The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. 1991). see William Lovitt. “Jamming the Anthropological Machine. 2000). Language and Death: The Place of Negativity. Nicholas Heron. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Pinkus with Michael Hardt (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. 90. http://williamwatkin. Life. 84–5. “Introduction. See Giorgio Agamben. trans. and ontology. The Open: Man and Animal. For more on the role of animal voice to poetry see William Watkin. See Catherine Mills. 6. See for example Giorgio Agamben. 2008). trans. 2 (2002). The importance of the literary has finally been conceded by some critics. “The Role of the Shifter and the Problem of Reference in Giorgio Agamben. This is. 1993). 2004). Henceforth cited as LD. the question behind the “political” texts comprising the Homo Sacer project in terms of the relation of the human to the animal. essentially. Means Without Ends. 10. Henceforth cited as WGA. and again in LD. trans. It also forms the basis of a whole chapter in The End of the Poem. PROJECTION: THERE IS LANGUAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Giorgio Agamben. Henceforth cited as IH. later in the main body of the book. This is the function of the “anthropological machine” that Agamben describes in The Open. Kevin Attell (Stanford: Stanford University Press. no. See for example Justin Clemens. 33–8. IH. For a consideration of the status of the unwritten in Agamben see Andrew Dillon. (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. xxviii–xxxvi. biological life. Daniel Heller-Roazen (Stanford: Stanford University Press. The Question Concerning Technology.NOTES Agamben. 204 . Henceforth cited as Para.

henceforth cited as ST. 102–4. David E. Agamben’s critique of Heidegger spans the volumes Language and Death (LD. On the Way to Language. for example Krzysztof Ziarek. Lévinas and Agamben. 44–6. 1995). 205 . but it is certainly true that analysis of the world gives way to considerations of earth in later texts such as “The Origin of the Work of Art. 2005).” WGA. See also Lee Spinks. HS.” Textual Practice 15. For a consideration of this argument see Thomas Docherty. “Absence as Pure Possibility.” Para. Potentialities. “Linguistic Survival and Ethicality: Biopolitics. 205–19. Remnants of Auschwitz: The Witness and the Archive. his commitment to Being as such waxes. For largely negative comments on Agamben’s critique of Derrida see Thurschwell.” in PMD. Mills. 1 (2004). 103–4. 86–7. For more on this topic see Catherine Mills. 39–77). Literature and War: Absence and the Chance of Meeting (London: Continuum. trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen (Stanford: Stanford University Press. see for example Martin Heidegger.” in Martin Heidegger. 187–210. Henceforth cited as RA. “After Humanism: Agamben and Heidegger. Michael Sullivan and Sam Whitsitt (Albany: SUNY Press. 2009). PMD. trans. RA. see Alex Murray. messianic conception of post-humanism: O. His most veiled but sustained critique is to be found in the essay “Pardes: The Writing of Potentiality. Poetry. 155–6. and The Open (O.” in Derrida. Henceforth cited as PLT. 2002). “Can the Dead Speak to Us? De Man. 12. 266–90. “Thinking the Post-human: Literature. 34–53. henceforth cited as OWL. 1 (2001). Daniel Heller-Roazen (New York: Zone Books.” SAQ. henceforth cited as P. trans. Idea of Prose. trans. 2 (2007). Key moments come in the following texts Stanzas: Word and Phantasm in Western Culture. 54–64). and is inevitably itself criticized by others. Ronald L. It is widely assumed that Heidegger’s interest in Dasein wanes as. 87–135. especially in the later texts on poetry. Theory & Critique 45. post-kehre. 23–46. Peter D. 164–9.NOTES 13 14 15 16 Also Giorgio Agamben. and The Time That Remains: A Commentary on the Letter to the Romans. “Potential European Democracy. Affect and the Politics of Style. 173–97. 61–2. no. Language. Hertz (San Francisco: Harper Collins. 1993). Heidegger disputes this easy division. no. Martinez (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. and Testimony in Remnants of Auschwitz. 53–7. “As If the Time Were Now: Deconstructing Agamben. Johnson. 15–88. His critique of Derrida is more sporadic yet insistent. 1999). trans.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 106.” Culture. trans. 1971). The conclusion to The Open sets out a more positive. no. 129–30. and Colin Davis. Thought. 44–5. For a useful analysis of the relation of Agamben’s thought to that of Debord’s concept of the spectacle. henceforth cited as TTR. “Beyond Spectacle and the Image: the Poetics of Guy Debord and Agamben. Albert Hofstadter (New York: Harper & Row. and Sean Gaston.” P. henceforth cited as IP. 110–14. 90–2. trans. 200–2 and again Mills in PA. 1971). The ontico-ontological difference refers to the division in Being and Time between Dasein or everyday being in the world and Being as such which he sees as epochally in withdrawal in the modern age. PA. Patricia Dailey (Stanford: Stanford University Press. Subjectivation.

Bakhtin. 181–92. 1989). Literature. and the Politics of Exception. James Ellroy.NOTES 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 See Derrida’s two remarkable assaults on Heideggerian difference. Peggy Kamuf and Elizabeth Rottenberg (Stanford: Stanford University Press. “The Materialization of Prose: Poiesis versus Dianoia in the work of Godzich & Kittay.” Paragraph 31. Caton. For an analysis of deixis. atactic. The relationship between the banning of poets from the republic and the figure if the homo sacer as desubjectivization under the ban of the sovereign. 206 . John Milton. Blanchot and Agamben (New York: SUNY. com/36/watkin-duplessis.” Jacket 36 (2008). ” (P. 129–30. 271–3. 114–23. Of Spirit: Heidegger and the Question. See for example HS. Henceforth cited as LPN. 2008). “‘Draft 33: Deixis’ / Notes on ‘Deixis’: a Midrashic Chain an exchange of thoughts. For a full consideration of all these issues see William Watkin. http://jacketmagazine. Nihilism: The Uncanniest of Guests (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. 2 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Philosophy. and Barbara Formis.” in relation to the hyphen. Steven C. “Coetzee.” in Jacques Derrida. 344–64. so to speak.1 (2006). II. See Shane Weller. Henceforth cited as RP. the colon. 7–26. See also Wall’s ground-breaking analysis Radical Passivity: Lévinas. 4. 2004). Agamben. M. and “Geschlecht I: Sexual Difference. is implied but never fully developed in Agamben’s work. and ellipsis dots in the title of the Deleuze essay “Immanence: A Life . 1977). 3 (2008). 152–8. and Rachel Blau DuPlessis. no.” SAQ 121–44. Geoffrey Bennington and Rachel Bowlby (Chicago: Chicago University Press. Jacques Derrida. “Except for Law: Raymond Chandler.” WGA. . Ontological Difference. 1981). Paradise Lost (Oxford: Oxford University Press. no. see John Lyons. Silliman and Agamben. Weller is somewhat scathing of this narrative of overcoming nihilism which he says typifies our tradition in relation to nihilism since Nietzsche. 1987). Shklovsky. Semantics Vol. 2008). 50. and William Watkin. and the Passion of Abu Ghraib. Psyche: Inventions of the Other. 221–3). trans. Agamben later speculates on various grammatological punctuation marks in relation to his theory of nonrelational harmonic articulation that is neither “hypotactic nor paratactic but. 137 & 159–62. The Emergence of Prose: An Essay in Prosaics (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. 636–7. Henceforth cited as MofP. The Dialogic Imagination (Austin: University of Texas Press. This is Agamben’s specific criticism of Derrida in Stanzas. See ST. See M.shtml. ed. For a remarkable history of this process see Wlad Godzich and Jeffrey Kittay.” American Anthropologist 108. Vol. Three essays which are not germane to my argument here in that they attempt to apply the ideas of Homo Sacer to literary analysis but still worth considering are Lee Spinks. 1999). “Dismantling Theatricality: Aesthetics of Bare Life. .

in other words. Memoires for Paul de Man. See Emile Benveniste. Henceforth cited as IPP. therefore they are alive without being human. See O. In the Process of Poetry: The New York School and the Avant-Garde (Lewisburg. 1993). Manifesto for Philosophy. See Michel De Certeau. and the subsequent denuding of xenoglossia under the sign of glossolalia. In contrast glossolalia suggests a reductive animalism and a position of epistemological dominance based on an ontological certitude: they speak like animals and I can designate the significance of this as their being “as animals” confirming my status as civilized and thus human. 1989).” PMD. a language equal to our own in every way except the specificity of its material signification. “Signature Event Context. For more on this see William Watkin. Henceforth cited as CC. as glossolalic. Problems in General Linguistics.” Representations 56 (1996). trans. On Mourning: Theories of Loss in Modern Literature (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. trans. 198–226. trans. 207 .NOTES 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For the relation of anaphora to deixis in Agamben see Giorgio Agamben. The wilful treatment of xenoglossic alterity. 1982). a meaningless noise. is surely the basis of much cultural chauvinism and imperialism through the ages. “Au Hasard. 227. Cecile Lindsay. but the first serious study of the issue was Thomas Wall’s Radical Passivity. What barbarians utter is mere noise. See Alain Badiou. Xenoglossia implies both a culture as developed as one’s own and a lack of facility within the dominant culture: I know they are making sense but I do not have the capability to understand it. John Keats. I am thinking most specifically of the arguments put forward in Jacques Derrida. trans. 307–30. trans. Henceforth cited as M. Maurice Buxton Forman (Oxford: Oxford University Press. “Vocal Utopias: Glossolalias. self-conscious being. Norman Madarasz (Albany: SUNY. 2004). 63–70 where Agamben considers Heidegger’s ideas pertaining to animal captivated being as fundamentally at odds with human privative. 92–4. This admits into sovereign domination a double weakness. See also RA. Mary Elizabeth Meek (Coral Gables: University of Miami Press. 1999). The Letters of John Keats. 217–30 & 35–40 respectively. 28–32. ed. The English translation incorrectly names John Woodhouse as Keats’ addressee. 29–47. PA: Bucknell University Press. and Peggy Kamuf (New York: Columbia University Press. 137–8. Eduardo Cadava. Jonathan Culler. 1935). Henceforth cited as MP. 1971). Alan Bass (London: Harvester Wheatsheaf. See for example Wall. The importance of passivity and neutrality for Agamben’s post-metaphysical ontology has been noted by a number of critics. In Agambenian terms much cultural imperialism is based on the false division between xenoglossia (bios) and glossolalia (zoe).” in Margins of Philosophy. and my own analysis of these issues in relation to poetry in William Watkin. 2001). See Jacques Derrida. 53. The Coming Community. Michael Hardt (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. 32–5. Second Edition.

Profanations. CHAPTER 1 LOGOS. 64. Mills. 186. PA. see Leland De La Durantaye. What Agamben defines as the pseudonymical nature of written selfenunciation. PMD. 141–2. 90–1. trans. “Agamben’s Potential. 13. 2007). “Particularity and Exceptions: On Jews and Animals.” SAQ. Vogt.” WGA. concluding: “Every creation is always a cocreation. For a consideration of the relation of life to poetry see WWB.” in WGA. 76. Jeff Fort (New York: Zone Books. For a consideration of this term and its relation to the semiotic in Agamben. 36–51. Debating the origin of the inter-relation between the ancient legal terms auctoritas and potestas. See Zaraloudis. PMD. “Philosophy of the letter” is the term used here for philosophers who use language merely as a transparent instrument without any regard for its presence as semiotic materiality or its mediality. Henceforth cited as Prof. “Article: Poetic Dictation. “‘A Different Insignificance’: The Poet and Witness in Agamben. See Mills. “On Giorgio Agamben’s Holocaust. Henceforth cited as R. “Spacing as Shared: Heraclitus. “Face to Face with Agamben.” PMD. 211. 203. For criticism of Agamben in relation to otherness see Andrew Benjamin. Kevin Attell (Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 188. Plato. and Robert Eaglestone.” Para. trans. THINKING THOUGHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 See earlier comments on Foucault and desubjectivization in RA. here Heller-Roazen opts for “mean.” WWB. 131–2. Agamben approaches the issue of the collusive nature of creation from a different angle. 144. or. 5–8. Republic. trans. Robin Winterfield (Oxford: Oxford World Classics. “Soulblind. no. For an interesting consideration of love in Agamben see Julian Wolfreys. 66.NOTES 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Robert Browning. 86.” Para. and Mills. just as every author is always a coauthor. a consonance I would be hesitant to endorse. Badiou’s manifesto for “affirmative thinking” is mapped out in MP.” Diacritics 30. AP. In fact Plato does not simply “exclude poets” in a single gesture but whittles away at the representational and mimetic bases of the arts within 208 . Pertinent to a later debate on the actual translation of the key term medio.” also my preference. 2 (2000). Henceforth cited as SE. 2005). Henceforth cited as AP. PMD. RA. Josh Cohen. Giorgio Agamben. PMD. Thurschwell. 85. De La Durantaye goes so far as to claim they are the same. 167. 2008). the Other in Love. 344. Selected Poems (London: Penguin. 149–63. Agamben. State of Exception. 113–38. 2004). For further readings of the razo in Romantic and contemporary poetics see William Watkin.” Giorgio Agamben. Pindar. Andrew Benjamin.

Alexander García Düttmann. and “Homonym. The Aristotelian saying something about something. In a rare but central moment for Agamben scholarship. 71–8. 131. see RA. politics. trans.” P.” in Walter Benjamin: Critical Evaluations in Cultural Theory. “Integral Actuality. primarily in an attempt to reject tragedy from the republic. He also mentions this fragment in IP. “Politics and Poetics of Divine Violence: On a Figure in Giorgio Agamben and Walter Benjamin. Elizabeth Rottenberg (Stanford: Stanford University Press. 88). this definition of the Idea of Prose comes together with Agamben’s liberationist. see also “The Idea of the Name. “Notes on Media and Biopolitics: ‘Notes on Gesture’. which shows itself. would correspond an action as pure means. This relentless degradation and attenuation of poiesis occurs in the fourth book of Republic. I do not have space to develop here.” WGA. . 105. 60–1. ed. “Pseudonym. but says only itself. poetry. P. 107. An excellent consideration of the messianic and the term integral actuality can be found in Irving Wohlfarth. “Article: Ontological Whisperings. IP. and the three main strands of Agamben’s work. 117).” WGA. 97–107. See also Düttmann. 241–2. see R. “The Ontology and Politics of Exception: Reflections on the Work of Giorgio Agamben. 11–12). see Nicholas Heron. 1994). For an insightful consideration of the origins of the Idea of Prose in the work of Benjamin. revealing a parity between the political and literary Agamben that. Idea of Prose.” SL.” CC.” (SE. 41 and again does not provide the citation.” in IP. 84–8. Jean-François Lyotard. 4–6. . where this argument is developed.” IP. See MofP.” WGA. The political implications of this occupy Means Without Ends (MWE.” CC. and metaphysics come together. For a sustained reading of this essay see Deborah Levitt. 209 . See also Wall’s analysis RP. 193–211. 70–102. without any relation to an end. Benjamin’s idea of a pure language finds an analogue in his conception of pure violence. Add into this Agamben’s definition of living in the category form-of-life as thinking as such (MWE. For more on pure. 59–62.” WWB. See Bruno Gulli. Lessons on the Analytic of the Sublime. 1–28. “Idea of Poetry. 123. 107. “On the Messianic Structures of Walter Benjamin’s Last Reflections. For more on Agamben’s consideration of the logical aporia that “Discourse cannot say what is named by the name. which in turn defines the concept of the pure medium of mediality in SE. For a consideration of pseudonym and homonym in literature see William Watkin. divine violence see Anne De Boever. Henceforth cited as LAS. unfortunately. Peter Osborne (London: Taylor and Francis. For a consideration of knowability and sayability in relation to desubjectivization.NOTES 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Greek culture. 2004). post-juridical politics in final page of State of Exception: “To a word that does not bind . 11–13. 169–231.

140–44. 9. he notes: “But here it is as if this anaphora were absolutized to the point of losing all reference. 1993). which he calls formof-life. 2006). Giorgio Agamben. the ultimate statement of potentiality. and Giorgio Agamben. while a Greek word. 177–271. has also entered into English via the OED which defines it as creative production as well as being a technical term in psychology for the formation of neologisms. 2002). trans. . 76. 223. 116–8. . “Resistance.” (P. now turning. See Giorgio Agamben and Gilles Deleuze. so to speak. MWE. 45–7 & TTR. See Edkins SL. MWE. as well as his description of the threshing floor of the ineffable as “a light. SL. or On Profanation. 83. Ninfe (Torino: Bollati Boringhieri. Being and Time. Bartleby: La Formula della creazione (Macerata: Quodlibet. Thought is not just another form of life but form-of-life as such: MWE. 21. spinning on itself . liberating future destiny. I have decided not to italicize the term and so in effect neologise the very term for the formation of neologisms. Alexander Cooke. 3 (2005). 255). 210 . 248–1 & 309–10. 35–8. 27–32. THINKING THROUGH MAKING 1 Poiesis. and because I am arguing for poiesis as a contemporary term covering issues around making as pro-duction into presence. Henceforth cited as N.NOTES 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 In Means Without Ends Agamben defines “form of life” as the ontic prefigurement of the specific life you will lead in a self-consciously critical manner. 85. See Martin Heidegger. He speaks of potentiality in most of his major texts with major statements in CC. This being the case. Conceding the “to” refers to some act that preceded to which Bartleby refers. is thought. The archetypal activity of authentic being. see Thanos Zartaloudis. It is indeed the origin of the political and its potential. The gag comes to relate to later considerations of the use of the mask in drama which Agamben also defines as a gesture. Joan Stambaugh (Albany: SUNY Press. P. 110. See Gulli. smooth glowing in which no point can be distinguished from any other” (P. back toward the phrase itself— absolute anaphora. The Parallax View (Cambridge MA: The MIT Press. and Marc Froment-Meurice. 26–43. no.” Para. See O. “A Sense of Loss: Whatever it May Be. 2008). The final word however rests with Agamben and the relation of this. “Soulblind. Henceforth cited as BT. 1996). Potentiality and Law: Deleuze and Agamben on ‘Bartleby’. CHAPTER 2 POIESIS. 134–8. to anaphora. 375–85. See also his comments on the Hegelian grund or ground in this regard in P. 72–3. and Slavoj Zizek. For further deliberations on this conception of Genius. 79. 231. Idea della prosa (Macerata: Quodlibet.” in WGA. See also P. 112).” Angelaki 10. HS.

See Derek H. accessed 17 September 2008. Modern art would. 95. Cited in Bernard Stiegler.” SL. . trans. Michael Joyce.” as opposed to praxis or a willed doing.contempaesthetics. See PLT. 1991).php?articleID=216. I consistently use the term modern here in the manner in which Agamben takes the term. 1961).” www. The Man Without Qualities. CHAPTER 3 MODERNITY. We will find exactly the same structural model in terms of messianic temporality later on so that Potentiality = projective chronos. 2005). Vols. 1998). trans. .org/newvolume/pages/article. and Life. 44.” SAQ. from Nothing. 57. The Collected Dialogues. The key term here is “letting. Technics and Time: The Fault of Epimetheus. “Agamben: Aesthetics. Richard Beardsworth and George Collins (Stanford: Stanford University Press. 110 & 115. in Plato. Actuality = recursive eschaton. Handbook of Inaesthetics. This is the basis of the thesis of Martin Heidegger. 205b. See TTR. Nietzsche. See Claire Colebrook. Charles Bernstein. Ostensibly the modern epoch commences in the eighteenth century with the rise of Enlightenment rationalism and continues up to our present moment. encompass Romanticism and contemporary “postmodernity. “From Sovereign Ban to Banning Sovereignty. 165–86. 172–3. trans. David Farrell Krell (New York: Harper One. 9. especially the phenomenological thick description of jug-ness as thing.NOTES 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Plato. the hardest thing is being capable of annihilating this Nothing and letting something. therefore. ed. refuting a criticism often 211 . Girly Man (Chicago: University of Chicago Press. See the essay “The Thing” in PLT. Potentiality. One and Two. Henceforth cited as HI. As Agamben says most clearly in relation to the theological tradition of creation ex nihilo out of the void of the abyss: “the hardest thing in this experience is not the Nothing or its darkness . PRODUCTIVE ANTI-POIESIS 1 2 A solid overview of Agamben’s anti-modernity can be found in William Rasch. trans. Heidegger famously and importantly differentiates an object which can be the party to subjective statements of knowledge and truth agreement from a thing which composes a phenomenological world around is being. 2006). 19–20. and Alain Badiou. Edith Hamilton and Huntingdon Cairns (Princeton: Princeton University Press. and entelechy = chairatic interiorization. 253). Robert Musil. where Agamben makes clear that his messianic temporality and overall method is not eschatological. 1997). and indeed many others. be” (P. 62–3. trans. Alberto Toscano (Stanford: Stanford University Press. Synposium. Whitehead. 557. Sophie Wilkins and Burton Pike (London: Picador.” Thus Colebrook’s critique of Agamben’s theory of poiesis as both masculinist and theological is incorrect. 105–6. “Poiesis and Art-Making: A Way of Letting-Be.

trans. PMD. Henceforth cited as EHP. In Potentialities cultural traditional transmissibility is founded first on linguistic transmissibility (communicability). Two of the most infamous analyses of literature in Agamben are his consideration of Kafka’s “Before the Law” in Homo Sacer and his reading of the work of Primo Levi in Remnants of Auschwitz. “The Nazi Genocide and the Writing of the Holocaust Aporia: Ethics and Remnants of Auschwitz.” in Selected Writings on Art & Artists. “The Painter of Modern Life.” International Journal for the Semiotics of Law 12. “Supposing the Impossibility of Silence of Sound. no. Cohen. 2007). of Voice: Bataille. 110–12. William McNeill and Julia Davis (Bloomington: Indiana University Press.” PMD. 64. Henceforth cited as C. 104. and Esther Norma Marion. 403. 40). tautological indication of the anaphoric act of indication as such. I turn to the critical material around the Kafka story presently.’ trans. saying something as something. Clearly a development of the idea of sacrifice in HS. most troublesome categories. trans. 73–83. 2000). 1009–22. See Wall. 1972). See for example Andreas Kalyvas. 36–51. where he takes Agamben’s commitment to productive thought and declares it effectively fatalistic and unproductive. Such a process negates the age-old consideration of language as primarily metaphoric-symbolic. Alberto Toscano (Cambridge: Polity Press. to my mind. 1996). See Marin Heidegger. centrally important and.” MLN 121. The Century. 222–47.” PMD. 31. Para. P. David Fraser. And Martin Heidegger. 212 . they pertain more directly to the work around the Homo Sacer project which I have chosen not to dwell on in this study. While both are important. 19–20. 74–106. 397–417. Agamben and the Holocaust. Mills. Hölderlin’s Hymn ‘The Ister. trans. Charles Baudelaire.” PMD. “Dead Man Walking: Law and Ethics After Giorgio Agamben’s Auschwitz. While in The Time That Remains it is asserted as the defining feature of tradition: “That which makes each history historical and each tradition transmissible is the unforgettable nucleus that both bear within themselves at their core” (TTR. see Vogt. P. Charvet (Cambridge: Cambridge UP. “As such” here names the relation itself of relation between denotation (semiotics) and meaning with such-ness being the exposition of as-ness as tensile relation. 120–4. PMD. 4 (1999). 139 & 156. This debate can only be fully appreciated with reference to Agamben’s earlier consideration of “as” in the ontological mainstay “as such” as a form of anaphoric. Transmissibility is one of Agamben’s earliest. 97–100). Badiou defines the century as defined by the violence of The Real in Alain Badiou. 198–221.NOTES 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 and misguidedly levelled at his work.. Keith Hoeller (New York: Humanity Books. Elucidations of Hölderlin’s Poetry. For considerations of Agamben’s use of Levi. 4 (2006). but of saying the suchness of as itself (CC. This I believe is Negri’s final criticism of Agamben in SL. “Linguistic Survival and Ethicality. “The Sovereign Weaver: Beyond the Camp. no.E. Paul Hegarty.

55–7 for his comments on Malevich. “K.” trans. PMD. For considerations of the relationship between the two texts. Up until this point the most sustained engagement with the “literary” Agamben concerns his reading of Levi in Remnants and his of Kafka’s “Before the Law” in Homo Sacer. Glossing Hegel on philosophy after its end he speculates on “a humanity that. C. “Law of Friendship: Derrida and Agamben. See Jürgen Habermas. Acts of Literature. 1991). pro-verted.” New Formations. 146. “Article: Under Glass. See my own analysis of avant-garde manifestoes in IPP. 2005). 219–37. 98. Derrida and Disinterest (London: Continuum. 31–5). HS. Derek Attridge (London: Routledge. see Simon Morgan Wortham. THINKING TAUTOLOGY 1 2 Ezra Pound. 115–48. Andrew Benjamin. HS 40–4. having fulfilled its past. and The Decline of Modernism. turned forward” (P. See David Halliburton. Culture and Politics 15. For an excellent recent study of this classic theme. For a detailed analysis of Agamben’s theory of the museum. 84–5. 19–31 See Badiou. ed. See my own consideration of this issue in IPP. See Jean-Luc Nancy. 43–70.” SAQ. trans. ABC of Reading (London: Faber. Bridget McDonald (Stanford: Stanford University Press. 13–27. Derrida’s reading of the same text is to be found in Jacques Derrida. Peter Connor in The Inoperative Community. is now truly prose (that is pro-versa. “Myth Interrupted. “Spacing as Shared. Theory of the Avant-Garde.” Strategies: Journal of Theory. 62 (2007).” in WGA. 181–220. 1984).NOTES 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 An early related analysis of the consumer object can be found in Stanzas where Agamben speaks of fetishism (ST. In this second reading. see William Watkin. 49–62 Agamben pits his reading against Derrida’s influential interpretation. Peter Connor (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. no. William Mark Hohengarten (Cambridge: Polity Press. 1951). The Experience of Freedom. 1982). See Peter Burger. Agamben’s most recent posting into this dossier is Giorgio Agamben. 1993). 156. “The Unity of Reason in the Diversity of Its Voices. 1992). trans. Poetic Thinking: An Approach to Heidegger (Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 213 .” PMD. 135). “Playing with Law. see Sean Gaston. 36. Michael Shaw (Manchester: Manchester University Press. trans. 19–34. “Friendly Little Communities: Derrida’s Politics of Death. CHAPTER 4 LOGOPOIESIS. For Weller’s argument in this regard see LPN. See Jean-Luc Nancy. 18.” WWB. Nicholas Walker (Cambridge: Polity Press. ed. and my own consideration of these issues in William Watkin. 1992). 1992).” Postmetaphysical Thinking. trans. and Mills. 2 (2002). See Vogt. 89–105.

For a summary of the arguments. 111 & 117.147–8.” in Giorgio Agamben. Para. as “The poem—this prolonged lingering between sound and sense” (EHP. cited in LD.” which really means tricks me or feigns for me. See Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe. “Beauty is truth. 214 . 3–4 and clarifies such issues as Norris’s exemplary examples. Lingering in comparison calls to mind an almost passive.”’ WGA. 114). such lingering has its own lofty resoluteness. ed.” PMD. and even the thinking which prepares such listening. 75. Para. “thought conceives. 17–37. by Froment-Meurice. Jean Hytier (Paris. Idea of Prose.” allowing him to conclude: “the listening to the poem. trans. John Keats. “Idea of Poetry. Signatura rerum: Sul metodo (Torino: Bollati Boringhieri. Selected Poems (Oxford: Oxford Paperbacks. 274–6. Heidegger and the Politics of Poetry. 637). thoughtless hanging around. not due to indecisiveness (vacillation) but an authentic desire to listen to poetry’s call. Oeuvres II. 177. THE TURN OF VERSE 1 2 3 Agamben’s elegant formula for poetry is borrowed from Valéry via Jacobson and attributed by Heller-Roazen to Milner (Heller-Roazen. trans. The English here. For a consideration of Agamben’s contentious use of the paradigmatic example. Jeff Fort (Urbana: University of Illinois Press. truth beauty”. 176).” WGA. Here “Heidegger” retains the caesuric and thetic nature of Valéry’s prose by translating prolongée in terms of the more suggestive “lingering. see Clemens. Jean-Pierre Barricelli (Boston: 1986). Giacomo Leopardi. “mi fingo. lingers even longer than the poem itself. “Introduction. 85–6. 2008). 50–1. For an introduction to some of these concepts see Heron. Σηµειωτιχη [Semiotike]: Recherches pour une Sémanalyse (Paris: Éditions du Seuil.” Lingering. I first came across the idea of the tabularity of poetic structure in Julia Kristeva. After all. 1969). All English quotes taken from Giacomo Leopardi. of course. SAQ.NOTES 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 See Colebrook.” SAQ. it is no mere vacillation.11–134. CHAPTER 5 ENJAMBEMENT. “The Exemplary Exception. Norris. 108–10. This is a criticism levelled. unfairly I believe. 109. The self-same formula is also placed in a position of some prominence in Heidegger’s essay ‘Hölderlin’s Earth and Heaven’ where Heidegger’s translator has him translating the Valéry dictum defining the poem: “Le poème: cette hésitation prolongée entre le sens et le son” (Paul Valéry. is a significant change to prolongation which suggests stretching as an act of willed extension. 2007).” is misleading in relation to the Italian. 2008). 1960). see the first chapter of Signatura Rerum entitled “Che cos’è un paradigma?. “The Role of the Shifter. which in part refutes the criticism of Agamben’s use of “extreme examples” such as one finds in Alison Ross.

The Language Instinct (London: Penguin. 266. while Agamben gives an example of the caesura he never provides examples of enjambement as such. 269–80. SAQ. See Johnson. The essential bases of poetry. 29 for the commencement of a career-long attack on aesthetics in Heidegger. 203–6. See for example Johanna Drucker. This logic resembles in miniature the logic of the epoch and of messianic time in a quite remarkable and universal fashion.” EnterText 1. caesura. 81–2). “The Virtual Codex from Page Space to Agamben uses the example of Bill Viola’s 1995 work “The Greeting. the essence of poetic structure which is also the basis of our being able to claim that poetry “thinks” has been known for many centuries but had simply dropped out of common usage. and Giorgio Agamben. 9–10). It was the poets themselves who called this “retrogradatio cruciata . Selected Poems (Manchester: Carcanet. IPP.philobiblon. 35–6. 1994). A useful consideration of silence can be found in Hegarty. 1981). however. PMD. Thomas Gray. and rhyme are all dependent on an idea of duality which. “Poetry Machines: Repetition in the Early Poetry of Kenneth Koch.NOTES 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 See Stephen Pinker. 21 This useful term for the material space of the poem usually juxtaposed to e-space or virtual textual space is most often utilized in the work on contemporary poetics in the work of Johanna Drucker. “Ousia and Grammē: Note on a Note from Being and Time. 1 (Dec. 158–91. does not come to view as double until a third element occurs to confirm this duality. See TTR. 231. 53–4 & 74–5. stress-unstress.” http:// www. It is typical of all logopoietic thinkers that their analysis of poetry depends on a core of significant examples covering a canon of logopoietic poets. yet in each case said reading works to develop what is effectively a quasi-universal or transcendental truth about poiesis as such. SL. 17–19. ogni immagine anticipa virtualmente il suo svolgimento futuro e ricorda i suoi gesti precedenti” (N. . 222–47.” he calls it Greetings. 2008). therefore. 2000). 83–117. As one can see. For an indication as to how this technical prosodic effect could be interpolated into Agamben’s wider political analysis see his consideration of the hinge in “K. 29–69. See BT. [Every instant. 119 & 132. no. For his initial conception of calling see BT. every image anticipates virtually its future unwinding and recalls its preceding gestures] Interestingly. an alternation between inversion and progression” (TTR. Celan. Mallarmé. Rilke.” WGA. Il sacramento del linguaggio: Archeologia del giuramento (Roma: GLF.” M. Hölderlin. enjambement. See Jacques Derrida. 26. 215 . See William Watkin. of which he says: “Ogni istante. 117. . See Gulli.

CC. ‘Khōra. 2 (2003). 69–70. no. 53–8. 89–130. see Ron Silliman. 7–9. the trace is not synonymous with language. 2008). A Wave (Manchester: Carcanet. CHAPTER 6 CAESURA. OM. John Ashbery. WGA. While I do not have space to deal with the trace in detail it should be obvious from my comments here and earlier in the text that the trace is not reducible either to time or space.” Diacritics 33. The New Sentence (New York: Roof Books. Selected Poetry (Oxford: Oxford Paperbacks. but is the endless collapsing of the traditional metaphysical distinction between the two. before and after thought (penso). What he names “a paraexistence or a paratranscendence that dwells beside the thing. See De Boever. Starting with Derrida (London: Continuum. Henceforth cited as SP. See also MWE. Margaret Waller (New York: Columbia University Press. Thomas Dutoit (Stanford: Stanford University Press. even if this is not marked grammatologically. 122–4. 1984). 355–8. “The Suspended Substantive: On Animals and Men in Giorgio Agamben’s The Open. 216 . For a brilliant attack on the omnipresence of end-directed syllogism as an unquestioned and damaging convention of poetic and prosaic structural coherence. CC. and.” the presence of being to the side. of course. although for Agamben at least.’ On the Name. see Watkin. Alexander Pope. Revolution in Poetic Language. THE SPACE OF THOUGHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The original Italian is as follows: ‘Io vado verso il fiume su un cavallo / che quando io penso un poco un poco egli si ferma’ (IP. Similarly. 43). For more on Italian versification. 38–59. Gerald Stanton Smith and Marina Tarlinskaja (Oxford: Clarendon Press. 14. Julia Kristeva. 200–6. Derrida’s conception of language is problematically ensconced within the differing and deferring logic of the trace.106. 90–1. For my own analysis see MofP. 1987). which he also terms the halo. 25–30 and 239n11 (for her critique of Derrida). 101.NOTES 22 For by far the best and most penetrating explanation of spacing and the trace in Derrida. see Leland De La Durantaye. For more on the right-hand margin in poetry. 2007). On the relation of this to the Benjaminian concept of the division of the division and the caesura. trans. See IPP. For more on the gender implications of the appropriation of terms such as womb/khora. ed. Henceforth cited as W. see Mikhail Leonovich Gasparov. see Jacques Derrida. 1996). 84–119. 1984). trans. see Sean Gaston. A History of European Versification. 1995). Here the hemistich in the second line breaks it into two clearly separate entities.

Could it be he knew of my work even before we met? It seems unlikely. I believe. 4 (2007).NOTES RECURSION. 108. THE TURN OF THINKING 1 2 3 For an analysis of poiesis in relation to modernity see Colebrook. see LPN. 499–529. He refers.” Contemporary Literature 48. 142. 217 . Weller is in agreement. although I do not remember ever mentioning it. to my piece “‘Systematic rule-governed violations of convention’: The Poetics of Procedural Constraint in Ron Silliman’s BART and The Chinese Notebook. SAQ. no.

Vicenza: Neri Pozza. Trans. Roma: nottetempo. 2007. 2008. — Language and Death: The Place of Negativity (1982). Che cos’è il contemporaneo? Roma: nottetempo. Pinkus with Michael Hardt. Trans. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. 2007. Stanford: Stanford University Press. 1993. Trans. — Idea della prosa. Trans. New York: Zone Books. 2000. Giorgio. — La potenza del pensiero: Saggi e conferenze. Justin Clemens. Albany: SUNY Press. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. Literature. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Life. Ed. 2007. Stanford: Stanford University Press. — Che cos’è un dispositivo? Roma: nottetempo. 2005. Trans. Karen E. — Il sacramento del linguaggio: Archeologia del giuramento. Liz Heron. Daniel Heller-Roazen. 1999. — Potentialities (1999). Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. — Idea of Prose (1985). Vincenzo Binetti and Cesare Casarino. Trans. — Remnants of Auschwitz: The Witness and the Archive (1999). Macerata: Quodlibet. — Infancy and History: On the Destruction of Experience (1978). — “K. 2008. — Profanations (2005). 2008. — Ninfe. Michael Sullivan and Sam Whitsitt. — Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life (1995). — Means Without Ends (1996). and Alex Murray. Roma: GLF. 2002. — L’amico. — Il Regno e la Gloria: Per una genealogia teologica dell’economia e del governo. 13–27. Torino: Bollati Boringhieri. 1991. 1995. 1998. London: Verso. Trans. New York: Zone Books. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Jeff Fort. 218 .” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. Vicenza: Neri Pozza. Nicholas Heron.BIBLIOGRAPHY Agamben. 2002. 2008. 2006.

1993. Coral Gables: University of Miami Press. Trans.” In Politics. The Dialogic Imagination (1930s). 1992. Alain. 1971. Bartleby: La Formula della creazione. Austin: University of Texas Press.BIBLIOGRAPHY — Signatura rerum: Sul metodo. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. Stanford: Stanford University Press. “Introduction: Derrida and the Questioning of Literature. Ronald L. Trans. — The Time That Remains: A Commentary on the Letter to the Romans (2000). Kevin Attell. — State of Exception (2003). 71–88. Benveniste. Trans. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Trans. 1981.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Michael Hardt. 2005. “Particularity and Exceptions: On Jews and Animals. M. — “Spacing as Shared. Andrew. Three Poems. John.” In Jacques Derrida. 2008. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Trans. 1999. 2005. Badiou. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. Trans. Charles. Patricia Dailey. — Manifesto for Philosophy (1989). Emile. 1972. Mary Elizabeth Meek. Trans. Alberto Toscano. Bakhtin. 1 (2008). Martinez. Ashbery. New York: Penguin. Acts of Literature. Alberto Toscano. Albany: SUNY Press. Andrew Norris. — The Coming Community (1990). Georgia Albert. NC: Duke University Press. Derek. P. — The End of the Poem (1996). Charvet. 1993. 219 . Handbook of Inaesthetics (1998). 1999. Derek Attridge. Giorgio and Gilles Deleuze. Trans. Macerata: Quodlibet. — The Century (2005). Selected Writings on Art & Artists. 2004. 2005. Benjamin. Ed. Norman Madarasz. Trans. Trans. Baudelaire. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Problems in General Linguistics (1966). E. — The Man Without Content (1970). Stanford: Stanford University Press. M. London: Routledge. Kevin Attell. Trans. 1999. 145–172. — The Open: Man and Animal (2002). Ed. Trans. Agamben. Torino: Bollati Boringhieri. — Stanzas: Word and Phantasm in Western Culture (1977). Durham. 1993. 1993. 2005. 2007. no. Cambridge: Polity Press. Attridge. 1–29.

” American Anthropologist 108. Literature. and Alex Murray. 2008. Lévinas and Agamben. Caton.BIBLIOGRAPHY Bernstein. Life. Justin. Justin. 220 . 2007. Theory & Critique 45. and Alex Murray eds. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Life. 2007. Ed. Burger. Ed. Sovereignty & Life. “Coetzee. and the Passion of Abu Ghraib.” In Sovereignty and Life. 1984. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Peter. Matthew and Steven DeCaroli eds.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. “‘A Different Insignificance’: The Poet and Witness in Agamben. Trans. Ed. no. Browning. Potentiality and Law: Deleuze and Agamben on ‘Bartleby’. Anne. 107–120. no. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. Justin. 2008. 2004. Girly Man. 43–65. — Theory of the Avant-Garde (1974). Cooke.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law.” The Germanic Review 82. Cambridge: Polity Press. 79–89. Charles. Cohen. Robert. Trans. 1992. 1–12. Clemens. Justin Clemens. Michael Shaw. Nicholas Heron. no. Justin Clemens. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Davis. 2008. 3 (2005). no. Calarco. 2006. “Jamming the Anthropological Machine. Buch. Selected Poems. “Can the Dead Speak to Us? De Man. Calarco. Life.” Culture. Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli. The Decline of Modernism (1988). Life. 2 (2007). “Resistance. “The Role of the Shifter and the Problem of Reference in Giorgio Agamben. 1 (2006). Nicholas Heron and Alex Murray. 114–123. Literature. Nicholas Walker. 77–89. London: Penguin. 179–196.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law.” Paragraph 25. Colin. Robert. Literature. Matthew. 163–179 Colebrook. De Boever. Clemens. “Seeing the Impossibility of Seeing or the Visibility of the Undead: Giorgio Agamben’s Gorgon. Ed. 1 (2008). Justin Clemens. Josh. “Agamben: Aesthetics. no. The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. Steven C. Literature. Potentiality and Life. no. 36–51. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 1 (2004). Manchester: Manchester University Press. Nicholas Heron. “Politics and Poetics of Divine Violence: On a Figure in Giorgio Agamben and Walter Benjamin. Agamben. Nicholas Heron and Alex Murray. Alexander.” Angelaki 10. Clemens. “The Enigma of Giorgio Agamben. Claire. 2 (2002).

1–15. Jacques.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. London: Harvester Wheatsheaf. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Ed. Johanna. 1992. 3–24. Rachel Blau and William Watkin. Robert. — Psyche: Inventions of the Other.” Paragraph 25. Geoffrey Bennington and Rachel Bowlby. Düttmann. Alexander García. no. Ed. II. 1–28. Deranty. 1995. Vol. Trans. no. “Witnessing the Inhuman: Agamben or Merleau-Ponty. I.” Paragraph 25. London: Routledge. 2 (2002). Acts of Literature. Drucker. Jean-Philippe. 165–186. 16–35. Peggy Kamuf and Elizabeth Rottenberg. Stanford: Stanford University Press. 2008. Chicago: Chicago University Press. Dillon. no. 1989.” Diacritics 30. Vol. Trans. — Of Spirit: Heidegger and the Question (1987). New York: Columbia University Press. Thomas Dutoit. 1995. — Margins of Philosophy (1972). 2 (2002). — Psyche: Inventions of the Other.” Paragraph 25. 2008. “Potential European Democracy. 1 (2008).” http://www. Leland. and Alex Murray. 2007. 82–96.” In Idea of Prose. Eaglestone. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Ed. Michael Sullivan and Sam Whitsitt. Derrida.shtml. — On the Name. Peggy Kamuf and Elizabeth Rottenberg.” Jacket 36 http://jacketmagazine. Jonathan Culler. Cecile Lindsay. 2 (2000). Derek Attridge. 1989. “On Giorgio Agamben’s DuPlessis. 2–9. — Memoires for Paul de Man: Second Edition. Trans. Andrew. Docherty. and Peggy Kamuf. 1982.BIBLIOGRAPHY Nicholas Heron. “The Virtual Codex from Page Space to e-space. 221 . Eduardo Cadava. 2 (2003). — “The Suspended Substantive: On Animals and Men in Giorgio Agamben’s The Open. Trans. 2 (2002). no. no. Giorgio Agamben. “‘Draft 33: Deixis’ / Notes on ‘Deixis’: a Midrashic Chain an exchange of thoughts. Albany: SUNY Press.philobiblon. De La Durantaye. “Introduction: The Interim.” Diacritics 33. no. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Ed. Thomas. 52–67. “Agamben’s Potential. “Integral Actuality. Alan Bass.

2008. 68–91. Poetic Thinking: An Approach to Heidegger. 2005. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. 2005. 2007. 2007. Albany: SUNY Press. Jenny. “A Sense of Loss: Whatever It May Be. New York: Humanity Books. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Trans. 2007. Paul. London: Continuum. “Dead Man Walking: Law and Ethics after Giorgio Agamben’s Auschwitz. 1981. William Mark Hohengarten. 219–242. Andrew Norris. of Voice: Bataille. David. Gray. Life. Oxford: Clarendon Press. — Elucidations of Hölderlin’s Poetry (1981). Froment-Meurice. “The Unity of Reason in the Diversity of Its Voices. Habermas. 2000. Derrida and Disinterest.” In Sovereignty and Life. 222 . Nicholas Heron. Being and Time (1953). Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli. “Supposing the Impossibility of Silence of Sound. 1992.” In Politics. no. Hegarty. Justin Clemens.” In Postmetaphysical Thinking (1988). Godzich. Bruno. “Dismantling Theatricality: Aesthetics of Bare Life. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Gerald Stanton Smith and Marina Tarlinskaja.” International Journal for the Semiotics of Law 12.” In Sovereignty and Life. “Whatever Politics. no. 70–91. Gulli. 1996. Halliburton. Ed. Martin. Sean. 1996. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Manchester: Carcanet. The Emergence of Prose: An Essay in Prosaics. “The Ontology and Politics of Exception: Reflections on the Work of Giorgio Agamben. Wlad and Jeffrey Kittay. Keith Hoeller. Ed. Cambridge: Polity Press. Ed. Marc. Gasparov. Selected Poems. 397–417. Literature and War: Absence and the Chance of Meeting. Stanford: Stanford University Press. 2 (2002).” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. Joan Stambaugh. Thomas. Mikhail Leonovich. Jürgen. Agamben and the Holocaust. 2009. 4 (1999). Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. Barbara. 1982. David. Trans.BIBLIOGRAPHY Edkins. and Alex Murray. London: Continuum. 222–247. Formis. Trans. Durham. 115–148. A History of European Versification (1989). — Starting with Derrida. Trans. Ed. NC: Duke University Press. Literature. — Derrida. Heidegger. London: Continuum. Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli. 1987. 181–192 Fraser.” Paragraph 25. Gaston.

Ed. “The Sovereign Weaver: Beyond the Camp. New York: Harper Collins. — Revolution in Poetic Language (1974). Maurice Buxton Forman. 1935. Literature. John. 11–22. Andrew Norris. 266–290. no. Peter D. — The Letters of John Keats. — On the Way to Language (1959).” In Politics. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. “Approaching Limit Events: Siting Agamben.” In Politics. 1996. Ed. NC: Duke University Press.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. Nicholas. Ernesto. 1991. “The Saturday of Messianic Time. Ed. Paris: Éditions du Seuil. Stanford: Stanford University Press. 248–261. Trans. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. 2008. no. William McNeill and Julia Davis. William Lovitt. 2007. One and Two (1961). Andreas.” In Sovereignty and Life. New York: Columbia University Press. 2007. Heron. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.BIBLIOGRAPHY — Hölderlin’s Hymn ‘The Ister’ (1984). Dominick. Kristeva. Kaufman. New York: Harper & Row. David E. Idea of Prose. Trans. Eleanor. Margaret Waller. 1969. 223 . 1 (2008). 2007. Selected Poems. 37–54. 2005. 1984. — Poetry. Thought. Jeff Fort. NC: Duke University Press.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. Durham.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 106. “Law and Life. Trans. “As If the Time Were Now: Deconstructing Agamben. Justin Clemens. Lacoue-Labarthe. 1971. 2005. — Nietzsche. Heidegger and the Politics of Poetry (2002). Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli. 107–134. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Ed. Nicholas Heron and Alex Murray. Trans. Kiesow. Philipe. 1971. Trans. 1977. Albert Hofstadter. David Farrell Krell. Vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli. Ed. Keats. Durham. Trans. — The Question Concerning Technology. Σηµειωτιχη [Semiotike]: Recherches pour une Sémanalyse. London: Harper Perennial. Ed. Julia. San Francisco: Harper Collins. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. “Bare Life or Social Indeterminacy?” In Sovereignty and Life. 97–133. Life. LaCapra. Rainer Maria. 2 (2007). Laclau. Urbana: University of Illinois Press. 2008. Johnson. Language. “Idea of Poetry. 126–162. Andrew Norris. Hertz. Oxford: Oxford Paperbacks. Kalyvas. Trans.

1009–1022. “Introduction. 193–211. 2008. Esther Norma. Jean-François. Ed.” Trans. Ed. “Linguistic Survival and Ethicality: Biopolitics. Simon. 1991. no. Nicholas Heron. Justin Clemens. William. — “Myth Interrupted. 43–70.” In The Question Concerning Technology.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. 89–105. London: Harper Perennial. McQuillan. Lovitt. 1977. “Notes on Media and Biopolitics: ‘Notes on Gesture’. “The Nazi Genocide and the Writing of the Holocaust Aporia: Ethics and Remnants of Auschwitz. Literature. Murray. Life. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. i–xxxix. London: Picador. unpaginated. Ed. and Alex Murray. Andrew Norris. “Law of Friendship: Derrida and Agamben. 2. Nancy. Semantics Vol. Paradise Lost. Marion. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. “Beyond Spectacle and the Image: The Poetics of Guy Debord and Agamben. Nicholas Heron. Peter Connor. 2008.” Kritikos 2 (2005). “The Political Life in Giorgio Agamben.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. John. and Testimony in Remnants of Auschwitz. Justin Clemens. NC: Duke University Press. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.” In Politics. Stocksfield: Acumen. Trans. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. and Alex Murray. Alex. Milton. Colin. Lyons.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. Lessons on the Analytic of the Sublime (1991).” New Formations. The Man Without Qualities (1978). Simon Sparks. 1 (2008). Peter Connor. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Musil. 1977. — The Philosophy of Agamben. 2004. Life. 4 (2006). Catherine. In The Inoperative Community. Deborah. Morgan Wortham. Robert. Lyotard. Multiple Arts. Elizabeth Rottenberg. Muses II.BIBLIOGRAPHY Levitt. 2008. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Durham. 2006. 1994. Sophie Wilkins and Burton Pike. William Lovitt. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Stanford: Stanford University Press. John. no. 164–181. 15–36. — “Playing with Law: Agamben and Derrida on Postjuridical Justice. Ed. Ed. 1997. Mills. Trans. 2005. 198–221. Subjectivation.” MLN 121. 62 (2007). 224 . Trans. Literature. Jean-Luc.

Antonio. Princeton: Princeton University Press. no. Ed. 109–125. Oliver. Biopolitics. www. New York: roof Books. no. Arianna Bove. “Stopping the Anthropological Machine: Agamben with Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty. 262–283. Ross. 92–108. William. Durham. “Time of Death. Oxford: Oxford Paperbacks. Manchester: Manchester University Press. 2007. Bridget McDonald. “Except for Law: Raymond Chandler. Andrew ed. London: Penguin. 1951. New York: Continuum. and the Politics of Exception. Durham. 1–23. Spinks. 121–144. Capitalism. Stanford: Stanford University Press. Trans.html. 1987. 1 (2008). — Republic. The Uncanny: An Introduction. Pound. Stanford: Stanford University Press. 2007. 2003. 51–59. no. Stephen. Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli. James Ellroy. Stanford: Stanford University Press.” Phaenex 2. 1–14. Plato. Negri.” Contretemps 5 (2004). Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. The Collected Dialogues. Brett. “Giorgio Agamben: The Discreet Taste of the Dialectic. — Time for Revolution. Royle.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. Politics.” In Sovereignty and Life. Ed. Lee. Trans. Kelly. Silliman. 2 (2002). Alexander. Trans. 1 (2008).” In Politics. generation-online. ABC of Reading. Benjamin. 1961.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. The Language Instinct. Andrew Norris. 2005. Rasch. — “The Exemplary Exception: Philosophical and Political Decisions in Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. 63–71.” In Sovereignty and Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. Ed. London: Faber. 1994. The New Sentence. 1993. Oxford: Oxford World’s Classics. Matthew Calarco and Steven DeCaroli.” Trans. Pinker. Edith Hamilton and Huntingdon Cairns. 2008. Robin Waterfield. 2005. Ed. Pope. — “The Ripe Fruit of Redemption. 2 (2007).” Angelaki 7. “Potenza Nuda? Sovereignty. 225 . no. “Introduction. Nicholas. NC: Duke University Press. “From Sovereign Ban to Banning Sovereignty. Ron. Neilson. NC: Duke University Press. Noys. Matteo Mandarini.BIBLIOGRAPHY — The Experience of Freedom (1988). Norris. Selected Poetry. Ezra. 2003. 2008. Alison.

contempaesthetics. — “‘Systematic Rule-governed Violations of Convention’: The Poetics of Procedural Constraint in Ron Silliman’s BART and The Chinese Notebook. 219–237. Literature. 2 (2002). Whitehead. 2004. 4 (2007). Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Stanford: Stanford University Press. — In the Process of Poetry: The New York School and the Avant-Garde. Durham. Trans. Andrew Norris. — “Poetry Machines: Repetition in the Early Poetry of Kenneth Koch. Stiegler. Nihilism: The Uncanniest of Guests.” www. — On Mourning: Theories of Loss in Modern Literature. Weller. Philosophy. 173–197. 2008.” In Politics. Wall. 1999. 83–117. PA: Bucknell University Press.” Paragraph 31. 1960. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Andrew Norris. Affect and the Politics of Style. Lewisburg. Tzara.” Contemporary Literature 48.” Strategies: Journal of Theory. 226 . Thomas Carl. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. 1 (2001). 344–364. Barbara Wright. 2001. 1998. Agamben’s Critique of Derrida. 2005. “Cutting the Branches for Akiba.blogspot. “Poiesis and Art-making: A Way of Letting-be. Radical Passivity: Lévinas. 1 (Dec. Blanchot and Agamben. 23– — “Thinking the Post-human: Literature. 1992. — William Watkin’s Blog. Oeuvres II. Valéry. Shane. Vogt. no. Paul. NC: Duke University Press. http://williamwatkin. Richard Beardsworth and George Collins. Paris: Bibliothèque de la Pléiade/nrf Gallimard. Ed. 3 (2008).” EnterText 1. Durham. no. Watkin. New York: SUNY Press. Metaphysics and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. Erik. Silliman and Agamben. Thurschwell. Adam. no. “S/Citing the Camp. Derek H. NC: Duke University Press. William. Technics and Time: The Fault of Epimetheus (1994).” Textual Practice 15. Shklovsky.” In Politics. Tristan. Ed. Trans. — “The Materialization of Prose: Poiesis versus Dianoia in the work of Godzich & Kittay. “Friendly Little Communities: Derrida’s Politics of Death.php? articleID=216 accessed 17 September 2008. London: Calder Press. Culture and Politics 15. 2000). 2005. no. 499–529. 74–106. no. Seven DADA Manifestos and Lampisteries.

“On the Messianic Structures of Walter Benjamin’s Last Reflections. London: Taylor and Francis. 132–147. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Wolfreys.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 107. Nicholas Heron. Ziarek. “Face to Face with Agamben. Krzysztof. Life. or On Profanation. Ed. Slavoj. Irving. “After Humanism: Agamben and Heidegger. Ed. 2008. no. The Parallax View. Ed. MA: The MIT Press. and Alex Murray. Thanos. Cambridge. Julian. the Other in Love. Peter Osborne. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. 227 . Justin Clemens. Literature. 187–210. “Soulblind. 2006. 2004.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. Life.BIBLIOGRAPHY Wohlfarth.” In Walter Benjamin: Critical Evaluations in Cultural Theory. 169–231. Literature. 1 (2008). Zartaloudis. 149–163. 2008. Nicholas Heron.” In The Work of Giorgio Agamben: Law. or. Justin Clemens. and Alex Murray. Zizek.

This page intentionally left blank .

212n. 212n. 67.6. 216n. 204n.4.4. 211n. 210n.24. 152. 71–2. 207n.1.9.11. 209n. 216n. 141. 213n. 7–12. 209n. 8–9. 87.33. 100–9.15 Adorno. 161. 89.12. 111.12. 25.30 The Coming Community 63–6 180–2.3. 95.12. 135–9. 126–34. 203n.18 Signatura rerum 213n. 32. 100–14.5 Means Without Ends 58.18.6 The Man Without Content 45–6. 204n. 158.1 Il sacramento del linguaggio 215n. 5. 210n. 89–90 aesthetics 16.19.6. 18.18 . 210n. 211n. 67–8. 133. 204n. 48. 209n. 208n.33.n.10.31. 157. 59. 209n. 204n.13. 182–3. 212n.21. 209n. 210n. 47. 189–92.15. 72.1.12.INDEX abyss between poetry philosophy 45–7. 171. 169–71. 213n. 54–64.12 Infancy and History 4–5. 149. 212n.19 Profanations 41–3. 209n. 205n. 205n. Giorgio Bartleby 210n. 210n. 205n.15. 143. 208n. 113.15.29. 148–9. 143–4. 139. 124. 229 “K” 213. 204n.29 The Open 5.15. 20–2.18. 123. 206n.15. 209n. 206n. 174–80.7. 209n.5 Homo Sacer 1. 213n.28 Idea of Prose 33–6. 61–2. Theodor 29.23. 207n. 209n. 205n.7 Language and Death 2. 47–9. 64–6.29 Potentialities 43. 187–8.35. 54.26. 204n.4. 79–86. 12–13. 213n.16. 146.18. 47. 81–3.8 Ninfe 210n. 212n. 212n.13. 83–4. 13. 208n. 30. 216n. 204n. 91.7 Stanzas 14–19. 45–7. 209n. 205n. 206n.2.34. 209n.27.22 Idea della prosa 210n. 210n.32. 125. 212n. 122–4. 206n. 166–7.11 integral actuality 54–7.33. 204n. 206n. 206n.15. 204n.2 Remnants of Auschwitz 26–32. 206n. 91–7.18.15. 208n. 210n. 205n.5.7 The End of the Poem 32. 158 actuality 43–4. 196 as poetic spacing 137–8. 163. 58–9.13. 210n.19. 213n. 215n. 123. 98. 209n. 36–7. 205n. 204n. 24.12 State of Exception 171.18 Agamben.10. 215n. 37.9.22. 45.25. 209n. 92.

213n. 70–4. Peter 103. 125. 206n. 165. 132.3. 106.10 biopolitical 1.6. 71–6. 118. 216n.17 Benveniste. 64. Steven 206n. 200 animal 5–8. 150. Justin 204n. 216n. 215n. 12–13.19 Clemens. 119. 62–6. 204n.17 Bakhtin.9 Caton.4 Burger. 91. 41–4. 209n. 161. 212n. 132. 122–4. 108. 176 anaphora 21. 168.32. 156–7. 149. 212n. 31. 10. 175. 73. 211n. Alexander 210n. 163. 149 as not 68. 184 bringing forth 70. 199. Charles 78–9.6 Colebrook. Émile 23. 122. Robert 30. Giorgio (Cont’d) The Time That Remains 88–94. 27–8. 69. 189. 92. 157. 150. 132.34 corn (tip/corner) 186–8 couplet 130. 43–5. 70–4.3 Calarco.24. Derek 213n. 215n. 146.9 Cooke. 135. 106. Andrew 207n. 108 Badiou. 79–91. Josh 208n. 197. 212n. 131. Matthew 204n. 142. 95. 215n.34 Baudelaire. 146–54. 210n.39 boustrophedonic 139–45. 20–5. 212n. Robert 203n. 211n.10 lieu commun 85. John 102. 166–93. 207n. 111. M.30 Bernstein.15 caesura 13–14. 147. 58.3. Walter 9. 100–14 as if 88–94. 207n.9. 66. 205n. 215n.42. 212n. 206n. 107. 101–2.1. 152 ¯ ¯ Ashbery.2.12.18 aura 92–7. Claire 211n. 210n. 211n.4.29. 92–3. 95 Benjamin. 73–5. 54–5. 174–80 appropriation 7. 212n. 164. 146–7. Daniel 154. 110–13. 152.6 Attridge.38. 189–92 Arnaut.8. Honoré de 104 Bartleby 43. 94. 98.44. 79.17. 77. 207n. 211n.9. 181 bios 1. 216n.26 230 Balzac. 120–1 Browning. 99. 197 arche (authentic origin) 49–50.8. 59–60. 86. 48–51. 196. 128. 16. 145 Aristotle 17. 83–6 arche-presence 86. 122 aletheia (truth as unveiled or unconcealed) 28. 211n. 76. 98. 50. 165. M. 146–7 .10. 81–2.39 anti-poiesis 83–114. 206n. 134. 159. Alain 29. 210n. 210n. 201. 31. 144. 153.20. 16. 137. 155. 71. 95. 193. 120. Anna 64–5.33.4 criticism 16.15 Akhmatova. 157.41 Buch. 178.15. 87. 146. 105. 138. 213n. 97. 98. 144–9. 133. 171. 27. 68–9. 109. 209n. 161. 178–9.INDEX Agamben. 117. 64.4. 152. 159. 63–5. 86. 53–7. 65–6. 207n. 187 artist 16. 214n. 103. 170. 206n. 197. Charles 95. 98.18 Benjamin. 82 Hos me 88–94. 60. 208n.4 anaphora/cataphora matrix 21. 79. 196 apotropaic 48–51.2 Cohen.43.1 communicability 6. 63. 204n. 90. 207n. 128. 83–6. 3.19 Celan 33–4. 57. 213n. 210n. 102. 29. 18. 168–72 creation 16. 215n.15. 102. 154.

31 enigma 176–80 enjambement 14.18. Marcel 67. 53. 8–13. 215n. 205n. Jean-Philippe 203n. Rachel Blau 206n. 165. 29. 24–5. 187. 128–9. 127. 206n. 31.21.12. Sean 205n. 67–8.3 deixis 20–3. 30. 109. 205n. 137–8. 86.5 gag 59–60. 106 Drucker. 92. 129. 123. 47. 67–8.16.17 entelechy 81–3. 164–5. 164 finitude 20. 106. 121. 208n. 67. 199. 42. 186. 15. 37. 216n. Colin 205n. 29.18. 170. 178. 146. 124. 54. 157. 46.16. 188 Edkins. 173. 109. 211n.15. 168–75. 134. 145–6.22.2. 27. 132. 212n. 125–6. 191. 85. 216n. 210n. 97. Barbara 206n. 180–1. Anne 209n. 201 form-of-life 58. 123. 26–7. 57. 191–2. 96. 80–1. 150. 64–5. 206n. 209n.6 Froment-Meurice. 131. 199. Thomas 205n. 29–31. 24–37. 192.11 231 enunciation 6. 122 Dante 32. 146 figural 148–53. 73.4 Derrida. 19. 77–9. 58–65. 60.26 . 43. 145. 185. 209n.8 event 24. 172–3. 62.8. 111–13. 106. 23–5.14 Docherty. 135–66. 87–8. 149. 149–50.4 epoch 53. 207n. 130. Johanna 214n. 135. 215n. 98. 88. 107.46. 107. 6.4. 182–3.1 framing (parergon.24 Formis. 211n. 147. 93. 51. 105.6 DuPlessis. 162. 210n. 106. 42. 147. 208n.1. 145. 46. 57.5 De La Durantaye. 132 fiction 89–90. 106. 181. 193.26 Gasparov. 144.24 Düttmann. 215n. 158–60. 25. 207n. 56–7. 105. 88–90. 208n. Mikhail Leonovich 216n. Jacques 12.3 disinterest 101–3. 22. 76. 126. 179. 126–7.18. 209n. 173–4. 53–4. 213n. 199. 159. 32–8. 134. 208n. 186 Davis. 212n. Jenny 203n. 165. 196 différance 13.19 Foucault. 196. 29–32. 192. 215n. 168.9 desubjectivization 23–32. Michel 41. 195 expropriation 31. 128.14 Duchamp.9. 31. 192. 215n. 131. Andrew 204n. 72. 125. 130. 141 Dillon.12 De Boever.5.34.36 gesture 20. 117.6. 210n.29 Deranty. 45–8. 106.42 ease 180–5. 160. Robert 207n.32 genius 67–9. 47–8. 198 Fraser. gestell) 78. 208n. 94. Alexander García 50. 13. 33. Leland 208n. 185. 42. 182.17. 216n. 195.15. 123. 188. 197. 156.4 experience 4.31.33. 19. Marc 210n. 191 ex nihilo (creation) 69.1 Gaston. 208n. 88. 94–7. 206n.14. 127–8. 106–13. 182. 210n. 126.15 Eaglestone. David 212n. 35. 203n. 156. 213n. 209n.10 dictation 28. 79. 137.24. 41–3. 152–3. 88. 153. 113. 82–3. 170. 215n. 96–7. 53. 67. 118. 205n. 203n.INDEX Damascius 61–2. 112. 141.

Paul 212n. 205n.18 Kalyvas. 169–70. 205n.9 Hölderlin 47. 165.6. 120. 165. 86. 74. Thomas 141 Guillaume. 199. 216n. 216n. 206n. 211n. 63. 79. 201.4 Keats. 45.32. 178. 73. 215n. 148. 141. 76.22. Language. 57. 20–3. 122 gramma (grammatology) 140–1.13 Habermas. 210n. 174 having see habit and appropriation Hegarty.6. Franz 106. 36. 22. 55. 101. 30. 213n. 63. 122. 75. 107–11 Kaufman. 197.25.16. 190. Glenn 65–6. 205n. 34. 46. Julia 214n. 99.19 Heidegger.32 Hölderlin’s Hymn ‘The Ister’ 198–9. 50. 20. 212n. 191–2. 35–8. 211n.8 Halliburton. 99. 205n. Nicholas 209n. 194–5 indistinction 1. 113. 131–2.1 Gray.3 232 hesitation 156–8. 77. 124. 67. 73. 20–3. 207n. 107–13.19 human 5–15. 37–8. 214n. 161. 152. 124 Kiesow.7 On the Way to Language 122. 71.15.8. 161–2.20 Hegel. Andreas 211n.1.16. 167. David 119 harmonia 47. 210n. 205n. 213n. 190 impersonality 30. 100–1. 135. 77. 96. 33. 25. 54. 146. 151. 215n. 155.17. 198. 145. 118–25. 196–9. 205n.27. 215n. 147.11. 198–9.15.6. 120. 25–6.1 history 8. 206n.32.17. Gustave 151 Gulli. 170 see also indifference ineffable 9–13. W. 32. 209n. 59–60 Kristeva. 215n. 57. G. 58.18 Being and Time 22. 57. 211n. 87. John 26–7. 133.8. 77. 203n. 215n. 204n. 12. 107–12. 206n. 52–4. 38. 201. 99–101. 59–60.15 Johnson.1. 133–4. 18. Martin 12–14.10 judgement 11. 205n. 117. 125–6. 153. 17.27 infancy 6–17. 204n. 212n. 54–7. 80. 210n. 108. 102.39 Godzich. Jürgen 109 habit 129–34. 77. David E. 212n. 146 Kafka. 125 see also desubjectivization and dictation indifference 17. 30. 212n. 162. 134.9 The Question Concerning Technology 12. 159. 77. 181 ¯ Kommerell. 210n. 211n. 204n.16 Poetry. 145–8. Rainer Maria 203n.8. 174. 47. 90. 70–9. 51. 70. 157. 179.16. 60. Babel) 29–31. 138. Eleanor 203n. 161 inspiration 32. 98. 28. 214n. 100. 20.22. 157. 138. 16. 207n.11 Heraclitus 47. 136. Bruno 209n. 113.1.INDEX glossolalia (babble.2 Kant. 22–6. 67. Thought 70.27 Gould. Wlad and Jeffrey Kittay 20. 143–5. 195 integral actuality 54–5. 37. 37. 174–5 Heron. 170. 63. 20. 19.36. Immanuel 9.4. 94. 210n.7. F. 178.34.9 . 22. 35. 214n. Max 47. 214n. 87. 207n. 38. 36.1 kle sis 88–9. 121.39 Ideal Form (eidos) 80–6. 207n. 204n.

195–7. 117–34. 211n. 167.20 . 83–116. 49–52. 32. 171–5. 30. 32. 76–9. 169. 57–8.19 logos 8. 103.2. 118. 160. 56. 101–14. 174 modern art 46. 102–3. 197.3. 196. 133–4. 213n.13 Muse 27.18 Milton. 135.12. 12. 107–14. 183. 16–17. 82–3. 6 as medium 53. 207n.6 Matisse. 63.10 language experience of 10–11.11 Lyons. 54.1 Laclau.8 Mills. 191. 122. 195 Negri. 208n.6. 204n. 16.22 negation/negativity 2–3. 160. 169–70. 45. 41–68. 193.18 morphe 79–81 Murray.8.1 Lacoue-Labarthe. 90. 21.2 measure 97. 201. Esther Norma 212n. Simon 213n. 85–6. 55–66. 15. 20. 100–3. 198–9 and modernity 85. 117. and subjectivity 25–8. 69.21 life 1–2. 106–7. 203n. 57. 91.5 nihilism 3. 6.1. 118. Friedrich 42. Catherine 26. 206n. 10. 215n. 106. 214n. 176–7. John 169. 203n. 128–9. 89. 148. 155. Jean-Luc 29. 99. 103–4. Colin 203n. 55.48. 108–9. 213n. 213n. Deborah 209n. 196. 157. 131. Stéphane 58. 166. 211n. 210n. 35–6. 88.16 that there is 4–40. 82. 118–21. 47. 155. 123–4. 182–5. Alex 205n.44. 72. 209n. 211n. 179 Levitt. 160. 69. 129. 204n. 209n. 141. 96–8. 92–4. 195–6. 174 233 messianism 16.15. 169–71.42.24 logopoiesis 77. 204n. 165. 36–8.3. 50–1.1 Morgan Wortham. 129–34 museum 78. 54. 131–4. Antonio 2. 215n. 67. 35–7. 215n.3 Nietzsche. 211n. 210n. 22. 196. 199–201.21 Musil. 63. 153. 144.12. 145. 13. 166.INDEX LaCapra. 91. 87–91. 143. 89. 80. 33.19 Marion. 6. 196. 193. Dominick 203n. Henri “Back” 76 McQuillan. 122 thing of thought as such 49–50. 195 experimentum linguae 4. 211n. 8. 158. 53. 188–9.1. William 204n. 17. 209n. 204n. 129.2. 8. 25. Phillipe 29. John 206n. 196. 99. 57. 45–6. 117. 128. 113. 92. 107. 16.45 Lovitt. 132. 45–7. 167. 76. 145.20.11. Jean-François 52. 144–6. 105. 128.24 Lyotard. 114. 200. 48. 65. 173. 157. 64–7. 9. 11. 20–3. 89.17 Mallarmé. 212n. 213n. 74. 25.15. 110 Malevich 106. 145. 11. 209n. 125. 44–6. Robert 83 name 9–10. 149. 26.18. 179. 67. 136. 212n. 28. 179 love 14. 157. 209n. 144–56.13 Nancy. 128. Giacomo “L’infinito” 124–34. 179–80. 147.6. 206n. 184. 167.3 modernity 1. 199. 196 Leopardi. 204n. 203n. 191. 208n. 136. 67.13. 208n. 88–93. Ernesto 203n. 153. 103. 35–7. 72–3. 90. 76. 216n.

12–13. 113–14. 214n. 195–6 planar 128. 127.19. 163–4. 51. 58–60.4 presupposition 9.33. 50. 86. 213n. 22.40. 96. 166. 206n. 63–8. 117–18.1. 192. 197. 137. 206n. 214n. 195. 43–4. 191–3. 101–2. 124. 210n. 97. Stephen 214n. 44–5. 49–57. 81. 213n. 126. 178–9.18 Rasch. 72. 132. 163. 211n. 179 Pinker. Benjamin 203n. 181. 200–1 recursive-projection 21. 140. 60. 164–5. 122. 167. 186–8. 93 Pope. 192 poem body 44. 129. 28.47 ready-made 85. 55. 162.1 ontology 5–6. 175. 8. 209n. 137–43. 153. 204n. 83. 30–1. 154. 144–5. 169–70.19. 134. 211n.87–116 pop art 85. 184. 142–4. 32. 160. 145. 193. 144.25. 17. 130.27. 209n. William 211n. 175. 104–5. 214n.1 praxis 58. 207n.3 Idea of 54–7. 87–90. 74–5. 67. 48. 205n. 146. 200.17. 120–1. 168–9. 24. 103–8. 153. 154–74. 60. 198–9. 11. 29.1 anti. 44. 63–4. 79. 208n. 58–9. 193. 133.1. 86. 61. 138. 132. 136. 138. 215n. 120. line 79. 144–5. 144. 43. 137–46. 105–6. 79. 156. 173 end of 135–9. 143. 172. 88–92. 173. Arthur 26–7. 215n. 137–40. 31. 188.1 razo de trobar 32. 207n. 152 passivity 30. 113. 173 poetry and philosophy 14. 34–5. 152–3 periplus 132–3. 49. 130. 197. 67. 69–87. 35–7. 172.16. 140–1. 201 metrical-musical element (poetry) 128. 141.1 Paul 29. 58. 207n. 155. 121. 28. 129–31. 98. 208n. 42–6. 167.11 Pound. 122. 197. 17. 20–1. 94. 113 . 139. 5. 88. 180. 211n. 114. 178–9. 192–3. 163. 146–9. 62–3. 79. 93 reproducibility 84–6.4. 210n. 117–18. 99. 183. 208n. 210n. 151. 79–81.7 Noys.1 prose 15. 71–5. 90. 178. 186. 156. 62. 33. 37. 133. 171. 123–4. 210n. 112. 169. 137. 48–9. 132–4. 69. 170.9. 32. 23–8. 100. Ezra 102. Andrew 214n. 149.8 Rimbaud. 170. 184–7. 135. 128–9.6. 128–9.9 poetry advent 126–33. 125. 35. 195–7. 63–6. 88. 191. 195. 27. 71–3. 107–9. 183–92. 198–9 philology 2. 216n. 71–2. 102. 28. 145–6. 211n.4 Plato 14. 172. 169 production 58. 157. 51.39.27. 17. 21. 52. 13. 206n. 47. 91.4 Pacman 159 parable 148–9.11 234 poiesis 3.34. 44–8. 79. 155–62. 170. 211n. 167. 53.40. 145. 134. Alexander 168–72 potential 13. 186 phone 8. 153–5.INDEX Norris. 45. 106. 129. 159–60. 81–3. 92–8 revelation 52–3 rhetorician 104–6 rhyme 14. 144. 191.

160. 169. 55. 174–5. 56. 22–3. 127. 13–19. 28. 117–18. 46. 111–12. art 75–7 thing as such of thought 49. 184–9. 48. 110–11 tautegorical 52. 105–6. Ferdinand de 17. 165. 127. 186–7. 155–62. 35–7. 212n. 131. 173. 171–2. 144–5.9 Troubador 14–17. 153. 197. 54. 48.4 terror 99–106 thing. 150. 211n. 212n. 172–4.4. 32. 63. 134–5. 146–7.39 space 14. 122. 149. 208n. 137–8. 125. 210n. 169. 184–8.INDEX Romanticism 69.10 singularity 5. 199 semiotic 6. 47–8. 106. 142.4 sestina 154–5. 177–80. 26–32. 182. 114. 19. 84. 51–2. 117. 131. 56. 152–65. 122. 60. 80. 110–11. 133. 131. 136. 32. 196 235 state of exception 1 Stiegler. Lee 205n. 188. 179. 205n. 138. 71. 57. 214n. 27–8. 32. 186 turn see enjambment and verse . 164–5. 144. 188. 80. 140.11 kairos 145. 169. 192. 93–7. 24. 43. 151 tautology 6. 131–2. 199. 192.47. 201 tone/tonos 163–4 transmissibility 30. 165. 173 eschaton 88. 56–7. 77–8. 149. 107–8 sign 17–22. 30. 149. 125–8. 72. 97–8. 187 shock 94–7. 124.20 Silliman.3 Royle. 121 tension 35. 133. 185 tabular 64. 215n. 197. 154. 46. 158–64. 136–44. 46. 162. 109. 97. 30. 206n.19 stanza 13–17. 171. 94–104. 108. 35. 156. 155–6. 136–43. 31. 172. Ron 206n. 77. 141. Bernard 211n. 21. 212n. 150–4. 34. 170. 197. 184 silence 8. 140. 181–3. 207n. 172. 133. 144. 201. 70. 127–9. 84. 65. 60–8. 199 sovereignty 1–2. 188. 149–50. 113.6 Spinks. 6. 133–4. 159–60. 27 scission 2. 61. 207n. 150. 17. 166–93. 192 operational time 150–3. 9. 167. 194 semantic 27–9. 145. 178–88. 216n.12. 196. 28. 23. 125. 200. 11. 99. 122. 130.4 techne 73–86.42 time/temporality chronos 145. 149–53 linear time 87. 167. 108–9. 37. 199–201. 136–9.5 Saussure. 154. 92. 125. 149. 85. 142. 57. 161. 120–1. 167–72. 163 and space 20. 178–9. 55–6. 155. 19. 197. 185. 67. 195. 146. 184. 12.11 ergon 158–60. 99. 160–9. 182 tablet 44. 178–9. 193. 53. 133. 199. 105–6. 124. 208n. 143. 32–3. 149. 135. 197.8 taste 99–103. 201. 214n.3. 173–5. 28.6 stil novist 14. 211n. 206n. 83. 211n. 160. 157–8. 83. 75. 97–9. Nicholas 203n. 131.21. 20. 45–6. 150. 127. Adam 203n. 149. 117–34. 158. 194.46. 32. 216n.15. 128. 175–9. 59.27. 63–4. 174 Thurschwell. 172. 154. 60. 199–201.

15 Wolfreys. 204n.36 Ziarek.11 Weller.1. 211n. 215n.20. 125.36.37. 207n. Krzysztof 205n. Robert 122 Warhol. 82. 75. Thanos 210n. 207n.INDEX uncanny 2. 30.45 work see praxis and entelechy writer’s block 67–8 xenoglossia 29–30. Vincent 70. 201 Vogt. 102 Varro 58 verse as versus 128–34. 214n.20 voice 3–8. 179. 12. Julian 208n. 152.34 zoe 1.5 Walser. 209n.39 Zartaloudis.47. 213n. 207n. Thomas Carl 207n. 103. 59. 173–5. 133. 168. 199.10 Wall. 140–4.6. 177.21. Irving 209n. Slavoj 210n.15 Zizek. 178. 28. 206n. 206n.33.27. 7. 208n. 212n.39 zoon logon echon 5.5 Valéry. 166–7. 205n. 216n. 171.7 Wohlfarth.24. 186. 128.13.21. 213n. 135–65.10. 199. 21–5. 33. 216n. Paul 56. 45–8. 157–8. Andy 93 Watkin. Shane 206n. Derek H. William 204n.2 whatever (quodlibet) 63–5 Whitehead.44. 207n. 8 236 .1 van Gogh. Erik 203n. 208n. 212n.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful